Electronic controllers for

centralised air-conditioning units

EN – MSK 444
Installation & User Manual
CONTENTS
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................. 7
1.1 General Description......................................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1.1 Typical applications: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1.2 Technical data: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
1.1.3 Main functions: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
1.2 Models and Features ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2 Mechanical Assembly ............................................................................................................................................ 9
2.1 Mechanical dimensions ................................................................................................................................................................ 11
3 Electrical Connections......................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 General warnings............................................................................................................................................................................ 12
3.1.1 Power supply - High voltage inputs (relay)............................................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1.2 TRIAC ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1.3 Analogue inputs-Probes ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
3.1.4 Serial connections TTL connection ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
3.2 Wiring diagrams.............................................................................................................................................................................. 12
3.2.1 Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
3.2.2 Example of low voltage input/output connection ................................................................................................................................................................. 17
3.2.2.1 Example of current/voltage input connection ............................................................................................................................................................. 17
3.2.3 Example of low voltage inputs NTC/DI...................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
3.2.3.2 Example of AO1 / AO2 connection ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
3.2.3.3 Example of AO3 - AO4 connection ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
3.2.3.4 Example of AO5 connection.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 19
3.2.3.5 Example of DO5 connection.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 19
3.2.4 Example of connection of high voltage outputs..................................................................................................................................................................... 20
3.3 Examples of network connections............................................................................................................................................. 21
3.3.1 Example of connection SB600 – SE600...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
3.3.2 Example of connection SD600/SC600 – SE600........................................................................................................................................................................ 21
3.3.3 Example of connection SC600 – SKP 10.................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
3.4 SKW22 - SKW22L remote LCD terminal................................................................................................................................... 22
3.5 SKP22 - SKP22L remote LCD terminal...................................................................................................................................... 23
3.5.1 Example of connection SC600 – SE600 – SKP10 – SK22/22L .............................................................................................................................................. 23
4 Technical Data....................................................................................................................................................... 24
4.1 General specifications ................................................................................................................................................................... 24
4.2 I/O features...................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
4.3 Mechanical specifications ............................................................................................................................................................ 27
4.4 Display and LEDS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 27
4.5 Serial.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 27
4.6 Transformer..................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
4.7 Mechanical dimensions ................................................................................................................................................................ 27
4.8 Permitted use .................................................................................................................................................................................. 28
4.9 Improper Use .................................................................................................................................................................................. 28
4.10 Disclaimer......................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
5 User Interface (folder PAr/UI) .......................................................................................................................... 29
5.1 Keys.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
5.1.1 Description of keys and associated functions.......................................................................................................................................................................... 29
5.1.2 Local On/OFF .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
5.1.2.1 Device ‘On’ --> ‘OFF’............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 31
5.1.2.2 Device ‘OFF’ --> ‘On’............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 31
5.1.3 Description of keys - combined action...................................................................................................................................................................................... 32
5.1.3.3 Manual alarm acknowledgment and reset .................................................................................................................................................................... 32
5.2 LEDs and Display ............................................................................................................................................................................ 33
5.2.1 Display ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 33
5.2.2 LEDs: decimal point ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 33
5.2.3 LEDs: States and Operating Modes ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 34
5.2.4 LEDs: Values and Units of Measure ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 34
5.2.5 LEDs: utilities...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 35
5.3 First switch on ................................................................................................................................................................................. 35
5.4 Access to folders - menu structure ........................................................................................................................................... 36
5.4.1 Main Display Menu.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 36

Energy Flex MSK 444

2/225
 5.4.2 Operating Mode Menu................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 37
5.4.3 States Menu....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 38
5.4.3.1 Display Inputs/Outputs (AiL, diL, tCL1/AOL, dOL)....................................................................................................................................................... 38
5.4.3.2 Setting the clock (CL) .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
5.4.3.3 Alarm Display (AL)................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42
5.4.3.4 Example of how to set the setpoint (SP) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 43
5.4.3.5 Display and reset compressor/pump hours .................................................................................................................................................................. 46
5.4.4 Programming menu......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 47
5.4.4.6 Parameters (folder PAr) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 47
5.4.5 Functions (Par/FnC folder) ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 48
5.4.6 Entering a password (Par/PASS folder)...................................................................................................................................................................................... 48
5.4.7 Alarm events (Par/EU folder) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 49
6 System configuration (folder PAr/CF) ............................................................................................................ 52
6.1 Configuration of analogue inputs.............................................................................................................................................. 52
6.1.1 Configuration of SE600 expansion analogue inputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 52
6.1.2 Configuring SKW remote terminal analogue inputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 52
6.2 Digital Input Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................... 55
6.3 Digital output configuration........................................................................................................................................................ 57
6.4 Configuration of analogue outputs........................................................................................................................................... 59
7 Operating Modes – Temperature Control (folder PAr/tr)........................................................................ 62
7.1 Temperature controller setpoint and hysteresis.................................................................................................................... 62
7.1.1 Setpoint and hysteresis from parameter value ....................................................................................................................................................................... 62
7.1.2 Real setpoint and hysteresis.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 62
7.1.2.1 Setpoint differential: dynamic differential..................................................................................................................................................................... 63
7.1.2.2 Setpoint differential: Economy differential ................................................................................................................................................................... 63
7.1.2.3 Setpoint and hysteresis differentials: Adaptive function........................................................................................................................................... 63
7.1.2.4 Setpoint and hysteresis differentials: Remote differentials (from serial) ............................................................................................................. 63
7.2 Temperature controller................................................................................................................................................................ 64
7.2.1 Temperature control probes ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 64
7.2.2 Proportional temperature control .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 65
7.2.3 Proportional power step temperature control in Cool / Heat mode ............................................................................................................................... 65
7.2.4 Time proportional temperature control in Cool / Heat mode........................................................................................................................................... 66
7.2.5 Temperature control differential ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 67
7.2.5.1 Differential temperature control in Cool / Heat mode ............................................................................................................................................. 67
7.2.6 Digital temperature control .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 68
8 Operating States (folder PAr/St) ...................................................................................................................... 69
8.1 Automatic changeover.................................................................................................................................................................. 70
8.1.1 Example of automatic changeover based on water temperature...................................................................................................................................... 70
8.1.2 Example of automatic changeover based on external air temperature........................................................................................................................... 70
8.2 Operating states table................................................................................................................................................................... 71
8.3 Reversal valve management ........................................................................................................................................................ 72
8.3.1 Changeover from Cool to Heat and vice versa ....................................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.3.2 Changeover from Cool to Antifreeze and vice versa............................................................................................................................................................. 73
8.3.3 Heat – defrost changeover............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 74
8.3.4 Circuit pressure release.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 75
9 Compressors (folder PAr/CP)............................................................................................................................ 76
9.1 Types of compressor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 76
9.1.1 Non-power stage compressors (CP00 = 0)............................................................................................................................................................................... 76
9.1.2 Power stage compressors (CP00 = 1,2) ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 77
9.2 Compressor configuration ........................................................................................................................................................... 77
9.3 Compressor timing ........................................................................................................................................................................ 78
9.3.1 Minimum time between switching off/on for a given compressor................................................................................................................................... 78
9.3.2 Minimum time between switching on/on for a given compressor ................................................................................................................................... 78
9.3.3 Minimum compressor on time .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 78
9.3.4 Minimum time between the switching on of more than one compressor ..................................................................................................................... 78
9.3.5 Minimum time between the switching off of more than one compressor..................................................................................................................... 79
9.3.6 Minimum compressor on time for power stage increase .................................................................................................................................................... 79
9.3.7 Minimum compressor switch on time for decrease in power stages ............................................................................................................................... 79
9.3.8 Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost mode ................................................................................................................................................ 80
9.3.9 Other timings .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 80
9.4 Tandem/trio compressor cycling ............................................................................................................................................... 81
9.5 Star-delta/part-winding activation............................................................................................................................................. 81
9.6 Start unloading ............................................................................................................................................................................... 83
 9.7 Compressor on/off sequence ..................................................................................................................................................... 83
9.7.1 Availability of resources ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 83
9.7.2 Managing resources ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 83
9.7.3 Resource selection criterion ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 84
9.7.4 Selecting the circuit/evaporator .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 84
9.7.5 Selecting the compressor or power stage ................................................................................................................................................................................ 85
9.8 Pump-down on start-up and during shutdown...................................................................................................................... 85
9.9 Exclusion of a circuit or compressor......................................................................................................................................... 86
10 Internal circuit pump (folder PAr/PI).............................................................................................................. 87
10.1 Configuration of internal circuit water pump ........................................................................................................................ 87
10.1.1 Control of the second pump .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 88
10.2 Continuous operation ................................................................................................................................................................... 88
10.2.1.1 Internal circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat................................................................................................................................................... 88
10.2.1.2 Internal circuit pump analogue control in Cool / Heat ............................................................................................................................................. 88
10.3 Operation on call ........................................................................................................................................................................... 89
10.3.1.1 Internal circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat................................................................................................................................................... 89
10.3.1.2 Internal circuit pump analogue control in Cool / Heat ............................................................................................................................................. 89
10.3.1.3 Operation on call: periodic pump activation................................................................................................................................................................ 90
10.4 Pump antilock mode ..................................................................................................................................................................... 91
10.5 Antifreeze operation with pump................................................................................................................................................ 92
11 Recirculation fan (folder PAr/FI)...................................................................................................................... 93
11.1.1 Continuous operation ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
11.1.2 Operation on call........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 93
11.1.2.1 Recirculation fan in Heating / Cooling ........................................................................................................................................................................... 94
11.2 Post-ventilation............................................................................................................................................................................... 94
12 External exchanger fan (folder PAr/FE).......................................................................................................... 95
12.1.1 Continuous operation ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 96
12.1.1.1 External exchanger fan digital control in Cool / Heat................................................................................................................................................ 96
12.1.1.2 External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool / Heat .......................................................................................................................................... 97
12.1.2 Operation in response to request ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 98
12.1.2.3 External exchanger fan digital control in Cool / Heat................................................................................................................................................ 98
12.1.2.4 External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool .....................................................................................................................................................100
12.1.2.5 External exchanger fan analogue control in Heat .....................................................................................................................................................100
12.2 Fan control in defrost .................................................................................................................................................................100
12.3 Fan control with single condensation.....................................................................................................................................101
12.4 Ventilation control in Free-Cooling ........................................................................................................................................101
13 External circuit pump (folder PAr/PE) ..........................................................................................................102
13.1 Configuration of external circuit water pump .....................................................................................................................103
13.1.1 Control of the second pump ................................................................................................................................................................................................103
13.2 Continuous operation .................................................................................................................................................................103
13.2.1.1 External circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat ................................................................................................................................................103
13.2.1.2 External circuit pump analogue control in Cool / Heat...........................................................................................................................................103
13.3 Operation in response to request............................................................................................................................................105
13.3.1.1 External exchanger pump digital control in Cool and Heat ...................................................................................................................................105
13.3.1.2 External exchanger pump analogue control in Cool and Heat .............................................................................................................................105
13.3.1.3 Operation on call: periodic pump activation..............................................................................................................................................................105
13.4 Pump anti-lock (anti-sticking) mode ......................................................................................................................................106
13.5 Antifreeze operation with pump..............................................................................................................................................107
14 Internal exchanger electric heaters (folder PAr/HI) .................................................................................108
14.1 Internal antifreeze heater ..........................................................................................................................................................108
14.1.1 Internal circuit antifreeze heater control ..........................................................................................................................................................................109
14.2 Configuration of integration heaters ......................................................................................................................................110
14.2.1 Integration heater differential ..............................................................................................................................................................................................110
14.2.2 Integration heater regulation................................................................................................................................................................................................112
14.3 Heaters in defrost mode ............................................................................................................................................................113
15 External exchanger electric heaters (folder PAr/HE)................................................................................114
16 Auxiliary output (folder PAr/HA)...................................................................................................................116
17 Boiler (folder PAr/br) ........................................................................................................................................117
17.1 Boiler configuration.....................................................................................................................................................................117
 17.1.1 Boiler differential......................................................................................................................................................................................................................118
17.1.2 Boiler regulation .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................119
18 FreeCooling (folder PAr/FC)............................................................................................................................120
18.1 Free-Cooling control and Free-Cooling Valve control .......................................................................................................120
18.2 Internal Free-Cooling Fan control ...........................................................................................................................................121
18.2.1 Digital control............................................................................................................................................................................................................................121
18.2.2 Analogue control......................................................................................................................................................................................................................122
18.3 External FreeCooling fan control .............................................................................................................................................122
18.3.1 Power limit with Free-Cooling active..................................................................................................................................................................................123
19 Defrost (folder PAr/dF).....................................................................................................................................124
19.1 Defrost ............................................................................................................................................................................................125
19.1.1 Start defrost ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................125
19.1.2 Defrosting cycle ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................125
19.1.3 End defrost and coil drainage...............................................................................................................................................................................................126
19.1.4 Heat – defrost mode changeover........................................................................................................................................................................................126
19.2 Start defrost setpoint ..................................................................................................................................................................127
19.3 Defrost alarm management ......................................................................................................................................................127
19.4 Manual defrost..............................................................................................................................................................................127
19.5 Power failure during defrost .....................................................................................................................................................127
20 Dynamic setpoint (folder PAr/dS) .................................................................................................................128
20.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input .....................................128
20.1.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input with positive offset..........................................128
20.1.2 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input with negative offset.........................................129
20.2 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based on the external temperature.....................................................129
20.2.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based on the external temperature (dS00=1) .............................................................................129
20.2.2 Fixed modification (decalibration) of the setpoint (dS00=2)......................................................................................................................................130
21 Adaptive (folder PAr/Ad) .................................................................................................................................131
21.1 Adaptive function with setpoint modification .....................................................................................................................131
21.2 Adaptive function with hysteresis modification...................................................................................................................133
21.3 Adaptive function with setpoint and hysteresis modification..........................................................................................133
21.4 Setpoint regression......................................................................................................................................................................133
21.5 Protection.......................................................................................................................................................................................134
22 Antifreeze parameters with heat pump (folder PAr/AF) - AntiFreeze ................................................135
23 Block Heat Pump (folder PAr/HP) .................................................................................................................137
23.1.1 Block heat pump 1 - setpoint ...............................................................................................................................................................................................138
23.1.2 Block heat pump from digital input ...................................................................................................................................................................................138
24 Power limitation (folder PAr/PL)....................................................................................................................139
24.1 Operating modes..........................................................................................................................................................................139
24.2 Power limitation - by external temperature (Cool and Heat) ..........................................................................................140
24.3 Power limitation - by temperature (Cool and Heat)...........................................................................................................141
24.4 Power limitation - by high pressure probe (Cool and Heat) ............................................................................................142
24.5 Power limitation - by low pressure probe (Cool and Heat)..............................................................................................143
24.6 Power limitation to 50%..............................................................................................................................................................144
25 Time Bands (folder PAr/tE)..............................................................................................................................145
26 Recovery (folder PAr/rC)..................................................................................................................................147
26.1 Recovery Regulation....................................................................................................................................................................148
26.1.1 Recovery switch-on..................................................................................................................................................................................................................148
26.1.2 Recovery switch-off .................................................................................................................................................................................................................148
26.2 Behaviour of the Compressors during recovery ..................................................................................................................149
26.2.1 Recovery switch-on..................................................................................................................................................................................................................149
26.2.2 Recovery switch-off .................................................................................................................................................................................................................150
27 Alarms and Diagnostics (folder PAr/AL) ......................................................................................................151
27.1.1 Digital Alarms ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................152
27.1.1.1 Flow switch alarm ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................154
27.1.2 Analogue Alarms ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................156
27.1.3 Alarms Table ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................157
27.2 Energy Flex - Alarm log ..............................................................................................................................................................163
28 Parameters (PAr).................................................................................................................................................164
28.1.1 User interface parameters (UI) – User Interface .............................................................................................................................................................167
28.2 Parameters / visibility table, folder visibility table and client table................................................................................169
28.2.1 Parameters / visibility table ...................................................................................................................................................................................................170
28.2.2 Folder visibility table ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................195
28.2.3 Client Table ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................198
29 Functions (folder FnC) ......................................................................................................................................204
29.1 Manual defrost activation (dEF folder) ..................................................................................................................................206
29.2 Alarm acknowledgment (folder tA) ........................................................................................................................................206
29.3 Change On/OFF state (folder St) .............................................................................................................................................207
29.4 Multi Function key.......................................................................................................................................................................207
29.4.1 Download from reset ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................209
29.5 Reset alarm log (folder EUr) .....................................................................................................................................................210
30 Device operation ................................................................................................................................................211
31 DeviceManager....................................................................................................................................................211
31.1.1 Device Manager software component ...............................................................................................................................................................................211
31.1.2 Device Manager interface component...............................................................................................................................................................................211
31.1.3 Multi Function Key Component...........................................................................................................................................................................................211
32 Supervision ...........................................................................................................................................................212
32.1 Configuration with Modbus RTU .............................................................................................................................................212
32.1.1 Data format (RTU)....................................................................................................................................................................................................................212
32.1.2 Modbus commands available and data areas ..................................................................................................................................................................213
32.2 Configuration of device address ..............................................................................................................................................216
32.2.1 Configuration of parameter addresses...............................................................................................................................................................................216
32.2.2 Configuration of variable / state addresses ......................................................................................................................................................................216
33 Models and Accessories....................................................................................................................................217
33.1 Models ............................................................................................................................................................................................217
33.1.1 SB ● SD ● SC models ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................217
33.1.2 Expansions ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................217
33.1.3 Terminals ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................218
33.2 Accessories.....................................................................................................................................................................................219
 1 INTRODUCTION
This manual is designed to permit quick, easy reference with the following features:

References References column:

A column to the left of the text contains references to subjects discussed in the text to help you locate the information you
need quickly and easily.

Cross references Cross references:

All words written in italics are referenced in the subject index to help you find the page containing details on this subject;
supposing you read the following text:
” If there are 2 compressors in the installation, the minimum time between the switching on and the switching off) of the
two compressors is observed. ”
The italics mean that you will find a reference to the page on the topic of compressors listed under the item compressors
in the index.
If you are consulting the manual “on-line” (using a computer), words which appear in italics are hyperlinks: just click on a
word in italics with the mouse to go directly to the part of the manual that discusses this topic.

Icons for emphasis Some segments of text are marked by icons appearing in the references column with the meanings specified below:

<IMG INFO>
30,7
43,9
1
2
51
-28,35
-1

Warning! : information which is essential for preventing negative consequences for the system
or a hazard to personnel, instruments, data, etc., and which users MUST read with
care.

<IMG INFO>
42,7
Take note: information on the topic under discussion which the user ought to keep in mind
29,75
1
2
51
28 35

<IMG INFO>
Tip: a recommendation which may help the user to understand and make use of the information
supplied on the topic under discussion.
24
27,7
1
2
79 35

1.1 General Description

Eliwell, the leading manufacturer of controllers for small and medium air conditioning plants, is proud to present Energy
Flex, the new range of compact units with advanced functionality and innovative applications in the HVAC market.

Control of centralized air-conditioning systems with up to 2 circuits and a maximum of 4 compressors (steps)
such as:

 Chillers:

o air-air;
o air-water;
o water-water;

 Heat pumps:
o air-air;
o air-water;
o water-water with gas reversal;
o water-water with water reversal;

 Motorised condensers;
o Air chillers;
o Air heat pumps;
o Water chillers;
o Water heat pumps.

1.1.1 Typical applications:

 Mini-markets,
 Industrial installations,
 Offices,
 Hotels,
 Residential buildings.

Energy Fle
 1.1.2 Technical data:
Energy SD - SC - SE 600 is available in several models offering 6 digital inputs, 5 relay outputs, up to 2 TRIAC outputs, 2
PWM analogue outputs, up to 3 configurable analogue outputs 0…10V/0…20mA/4…20mA and up to 2 open collector
digital outputs for external relay.
---
Power supply is 12-24V~ or 12-24V~/24Vc
All inputs and outputs are independent and configurable, meaning they can be adapted to fit any system.
Energy SB 600The standard Eliwell 32x74mm format ensures ease and versatility of installation.
Energy SD - SC - SE 600 The 4DIN format guarantees maximum flexibility and easy installation.

1.1.3 Main functions:

 User interface with configurable keys

 Menus with configurable displays
 Parameter settings via keyboard or PC
 Alarm log registration
 Multi Function Key (MFK) for up/downloading parameter maps
 Remote keyboard (up to 100m cable) with direct connection without serial interface
 NTC, 4...20mA, 0...1V, 0...5V and 0...10V parameter-configurable inputs
 Temperature control via input or output probe depending on configuration and installation
 Automatic change-over
 Dynamic setpoint
 Digital/analogue condensation control without external devices up to 2A
 Boiler control or supplementary electrical heater control for heating mode
 Internal ventilation control
 Control of semi-hermetically sealed, scroll and screw compressors with one or two power steps
 Control of a single circuit with up to 4 compressors or 1 compressor with 4 power stages
 Control of double circuits up to a maximum of two compressors/power stages per circuit.

1.2 Models and Features

<IMG INFO>
42,2
-->See Models chapter and Accessories and the Specifications chapter
29,75
1
2
51
-28 35

NOTE: unless expressly indicated otherwise, references to SB600 also apply to SD600 SC600 and SE600
<IMG INFO>
42,6
29,75
1
2
51
28 35
2 MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY
SB600 – SKP 10
The instrument is intended for panel mounting (see diagram).
Make a 29x71 mm hole and insert the instrument; secure it with the special brackets provided.
Do not mount the device in damp and/or dirt-laden areas; it is suitable for use in places with ordinary or normal levels of
pollution.
Keep the area around the device cooling slots adequately ventilated.
The TTL serial is on the left side of the device.

Example of panel-mounted SB600 – SKP 10 Panel-mounted SB600 – SKP 10

<IMG INFO>
156,3
197,3
0
2
0,25
5,85
-1

<IMG INFO>
156,3
201,1
0
2
24,9
-188,85
-1

The images refer to SB600

SB600 – SKP 10 SB600 – SKP 10

Example of panel mounting - side view Removing the device from the panel - side view

<IMG INFO>

IMG INFO

The images refer to SB600

Energy Fle
SD600 – SC600 – SE600
The instrument is intended for 4DIN rail mounting

Follow the instructions below to install the BASE on DIN RAIL:

 Move the two spring docking devices to their standby position (use a screwdriver).
 Install the "BASE” on the DIN RAIL, then press the "spring docking devices" which will go to the closing position.

SD – SC – SE Series
DIN guide mounting example – side view

SD – SC – SE Series
DIN guide mounting example – rear view

<IMG INFO>

SD – SC – SE Series
DIN guide mounting example - ¾ view

<IMG INFO>
2.1 Mechanical dimensions

SB
70mm

76mm

29mm
71mm

74mm 76mm
32mm

28mm
SKP 10

70mm

29mm
71mm
30mm

74mm 30mm
32mm

28mm

<IMG INFO>

SD/SC – SE6xx

SD SC SE
61.6mm 70.2mm 70.2mm
87mm

43.6mm 5.2mm

56.4mm
<IMG INFO>
 3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

<IMG INFO>
30,55
43,9
1
2
51
-28,35
3.1 General warnings
-1

IMPORTANT!
Make sure the machine is switched off before working on the electrical connections. The work must be done by
qualified personnel. To ensure proper connections, comply with the following:
Power supplies other than those specified can seriously damage the system.
Use cables of suitable section for the terminals used.
Separate the cables of probes and digital inputs from inductive loads and high voltage connections to prevent any
electromagnetic interference. Do not place the probe cables near other electrical equipment (switches, meters, etc.)
Make connections as short as possible and do not wind them around electrically connected parts.
To avoid causing static discharges, do not touch the electronic components on the boards.
Eliwell supplies the high voltage cables to connect the device to loads - see Accessories chapter
Eliwell supplies the signal cables to connect the power supply, probes, digital inputs, etc. - See the Accessories chapter
The device must be connected to a suitable transformer that complies with the specifications provided in the
Specifications chapter.

3.1.1 Power supply - High voltage inputs (relay)

Do not exceed the maximum permitted current; for higher loads, use a contactor with sufficient power capacity.
<IMG INFO>

Important!
30,55
43,9
1
2
51
-28,35
-1

Make sure that power supply is of the correct voltage for the device.

3.1.2 TRIAC
The TRIAC (TC1, TC2 for 63x models) output, when partialized, suppresses the half-wave at the zero-crossing.

3.1.3 Analogue inputs-Probes

Temperature The temperature probes have no characteristic insertion polarity and can be extended using standard bipolar cable (note
probes that extending cables can affect the performance of the device in terms of electromagnetic compatibility: take great care
<IMG INFO>
30,55
43,9
with the wiring).
1
2
51
-28,35
-1

Important!

Pressure probes Pressure probes have a specific insertion polarity which must be observed.
Signal cables (temperature/pressure probes, digital inputs, TTL serial) must be cabled separately from high voltage cables.
Eliwell supplied cables are recommended. Contact the Eliwell sales department for item availability.

3.1.4 Serial connections TTL connection

TTL (COM 1) Use a 5-wire TTL cable up to 30cm in length.
An Eliwell-supplied TTL cable is recommended. Contact the Eliwell sales department for item availability.

3.2 Wiring diagrams

Circuit diagram key
 SUPPLY SB ● SD ● SC 63x 64x Power supply 12-24Va;
 SUPPLY SB ● SD ● SC 65x Power supply 12-24Va / 24Vc
 5c Auxiliary 5V c 20mA max supply
 12 c Auxiliary 12V c supply
 DO1...DO4, DO6 2A - 230Vac high voltage relay outputs
 DO1...DO3 SD ● SC 63x 2A - 230Vac high voltage relay outputs
 N Neutral
 TC1 TRIAC 2A 230Vac high voltage output
 TC1, TC2 SD ● SC 63x TRIAC 3A 230Vac high voltage output
 AO1 AO2 Low voltage (SELV (§)) PWM analogue outputs
 AO3 AO4 Low voltage (SELV (§)) 0…10V analogue outputs
 AO5 Low voltage (SELV (§)) 0…20mA / 4…20mA analogue outputs
 DO5 Open Collector low voltage output (SELV (§))
 DO4, DO5 SD ● SC 63x Open Collector low voltage output (SELV (§))
 DI1...DI6 No voltage digital inputs (°)
 AI1...AI2, AI5 NTC* / Digital Input configurable analogue inputs***
 AI3...AI4 NTC / voltage, current** / Digital Input configurable analogue inputs***
 GND Ground
 LAN Remote terminal / SE600 (max 100m)
 TTL TTL serial for connection to Multi Function Key / Device Manager
 RS-485 RS-485 Serial for connection to supervision system
--------------------------------------
*SEMITEC 103AT type (10KΩ / 25°C)
**4…20mA current or 0…5V / 0…10V / 0…1V voltage input or no-voltage digital input
***no voltage digital input
(°) closing current for 0.5mA ground
(§) SELV: (SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE)
3.2.1 Wiring Diagrams

646/C/S models

5 3 G 4 - + G
Supply GND GND AI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 AI1

Supply AO2 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 AO RS-485

RED BLACK
BLUE

/S Models
only
SB646/C
SB646/C/S

- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485

/S Models
only

SD646/C • SD646/C/S
SC646/C • SC646/C/S
SE646
RED
BLUE
BLACK

4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply

AO
<IMG INFO>

 6 digital inputs [DI1…DI6] ● DI

 4 high voltage digital outputs 2A 230Vac ● DO
 6 analogue outputs ● AO:
o 1 high voltage [TC1] 2A 230Vac analogue output
o 2 PWM analogue outputs [AO1, AO2]
o 3 low voltage (SELV (§)) analogue outputs
 2 outputs [AO3-4] 0-10V
 1 output [AO5] 4…20mA/0…20mA

 5 analogue inputs [AI1…AI5]

 1 low voltage digital output (SELV (§)) [DO5]
o Open Collector

Model /S RS-485 on board

 /C RTC supplied as standard

 LAN Connection to remote terminal / SE6xx (max 100m)
 TTL Serial TTL for connection to Multi Function Key
 (§) SELV: (SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE)
 655/C/S models

5 3 G 4 - + G
Supply GND GND AI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 AI1

Supply AO2 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 AO RS-485

RED BLACK
BLUE

6 DO3 /S Models
only
SB655/C
SB655/C/S

- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485

DO3 6
/S Models
only

SD655/C - SD655/C/S
SC655/C - SC655/C/S
SE655
RED
BLUE
BLACK

4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply

AO
<IMG INFO>

 6 digital inputs [DI1…DI6] ● DI

 5 high voltage digital outputs 2A 230Vac ● DO
 5 analogue outputs ● AO:
o 2 PWM analogue outputs [AO1, AO2]
o 3 low voltage (SELV (§)) analogue outputs
 2 outputs [AO3-4] 0-10V
 1 output [AO5] 4…20mA/0…20mA

 5 analogue inputs [AI1…AI5]

 1 low voltage digital output (SELV (§)) [DO5]
o Open Collector
Model /S RS-485 on board

 /C RTC supplied as standard

 LAN Connection to remote terminal / SE6xx (max 100m)
 TTL Serial TTL for connection to Multi Function Key
 (§) SELV: (SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE)
 636/C/S models

- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485

DO3
/S Models
only

SD636/C • SD636/C/S
SC636/C • SC636/C/S

RED
BLUE
BLACK

4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DO4 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply

AO
<IMG INFO>

 6 digital inputs [DI1…DI6] ● DI

 3 high voltage digital outputs 2A 230Vac ● DO
 6 analogue outputs ● AO:
o 2 high voltage [TC1, TC2] 3A 230Vac analogue output
o 1 PWM analogue outputs [AO1]
o 3 low voltage (SELV (§)) analogue outputs
 2 outputs [AO3-4] 0-10V
 1 output [AO5] 4…20mA/0…20mA

 5 analogue inputs [AI1…AI5]

 2 low voltage digital output (SELV (§)) [DO4, DO5]
o Open Collector

Model /S RS-485 on board

 /C RTC supplied as standard

 LAN Connection to remote terminal / SE6xx (max 100m)
 TTL Serial TTL for connection to Multi Function Key
 632 model

7 8 9 10

SE632

RED
BLUE
BLACK

DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 NC NC AI5 GND GND NC Supply

<IMG INFO>

 6 digital inputs [DI1…DI6] ● DI

 3 high voltage digital outputs 2A 230Vac ● DO
 2 analogue outputs ● AO:
o 2 analogue outputs [AO1, AO2]

 3 analogue inputs [AI1, Ai2, AI5]

 1 low voltage digital output (SELV (§)) [DO5]
o Open Collector

 LAN Connection to remote terminal / SE6xx (max 100m)

 TTL Serial TTL for connection to Multi Function Key
3.2.2 Example of low voltage input/output connection

3.2.2.1 Example of current/voltage input connection

current
EWPA 0...20mA
Transducer 4...20mA EWPA 4...20mA
WHITE
SIG

G BROWN

SUPPLY 5Vc DO5 GND GND AI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 AI1

SUPPLY 12c AO1 AO2 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1

<IMG INFO>

voltage
V Transducer 0-1V
V Transducer 0-5V
V Transducer 0-10V

SUPPLY 5Vc DO5 GND GND AI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 AI1

SUPPLY 12c AO1 AO2 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1

3.2.3 Example of low voltage inputs NTC/DI

SB600 - Example of low voltage input/output connection

SD SC SE 600 Example identical

5 3 G 4
SUPPLY 5Vcc DO5 GND GND AI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 AI1

SUPPLY 12cc AO1 AO2 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 AO

SB646/C/S
L
N

Analogue outputs AO see chapter System configuration (folder Par/CF) paragraph

Configuration of analogue outputs
Digital output D05 see Digital Output Configuration
LAN : see connecting remote keyboard /SE600

Energy Fle
 3.2.3.1 Example of AO1 / AO2 connection

Example of SB600 (AO1) connection with 1 fan module Example of SB600 (AO2) connection with 1 fan module
CFS PWM or EXP211 CFS PWM or EXP211
SD SC SE 600 Example identical SD SC SE 600 Example identical

<IMG INFO> <IMG INFO>

3.2.3.2 Example of AO3 - AO4 connection

Example of SB600 (AO3-AO4) connection with 1 fan

module CFS 0-10V
SD SC SE 600 Example identical

<IMG INFO>
225 8

Analogue Terminal description

output no.
AO3 3 0-10V
AO3 G GND
AO4 4 0-10V
AO4 G GND
3.2.3.3 Example of AO5 connection
Example of SB600 (AO5) connection with 1 fan module
CFS 0…20mA / 4…20mA
SD SC SE 600 Example identical

<IMG INFO>

Analogue Terminal description

output no.
AO5 5 0…20mA /
4…20mA
AO5 G GND

3.2.3.4 Example of DO5 connection

Example of SB600 connection with EXP 211

SD SC SE 600 Example identical

<IMG INFO>
3.2.4 Example of connection of high voltage outputs

Example of model with TRIAC

646 models - Example of connection of high voltage outputs

TC1 TC1 DO1 DO2 DO3 N DO4 DO4

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5

<IMG INFO>
L
3.3 Examples of network connections

3.3.1 Example of connection SB600 – SE600

SB600 –> SE600

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

BLACK GND

BLUE SIGNAL

RED 12Vdc

LAN max distance 100m

5 3 G 4 - + G
Supply GND GND AI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 AI1

Supply AO2 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1

RED BLACK
RS-485 SE646
BLUE RED
/S Models
BLUE
only BLACK
SB646/C 4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply
SB646/C/S
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply
AO

BLACK GND

BLUE SIGNAL

RED 12Vdc
<IMG INFO>

3.3.2 Example of connection SD600/SC600 – SE600

SD600 / SC600 –> SE600

- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485

/S Models
only

SD646/C • SD646/C/S
SC646/C • SC646/C/S SE646

RED RED
BLUE BLUE
BLACK BLACK

4 G 3 5 4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply
AO AO

BLACK GND

BLUE SIGNAL

IMG INFO
RED 12Vdc LAN max distance 100m

3.3.3 Example of connection SC600 – SKP 10

SC600 –> SKP 10
- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485 R B B
E L L
D U A
E C
/S Models K
only
SKP 10 RED
BLUE
BLACK
SC646/C • SC646/C/S

RED
BLUE
BLACK
4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AO
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply
LAN max distance 100m
RED 12Vdc

BLUE SIGNAL

BLACK GND
<IMG INFO>
3.4 SKW22 - SKW22L remote LCD terminal

SKW22(L) Optional RH module

Part number KP100000 can be ordered from the
Sales Department
NOT included
to Flex
LAN
SKW22(L)

SKW22(L)
red /+12Vdc

AIR2
green / signal
black / GND

black / GND
blue / signal red /+12Vdc RH Sensor RH Optional Module
red /+12Vdc blue / signal
black / GND <IMG INFO>

Remote LAN
Probe

possibilità di
alimentare il
Probe trasduttore mediante
Digital input il morsetto +12Vdc

red /+12Vdc

Probe

Pressure
Transducer

PROBE NOT INCLUDED

SONDE NON INCLUSE

Flex SKW22(L) description

AIR1 NTC integrated analogue input
GND / black GND / black
Signal / Blue Signal / blue
+12Vdc /red** 12V~ power supply from Smart
AIR2 Remote Probe Probe AIR2 remote analogue input
configurable as NTC*/ 4...20mA / DI

* SEMITEC 103AT (10Kohm / 25°C) type

**the transducer can be powered from the +12Vdc terminal
3.5 SKP22 - SKP22L remote LCD terminal

GND +12V LAN

GND AIR1 AIR2 +12V
GND AIR1 AIR2

GND AIR1 AIR2 B R B

L E L
Probes A D U
C E
K
Digital input
example of
Transducer
SKP22(L)

IMG INFO

Flex SKP22(L) description

AIR1 AIR1 NTC/DI integrated analogue input

Remote Probe AIR2Remote analogue input configurable as NTC*/ 4...20mA / DI
GND Ground
GND / black GND / black
Signal / Blue Signal / blue
+12Vdc /red** 12V~ power supply from Smart
* SEMITEC 103AT (10Kohm / 25°C) type
**the transducer can be powered from the +12Vdc

3.5.1 Example of connection SC600 – SE600 – SKP10 – SK22/22L

SC600 - SE600 - SKP10 – SKW22/22L

- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485 R B B
E L L
D U A
E C
/S Models K
only
SKP 10 RED
BLUE
BLACK
SC646/C • SC646/C/S SE646

RED RED
BLUE BLUE
BLACK BLACK

4 G 3 5 4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply
AO AO

BLACK GND BLACK GND BLACK GND BLACK GND

BLUE SIGNAL BLUE SIGNAL BLUE SIGNAL BLUE SIGNAL

RED 12Vdc RED 12Vdc RED 12Vdc RED 12Vdc

LAN max distance 100m

SKW22(L)
GND +12V LAN SKW22/22L

GND AIR1 AIR2 B R B

L E L black / GND
Probes A D U blue / signal
C E
K red /+12Vdc red /+12Vdc
blue / signal
Probe
SKP22(L) black / GND

LAN

1 LCD terminal only

4 TECHNICAL DATA

4.1 General specifications

Standard Min. Max.

Power supply voltage Models 63x 64x 12-24V~
Power supply voltage Models 65x 12-24V~ /24Vc
Power supply frequency 50Hz/60Hz --- ---
Consumption SB600 SD600 SC600 6VA / 4W --- ---
Consumption SE600 5VA /3.5W --- ---
Insulation class 2 --- ---
Working temperature 25°C -20°C 55°C
Ambient operating humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%
Storage temperature 25°C -40°C 85°C
Ambient storage humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%

Classification
The product complies with the following Directive 2006/95/EC
European Community Directives Directive 89/108/EC
..and complies with the following harmonised EN 60730-2-6 / EN 60730-2-9
regulations
Use Operating (not safety) device for incorporation
Assembly Panel or on DIN Omega bar support
Type of action 1.B 1.Y
Pollution class 2
Overvoltage category To meet system needs
Nominal pulse voltage 2500V
Digital outputs Refer to the label on the device
Fire resistance category D
Software class A

Energy Fle
4.2 I/O features

SB SC SD Expansions SE

Type &

636

646

655

632

646

655
Description
Label

Digital inputs
6 no-voltage digital inputs
DI1 DI2 DI3 x x x x x x
Closing current for ground: 0.5mA
DI4 DI5 DI6
Digital
outputs 4 relays 2A 250V~; DO1
High voltage *For 636 models D04 is available as Open Collector OC x x DO2 x x
DO1 DO2 output (OC) Max. current 35mA @12Vcc DO3
DO3 DO4*
1 x 2A 250V~ relay; Lifetime of outputs on relays
DO6 x x
at nominal capacity: 100,000 cycles
1 TRIAC 2A max 250V~
Analogue
Resolution 1%
output
Contactors may NOT be installed downstream x x
High voltage
from the Triac
TC1
2 TRIAC 3A max 250V~
TC1 + Resolution 1%
x
TC2 (= AO2) Contactors may NOT be installed downstream
from the Triac
Analogue 2 outputs Open Collector PWM/PPM
outputs O.C.
PWM/PPM resolution: 2%
AO2 = TC2
low voltage Nominal range 0…16.9Vc (12V~ rectified) x x x x x
(TRIAC)
(SELV) Closing at 12Vc
AO1
AO2 ** Max. current 35mA (min. load 340Ohm @12Vcc
Analogue
outputs 2 uscite 0-10V max 28mA*** @10V (min. load
low voltage resistance 360Ohm)
x x x x x
(SELV) Accuracy 2% f.s.
AO3 AO4 Resolution 1%
 SB SC SD Expansions SE

Type and

636

646

655

632

646

655
Description
Label

1 x 4..20mA / 0…20mA output

2% full scale accuracy
AO5
Resolution: 1% x x x x x
 output 0/4…20mA max. load (max load
resistance 350Ohm)***
3 configurable inputs:
a) NTC 103AT 10kOhm temperature,
measurement range -50C  99.9C;
b) No voltage digital input

2 configurable inputs:
a) NTC 103AT 10kOhm temperature,
Analogue
measurement range -50C  99.9C;
inputs
b) Current input 4...20 mA /voltage input AI1
AI1 AI2
0-10V/0-5V/0-1V AI2
x x x x x
Measurement range -50.0  +99.9;
AI3 AI4
Accuracy: 1% full scale (2% full scale for 0-1V voltage AI5
input)
AI5
Resolution: (a) 0.1°C (b) 0.1°C/bar
Input impedance (b):
 0-10V and 0-5V: 21KOhm
 0-1V: 10KOhm
 4…20mA: 100Ohm
c) No voltage digital input

Open
Collector
PWM
2 Open Collector outputs x
low voltage
**Max. current 35mA @12Vcc
(SELV) digital
output
DO4*, DO5
1 Open Collector output
DO5 x x x x x x
**Max. current 35mA @12Vcc

* For 636 models, DO4 is an open collector, TC2 equals AO2 (TC2=AO2) - see chapter Configuration Configuration of
physical I/O (folder PAr/CL..Cr).

** Outputs AO1, AO2 and DO5 (typically connected to the device's auxiliary 12V output) cannot deliver more than 70mA
total). Any other loads connected to the same 12Vc auxiliary output must also be taken into account

If the Echo SKP keypad is connected to the device, the current becomes 55mA
<IMG INFO>

*** outputs AO3, AO4 and AO5 cannot deliver more than 40mA total.
30,55
43,9
1
2
51
-28,35
-1
4.3 Mechanical specifications

1 8-way high voltage male connector All models

For use in combination with the supplied female connector

1 20-way snap-on low voltage connector

All models
To be used with COLV0000E0100

1 JST 3-way remote keyboard connector

Terminals and connectors All models
To be used with COLV000033200

1 JST 4 -way connector

To be used with COLV000042100 All models

1 JST 3-way connector Models /S

To be used with COLV000035100

Housing Housing: PC+ABS plastic resin with V0 flammability rating All models

4.4 Display and LEDS

 4 digits or 3 digits + sign; All models
Display and LEDS
 18 LEDs except SC600 SE600
UP DOWN All models
Keys  4 keys
set esc except SC600 SE600

4.5 Serial
1 TTL serial for connection to CopyCard (MFK) All models
TTL
or Personal Computer via interface module
RS-485 RS-485 opto-isolated serial Models /S
LAN Remote terminal / SE600 (max 100m) All models

4.6 Transformer
The instrument must be connected to a suitable current transformer with the following features:
 Primary voltage: depending on requirements of individual device and/or country of installation
 Secondary voltage: 12V~
 Power supply frequency: 50/60Hz
 Rating: 6VA min. (/S models), 5VA (all other models)

4.7 Mechanical dimensions

Length (L) Depth (d) Height (H)
Notes
mm mm mm
Front keypad 76.4 // 35 (+0.2mm)
Front (cover) SD600 70 // 45 (+0.2mm)
SC600 SE600
76
Dimensions SB600 86 connectors 26
excluded
Dimensions SD600 70.2 61.6 87 4DIN
SC600 SE600
56.4 from Din
bar to cover
Hole for panel (+0.2mm/ -
71 // 29
mounting 0.1mm)
4.8 Permitted use
This device is intended for controlling centralised air conditioning systems.

For safety reasons, it must be installed and used according to the instructions provided. In particular, parts carrying
dangerous voltages must not be accessible under normal operating conditions.
The device must be adequately protected from water and dust with regard to the application, and must only be accessible
using tools (with the exception of the front panel).
The device is suitable for use in household refrigeration appliances and/or similar equipment and has been tested for
safety aspects in accordance with the harmonised European reference standards.

4.9 Improper Use

Any use other than that expressly permitted is prohibited.

The relay contacts supplied are of the functional type and subject to fault (since they are electronically controlled they are
prone to short-circuiting or remaining open). Any protection devices specified in product standards or suggested by
common sense for obvious safety requirements must be installed externally to the device.

Eliwell is not liable for damage due to:

 Unspecified installation/use and, in particular, in contravention of the safety requirements of established legislation or
specified in this document.
 Use on equipment which does not provide adequate protection against electrocution, water and dust in the actual
installation conditions.
 Use on equipment which allows toolfree access to dangerous components.
 Installation/use on equipment which does not comply with established legislation and standards.

4.10 Disclaimer
This document is the exclusive property of Eliwell Controls srl and may not be reproduced or divulged without the
express authorisation of Eliwell Controls srl.
All possible care has been taken to ensure the accuracy of this document; nevertheless, Eliwell Controls srl cannot accept
liability for any damage resulting from its use.
5 USER INTERFACE (FOLDER PAR/UI)
The front panel of the device functions as the user interface and is used to perform all operations relating to the device.

SB600 SD600

<IMG INFO>
156,3
211,7
0
2
174,6
0
-1

SKP 10

IMG INFO

NOTE:
 the SC600 module is not provided with a display. To operate the instrument, use remote terminal SKP10 or
SKW22/22L
 the expansion module SE600 is not provided with a display.

5.1 Keys
Refer to models SB600 SD600 and SKP10.
There are 4 keys on the front panel. Each key has (see the two tables below)
o A "direct" action (indicated on the key)
o An "associated" function (indicated on the front panel of the device beside the key). In the manual, this is
shown in square brackets (e.g. [UP])
o a "combined" action involving two keys. In the manual, this is shown in square brackets (e.g.[UP+DOWN])

5.1.1 Description of keys and associated functions

Prolonged press
Description of Single press (press Key [associated [press and hold Menu /
Key
key and release) function] for about 3 Comments
seconds]
 Increases a value
Functions menu
 Goes to the next
UP [Manual defrost see Functions
label
<IMG INFO> <IMG INFO>
37,5 56,4
44,15 48,5
0 0

(UP) activation] chapter (folder

2 2
-4,75 0,5
-49 -47,9
-1 -1

 Modify Set Point

FnC)
(if UI25=1)
See Local
 decreases a
On/OFF section
value <IMG INFO>

----
DOWN  Goes to the
55,3
48
0
2

[Local ON/OFF] See also

-1,15
-41,05
-1
<IMG INFO>

(DOWN) previous label

37,5
44,15
0
2

Functions menu
-5
5,5
-1

 Modify Set Point

Functions
(if UI25=1)
chapter (folder

Energy Fle
 Prolonged press
Description of Single press (press Key [associated [press and hold Menu /
Key
key and release) function] for about 3 Comments
seconds]
FnC)
 Quit without [Change-over]
Esc(ape) Quit saving new ---
<IMG INFO>
37,5
44,5
0
2
-5
1
-1
(Without saving
new settings) 
settings
go back to
mode See section on
Changing operating
Operating mode
menu
previous level mode
 Confirms value /
quit and save
new settings
 Move to next [Main display]
Set Confirm
<IMG INFO>
37,5
44,5
0
2
-4,75
19,9
-1
(and save new
settings)
level (open
folder, subfolder, disp ---
See Main Display
[Main Display
Menu]
parameter, section
value)
 Open States
Menu
See Manual
alarm
Alarm
ALL acknowledgment
acknowledgment
and reset section

By parameter (see parameters chapter, parameters UI20-21-

22-23-24) the function [associated] can be enabled or
disabled:
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
 1 = Key enabled for the function

The following indications refer to the SB600 user interface. Navigation for SD600 and SKP10 is identical
5.1.2 Local On/OFF

5.1.2.1 Device ‘On’ --> ‘OFF’

Press the [DOWN] key for about 3 seconds from the

main display

<IMG INFO>
217
96,25
0

The word OFF will appear on the display.

All other LEDs will be off

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0

5.1.2.2 Device ‘OFF’ --> ‘On’

The word OFF appears on the display.

Press the [DOWN] key for about 3 seconds

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0

Energy SB600 will return to the "normal" screen

<IMG INFO>
217
96,25
0

NOTE:
The local ON/OFF function is deactivated if the device has been turned OFF remotely or if a digital input is configured as a
remote ON/OFF.
5.1.3 Description of keys - combined action
Symbol
[function Combined
associated to Key press Single
combined combination press (press [associated function] [Menu] / Comments
operation of and release
the keys]

[Manual reset]
<IMG INFO>
37,5
44,15
<IMG INFO> 0
24,75 2
104,75 -999995
0 -41,05
2 -1
-999993
-103
-1

[UP (UP) See Manual alarm

+ acknowledgment and
DOWN reset section
(DOWN)]
<IMG INFO>
37,5
44,15
0
2
0,3
-35,05
-1

<IMG INFO>
37,5
[Open Programming
menu]
44,5
<IMG INFO> 0
23,55 2
117,5 -0,8
0 -35,75
2 -1
-999993
-101,3
-1

[Esc
+ [Programming menu]
<IMG INFO>
37,5
44,5
0
2
0,8
Set]
-18,95
-1

5.1.3.1 Manual alarm acknowledgment and reset

Alarm messages blink. How to acknowledge an alarm is explained below.

All error messages are shown in the AL folder (see States Menu)

An error message will be shown, alternating with

the error alert...

<IMG INFO>
217
96,25
0

...and the main display.

The ALARM LED will be permanently on.

<IMG INFO>
217
96,25
0
 ALARM ACKNOWLEDGMENT
An error can be acknowledged by pressing any
key once.

After pressing any key, the alarm LED will start to

blink.

<IMG INFO>
217
96,25
0

MANUAL RESET

To manually reset an alarm, press the "up" and

"down" keys together [UP+DOWN]
---------

NOTE: resetting an active alarm will save the

alarm in the alarms log.

<IMG INFO>
223 25

The device will return to the main display.

NOTE: The ALARM LED turns off

<IMG INFO>
217
96,25
0

5.2 LEDs and Display

The display has 18 icons (LEDs) split into 3 categories:
 States and Operating Modes
 Values and Units of Measure
 Utilities

5.2.1 Display
Values of up to 4 digits or 3 digits plus a sign can be displayed.

5.2.2 LEDs: decimal point

Values are always shown in tenths of a degree/bar
5.2.3 LEDs: States and Operating Modes

LED states and Operating Modes Permanently

description Colour Blinking
icon on

IMG INFO
Alarm red Active alarm Alarm acknowledged

Antifreeze with heat

pump active
<IMG INFO>
Heating Heating mode
22,15

<IMG INFO>
122,7
70,45
0
2
141,9
0
Remote heating mode
-1

The display shows the Cooling

Cooling mode Remote cooling mode
value/resource set for the "main
<IMG INFO>
22,15

display". Local standby

In the event of an alarm, it will Standby mode (from Remote standby
alternate with the alarm code Exx.
<IMG INFO>

keyboard)
20,95
22,1

(when more than one alarm occurs green

at the same time, the one with the Manual defrost
Defrost Defrost active
lowest number will be shown - see <IMG INFO>
22,15
activated
Alarms and Diagnostics chapter)
Configurable
---- Configurable
See Parameters ----
chapter See Parameters chapter
Economy
---- ----
Ui /dS folder Ui /dS folder
Parameters UI07 Parameters UI07 /dS00
/dS00

5.2.4 LEDs: Values and Units of Measure

LED Unit of measure icon description Colour Permanently on Blinking

Clock (RTC) red Shows current time Set time

(24hr format)
<IMG INFO>
22,15

--- --- ---

Time Bands Time Bands enabled Program Time
<IMG INFO>
122,7
67,9
Bands
0
2

Degrees
0,35
6,3
-1

Values can be displayed with a decimal / /

IMG INFO
centigrade
point by setting parameter Ui08 (see
parameters chapter, Ui folder)
IMG INFO
Pressure (Bar) / /

Relative
humidity Not used Not used
(% RH)
IMG INFO

Menu (ABC) Menu navigation /

 5.2.5 LEDs: utilities

LED utilities description Colour Permanently on Blinking

Configurable (°) Configurable
---- (°°)
See Parameters ----
chapter See Parameters
utility amber ---- chapter
Ui folder ----
Parameters Ui folder
UI00..UI06 Parameters
<IMG INFO>
122,7
72,95
0
2

UI00..UI06
-2
5,75
-1

<IMG INFO>
42,75
(°) permanently on: utility active
(°°) blinking: UI00..UI06= 50…53 (power steps 1…4) indicates safety timing
29,75
1
2
48,4
21 5

default configuration
<IMG INFO>
42,75
29,75
1
2
48,4
LEDs for utilities are all configurable (see parameters chapter, folder Ui). The factory settings are listed in the table below:
23 5

LED symbol
on display LEDs default default icon on front panel

LED 1
Power step 1
(first from left)
LED 2 Power step 2

LED 3 Power step 3

LED 4 Power step 4

LED 5 Internal exchanger electric heater 1

LED 6 External exchanger fan
LED 7 Internal circuit water pump

5.3 First switch on

When Energy SB600 is powered on for the first time,
a lamp test is carried out to check its state and
operation.
----------
The Lamp Test lasts for a few seconds. During this
short time, all LEDs and digits flash at the same time.

<IMG INFO>
217
97,8
0

After the lamp test, based on preselected settings,

the following are displayed:
 The time,
 the real setpoint
 the parameter setpoint
 the value of the analogue input selected
(AIL1…AIL5)
----------
In the example, the main display is the real set point
<IMG INFO>
217
96,25
0
5.4 Access to folders - menu structure
Access to folders is organised into menus.
Access is determined by the keys on the front panel (see relative sections).
Access to each individual menu is explained below (or in the sections indicated).
There are 4 menus:
 Main Display Menu → See Main Display Menu section
 Operating Mode menu → see Operating Mode Menu section
 States Menu → See States Menu section
 Programming Menu → See Programming Menu section

There are 4 folders/submenus in the Programming Menu:

 Parameters Menu (Par folder) → see Parameters chapter;
 Functions Menu (Fnc folder) → see Functions chapter;
 Password PASS
 Alarm codes EU

5.4.1 Main Display Menu

The Main Display refers to the contents of the default display, i.e. when keys are not used.

Ai AIL1 AIL2 AIL3 AIL4 AIL5

AIE1 AIE2 AIE3 AIE4 AIE5
Air1 Air2
Main Display
rtC HH:MM
SetP SetP
Setr Setr

In Energy SB600, the main display can be customized to suit personal requirements. The various contents can be selected
from the "disp" menu which is opened by pressing and holding the [set] key for more than 3 seconds. The main display
can be selected from:
 analogue inputs AiL1, AiL2, AiL3, AiL4, AiL5, AiE1, AiE2, AiE3, AiE4, AiE5, Air1, Air2
when configured as digital inputs
- 0 or 0.0 = input not active (equivalent to input shortcircuited to ground)
- 1 or 0.1 = input active (equivalent to input open)
 rtC,
 Setpoint
o SetP= set from parameter
o Setr= real with any decalibration;

Step by step instructions are provided below.

To open the [disp] menu to modify the main

display setup, press and hold the set key for at
least 3 seconds.
[set]

<IMG INFO>

This opens the blinking menu for the previous

display (in this case rtC, i.e. current time).

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0
 To modify the display, use the "up" and "down"
keys to scroll through the menu and press the set
key to confirm.

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0

On selection of your preferred display, press the

set key to confirm. You will be automatically
returned to the main display set.

<IMG INFO>

5.4.2 Operating Mode Menu

HEAt
Operating mode COOL
StdBY

Instructions are provided below on how to change the operating mode

There are three different operating modes:
 standby mode (StbY)
 Heat mode (HEAT)
 Cool mode (COOL)

For example, let's say you want to change

from StbY to COOL mode

To change operating mode, press and hold the

mode key for at least 2 seconds.

PS The main display is set as rtc (current time)

<IMG INFO>

A blinking menu will open containing the

values StbY (standby), HEAt (heat) and COOL
(cool).

<IMG INFO>
220,85

Select your required operating mode and press

the set key.

<IMG INFO>
 You will be automatically returned to the main
display and you will see that the Stby LED that
was previously on has gone off and the COOL
LED has come on

5.4.3 States Menu

From the states menu you can view the values of each resource.
For some resources, a "dynamic" view is possible:
 For example, when declared as not present / probe not configured (see System Configuration chapter (folder
Par/CL), parameter CL01=0), analogue input AIL2 will not be displayed
 For example the hours of functioning of compressor 2 - CP02 - not available on single compressor machines
The resources may be present / not present depending on the model (e.g. dOL6 is only present on the SB655)

folder Visibility description change

Dynamic LOCAL analogue //
Ai AIL1 AiL2 AIL3 AIL4 AIL5
inputs
Dynamic EXTENDED analogue //
Ai AIE1 AiE2 AIE3 AIE4 AIE5
inputs(§)
REMOTE TERMINAL //
Ai Air1 Air2 Dynamic
analogue inputs
di diL1 diL2 diL3 diL4 diL5 diL6 // Dynamic LOCAL Digital inputs //
EXTENDED analogue
di diE1 diLE2 diE3 diE4 diE5 diE6 // Dynamic //
inputs(§)
AO Dynamic LOCAL Analogue //
tCL1 AOL1 AOL2 AOL3 AOL4 AOL5 //
outputs
EXTENDED analogue
AO tCE1 AOE1 AOE2 AOE3 AOE4 AOE5 // Dynamic //
outputs(§)
dO dOL3 dOL4 dOL5 dOL6 // Dynamic LOCAL Digital //
dOL1 dOL2
outputs
EXTENDED digital
dO dOE1 dOE2 dOE3 dOE4 dOE5 dOE6 // Dynamic //
outputs(§)
CL HOUr dAtE YEAr Clock YES
AL Er00 …. … … … Er97 Er98 Dynamic Alarms //
SP Value // // // // // // setpoint (set) YES
Sr Value // // // // // // real setpoint //
Hr CP01 CP02 CP03 CP04 PU01 PU02 PU03 Dynamic Tens of hours of YES
operation
compressors/pumps

(§) only if SE600 expansion module present

As you will be able to see from the table, the setpoint SP and time can be modified and viewed:

5.4.3.1 Display Inputs/Outputs (AiL, diL, tCL1/AOL, dOL)

Press the set key from the main display

<IMG INFO>
217
96,25
0
 Example of display of Analogue Inputs. The same
procedure applies for all other I/Os***

The label Ai will appear on the display.

(Use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through the

other labels until you find the label required)

Press the set key to view the label for the first
analogue input (AiL1 in this case)

Press the set key again to view the value of AiL1.

Note that the °C icon lights up to indicate that the
value shown is in degrees centigrade

***For digital inputs/analogue inputs configured as

digital, the value will be:
- 0 = input not active (for digital inputs this is
equivalent to input open, for analogue
inputs configured as digital to input
shortcircuited to ground)
- 1 = input active (for digital inputs this is
equivalen to input shortcircuited to
ground, for analogue inputs configured as
digital to input open)
-------------------------------------

Press the esc key to go back to the main display.

5.4.3.2 Setting the clock (CL)

The Energy SB600 has a clock (RTC) to run the alarm log and time bands, just like a programmable timer thermostat.
Instructions are provided below on how to set the time: the same procedure applies to change the date and year.

To change the clock on your machine, press the

set key from the main display.

<IMG INFO>

Pressing the set key once will open a list of the

various folders.
Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to find the CL
folder.

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0
 Press the set key to open the CL menu.

<IMG INFO>

On entering this menu, you will see HOUr. Use

the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to select the time,
date or year.

Once you have decided what you want to set,

press the [set]** key to open the modification
menu for the variable selected.
**press and hold for about 3 seconds

To set the time, date and year, use the "UP"

and "DOWN" keys to enter the required value,
then...

... press set.

 Press the Esc key repeatedly to exit the set
clock menu and go back to the main display.
5.4.3.3 Alarm Display (AL)

Press the set key from the main display

The label Ai will appear on the display. Use the UP

and DOWN keys to browse the other labels until you
find the AL label

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0

Press the set key to view the label of the first active
alarm (if it exists)

In this case, the first alarm is Er01. Use the UP and

DOWN keys to scroll any other alarms.
-------------------------------------
NOTE: the menu is not cyclical.
For example, if the active alarms are Er01, Er02 and
Er03, the display will show
Er01 ->Er02->Er03 <-Er02<-Er01

NOTE: -> UP, <-DOWN

<IMG INFO>
217
96,25
Press the esc key repeatedly to go back to the main
display.
0
5.4.3.4 Example of how to set the setpoint (SP)

By way of example, we will change the setpoint value in COOL mode from 12.0 degrees centigrade to12.6 degrees
centigrade.

To change the setpoint on your

machine, press the set key from the
main display.

Pressing the set key once will open a

list of the various folders. Use the
“UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll
through the menu and find the SP
folder.

Press the set key to open the SP

folder.

The first screen you see will be the

COOL mode then the HEAT mode,
using the “up” and “down” keys to
scroll (shown beside each view).

<IMG INFO>
220,85

<IMG INFO>
220,85

Let's say you want to change the

COOL mode setpoint.
Select COOL from the menu, then
press the set key.

<IMG INFO>
 The device will show the current
machine setpoint, which in this case
is 12.0 degrees centigrade. Use the
“up” and “down” keys to increase or
decrease it. For example, if you want
to change the setpoint to 12.6
degrees, press the "up arrow" key
until you reach the required value.

Once you have reached the required

setpoint, press the set key. The
device will save the value 12.6

To get back to the main display,

press the esc key repeatedly or allow
a 15 second timeout to elapse for
each menu.

Setpoint edit function enable from main screen

Parameter Ui25 allows you to enable Set Point modification on the main display with the UP and DOWN keys.
By way of example, we will change the setpoint value in COOL mode from 12.0 degrees centigrade to12.6 degrees
centigrade.

First set parameter UI25=1 (folder Par/Ui/UI25)

See Parameters section (folder PAr)

Let's say you want to change the COOL mode

setpoint.

The device must be in COOL mode

(or in StdBy from COOL)

To change the set point of the HEAT mode,

proceed in the same way by first changing the
device’s mode from COOL to HEAT
see Operating Mode Menu section

To change the setpoint on your machine, press

the UP or DOWN key in the main display.

The device will show the current machine

setpoint, which in this case is 12.0 degrees
centigrade.
 Use the “up” and “down” keys to increase or
decrease it

For example, if you want to change the setpoint

to 12.6 degrees, press the "up arrow" key until
you reach the required value.

Once you have reached the required setpoint,

press the set key. The device will save the value
12.6

<IMG INFO>
5.4.3.5 Display and reset compressor/pump hours

Example display and reset (tens of) hours for

Pump 2

Press the set key from the main display

The label Ai will appear on the display. Use the UP

and DOWN keys to scroll through the other labels
until you find the Hr label

Press the set key to view the first label - which in this
case is the running time for compressor 1 (CP01)

Scroll with the UP and DOWN keys to view (if the

relative resources are present) the running time for
compressor 2 (CP02) and the pump running time
(PU01, PU02, PU03)

Press the set key to view the pump running time

PU02

The tens of hours of functioning are 2.

(Hours expressed in tens:
2 means 20 hours of operation)

To reset the hours of functioning of pump PU02,

press and hold [set]

Note: repeat the above procedure to reset the hours

of functioning of the other resources

-------------------------------------

Press the esc key repeatedly to go back to the main

display.
5.4.4 Programming menu

Menu folder description comments

Parameters PAr CL Cr CF Ui St … Al parameters
See Functions
Functions FnC dEF tA tA tA St CC EUr functions chapter (folder
FnC)
Passwords PASS password
EU EU Eu00 … … … … … …

5.4.4.1 Parameters (folder PAr)

Modifying a parameter
Instructions are provided below on how to change a machine parameter. By way of example, let's look at the CL
configuration parameters folder, parameter CL01 (folder PAr/CL/CL01).

Press the esc and set keys together to open the

parameters menu. This will open the PAr menu.

The PAr parameters menu contains all device

parameter folders. Press the set key to view all
folders.

<IMG INFO>

The first folder the controller shows is the CL

configuration folder. Simply press the set key again to
modify individual CL parameters.

<IMG INFO>

The CL00 parameter will be shown on the device

(factory default settings).

Press the "up" key to scroll through the various

parameters or move to the next parameter (CL01 in
this case) or the “down” key to go back to the
previous parameter (CL97 in this case)

CF00->CF01->CF02->…->CL97->CL00
<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
CL97<-CL00<-CL01->…<-CL96<-CL97
0

NOTE: -> UP, <-DOWN

 Press the set key to view the value of the parameter
(CL01 in this case).

<IMG INFO>

For parameter CL01, the value shown will be 2. Press

the “up” and “down” keys to modify this value.

Press the set key once you have entered the required
value. **

Press the esc key to exit this display and go back to

the previous level.

**N.B. pressing the set key will confirm the value

entered; pressing the esc key will take you back to the
previous level without saving the value entered

5.4.5 Functions (Par/FnC folder)

See Functions chapter (folder FnC)

5.4.6 Entering a password (Par/PASS folder)

Levels of visibility
Four levels of visibility can be set by assigning suitable values to each parameter and folder, by serial, software
(DeviceManager or other communication softwares) or by programming key
The visibility levels are:
 Value 3 = parameter or folder always visible;
 Value 2 = manufacturer level; these parameters can only be seen by entering the manufacturer's password
(see parameter Ui28) (all parameters specified as always visible, parameters that are visible at the installation
level, and manufacturer level parameters will be visible)
 Value 1 = installation level; these parameters can only be viewed by entering the installation password (see
parameter Ui27) (all parameters specified as always visible and parameters that are visible at the installation
level will be visible)
 Value 0 = parameter or folder NOT visible

1. Parameters and/or folders with visibility level <>3 (i.e. password protected) will only be visible if the correct
password is entered (installer or manufacturer) following the procedure outlined below:
2. Parameters and/or folders with visibility level =3 are always visible and no password is required; in this case, the
procedure below is not required.
To view parameters visible for the given password, open folder PASS (press esc and set together [esc+set] from the main
display and search the folder using the up/down keys) and set the PASS value

Press the esc and set keys together from the

main display to enter the PASS folder.
[esc+set]

Pressing the two keys will open the menu

containing the list of folders. Use the “up”
and “down” keys to scroll through the list
until you find the PASS folder.

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0

Press the set key to open the PASS folder.

Enter the password (installation or
manufacturer) from here, press the set key
and exit.

Now access the parameters to display and

change their values (see parameters
<IMG INFO>
chapter)

5.4.7 Alarm events (Par/EU folder)

To view folder PAr from the main display,

press the Esc and Set keys at the same
time. [esc+set]

Pressing the two keys will open the menu

containing the list of folders. Use the
“up” and “down” keys to find the EU
folder

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0
 Press set to view the last alarm event - if
it exists - EU00.
NB: EU00 indicates the last alarm
recorded, EU01 the second last, and so
on.

Scroll with the UP and DOWN keys to

view (if present) any other alarm
events

Press the set key again to view details of

the selected event (EU00 in this case)

The first label will be shown (alarm code)

With the UP and DOWN keys you can

scroll:

Alarm code (as previously indicated)

<IMG INFO>
217
96,7
0

Alarm start time

Alarm start date

Alarm stop time

(in this case, the alarm is still active)

<IMG INFO>
217
96,7
0
 Alarm stop date
(in this case, the alarm is still active)

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0

Type of alarm
<IMG INFO>
217
96,7
0

(automatic)

or alternatively

(manual)

<IMG INFO>
217
96,25
0
 <IMG INFO>
30,75
43,9
1
2
6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (FOLDER PAR/CF)
51
-28,35
-1

Before doing anything, make sure the device is connected to a suitable external transformer. The following rules
must be followed when connecting cards to each other and to the application:
 Loads that exceed the maximum limits set forth in this manual/product label must not be applied to
outputs.
 When connecting loads, follow connection diagrams carefully.
 To avoid electric pairings, wire all low SELV (*) utilities separately from high voltage ones.
(°) SELV: SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE

Instrument configuration is determined by the values of the parameters associated with the inputs and outputs.

Correspondence between instrument input/output label and manual wording

I/O label on instrument Label on user manual

SB600 SD600 SC600 SE 600
AI1…AI5 AIL1…AIL5 AIE1…AIE5
DI1…DI6 DIL1…DIL6 DIE1…DIE6
DO1…DO5 DO6 DOL1…DOL5 DOL6 DOE1…DOE5 DOE6
AO1…AO5 AOL1…AOL5 AOE1…AOE5
DO4 DOL4 DOE4
TC1 TCL1 TCE1
TC2 TCL2 TCE2

6.1 Configuration of analogue inputs

Analogue inputs There are a total of 5 analogue inputs referred to below as AiL1…AiL5.
SB600 SD600 SC600 Using the parameters, a physical resource (probe, digital input, voltage/current signal) can be "physically" configured for
each type of input:
 3 inputs can be configured as temperature probes, an NTC type probe, or as digital inputs
 2 inputs (AiL3 and AiL4) can be configured as temperature probes, an NTC type probe, as digital inputs or
current/voltage input (signal 4-20mA / 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-1V).

6.1.1 Configuration of SE600 expansion analogue inputs

SE600 analogue There are a total of 5 analogue inputs referred to below as AiE1…AiE5.
inputs Using the parameters, a physical resource (probe, digital input, voltage/current signal) can be "physically" configured for
each type of input:
 3 inputs can be configured as temperature probes, an NTC type probe, or as digital inputs
 2 inputs (AiE3 and AiE4) can be configured as NTC temperature probes, as digital inputs or current/voltage input
(signal 4-20mA / 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-1V).

6.1.2 Configuring SKW remote terminal analogue inputs

SKW analogue There are a total of 2 analogue inputs referred to below as AIR1…AIR2.
inputs Using the parameters, a physical resource (probe, digital input, voltage/current signal) can be "physically" configured for
each type of input:
 1 input configurable as NTC type temperature probe
 1 input configurable as NTC type temperature probe, digital input or current input (4-20mA signal)

A “logical” meaning can also be associated to each analogue input using the relevant parameter.
Inputs can be "physically" configured as specified in the table below.
Analogue inputs:
configuration Value
Parameter Description
table 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
AiL analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CL00 // // // //
input type 1 configured voltage digital input probe
AiL analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CL01 // // // //
input type 2 configured voltage digital input probe
AiL analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CL02 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V 0-1 V
input type 3 configured voltage digital input probe
AiL analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CL03 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V 0-1 V
input type 4 configured voltage digital input probe
AiL analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CL04 // // // //
input type 5 configured voltage digital input probe
AiE analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CE00 // // // //
input type 1 configured voltage digital input probe
AiE analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CE01 // // // //
input type 2 configured voltage digital input probe
AiE analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CE02 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V 0-1 V
input type 3 configured voltage digital input probe
AiE analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CE03 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V 0-1 V
input type 4 configured voltage digital input probe
AiE analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CE04 // // // //
input type 5 configured voltage digital input probe

Energy Fle
 Parameter Description Value
0 1 2 3
Air analogue Probe not NTC
CR00 // //
input type 1 configured probe
Air analogue Probe not Probe configured as no NTC
CR01 4…20mA
input type 2 configured voltage digital input probe
See
Configuration of Digital
Inputs

NOTE: // indicates that value is not present.

Analogue input AI Parameter Range Description

AiL3 CL10 CL11…99.9 AiL analogue input full scale value 3
AiL3 CL11 -50.0…CL10 AiL analogue input start of scale value 3
AiL4 CL12 CL13…99.9 AiL analogue input full scale value 4
AiL4 CL13 -50.0…CL12 AiL analogue input start of scale value 4
AiE3 CE10 CE11…99.9 AiE analogue input full scale value 3
AiE3 CE11 -50.0…CE10 AiE analogue input start of scale value 3
AiE4 CE12 CE13…99.9 AiE analogue input full scale value 4
AiE4 CE13 -50.0…CE12 AiE analogue input start of scale value 4

Air2 Cr10 Cr11…99.9 Air analogue input full scale value 2

Air2 Cr11 -50.0…Cr10 Air analogue input start of scale value 2

The values read by analogue inputs can be calibrated using parameters CL20…CL24 / Cr20…Cr21

Measurement
Parameter Description Range
Unit
CL20 AiL analogue input differential 1 °C -12.0…12.0
CL21 AiL analogue input differential 2 °C -12.0…12.0
CL22 AiL analogue input differential 3 °C/Bar -12.0…12.0
CL23 AiL analogue input differential 4 °C/Bar -12.0…12.0
CL24 AiL analogue input differential 5 °C -12.0…12.0
CE20 AiE analogue input differential 1 °C -12.0…12.0
CE21 AiE analogue input differential 2 °C -12.0…12.0
CE22 AiE analogue input differential 3 °C / Bar -12.0…12.0
CE23 AiE analogue input differential 4 °C / Bar -12.0…12.0
CE24 AiE analogue input differential 5 °C -12.0…12.0
Measurement
Parameter Description Range
Unit
Cr20 Air analogue input differential 1 °C -12.0…12.0
Cr21 Air analogue input differential 2 °C / Bar -12.0…12.0

Study the following tables:

Table A – parameter association - analogue input configuration

Parameter Description Value Description Notes

If CL00=1 (AiL1 configured as DI), set
AiL analogue input configuration 1 0…16 See Table B
CL30 CL30=0
If CL01=1 (AiL2 configured as DI)
AiL analogue input configuration 2 0…16 See Table B
CL31 set CL31=0
If CL02=1 (AiL3 configured as DI)
AiL analogue input 3 configuration 0…30 See Table B
CL32 set CL32=0
If CL03=1 (AiL4 configured as DI)
AiL analogue input configuration 4 0…30 See Table B
CL33 set CL33=0
If CL04=1 (AiL5 configured as DI)
AiL analogue input configuration 5 0…16 See Table B
CL34 set CL34=0
If CE00=1 (AiE1 configured as DI), set
AiE analogue input configuration 1 0…16 See Table B
CE30 CE30=0
If CE01=1 (AiE2 configured as DI)
AiE analogue input configuration 2 0…16 See Table B
CE31 set CE31=0
If CE02=1 (AiE3 configured as DI)
AiE analogue input configuration 3 0…30 See Table B
CE32 set CE32=0
If CE03=1 (AiE4 configured as DI)
AiE analogue input configuration 4 0…30 See Table B
CE33 set CE33=0
If CE04=1 (AIE5 configured as DI)
AiE analogue input configuration 5 0…16 See Table B
CE34 set CE34=0
Parameter Description Value Description Notes
See Table B
Air analogue input configuration 1 0…15
CR30
 Parameter Description Value Description Notes
If CR01=1 (AIR2 configured as DI),
Air analogue input configuration 2 0…29 See Table B
CR31 set CR31=0

Table B – analogue input logical meaning & parameter values CL30…CL34 / CR30, CR31

AiL/AiE Analogue Input AiL Analogue Input Value Description

Remote terminal
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 0 Input disabled
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 1 Water/air inlet temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 internal exchanger
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 2 Water/air outlet temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 internal exchanger
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 3 Water outlet temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 internal exchanger circuit 1
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 4 Water outlet temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 internal exchanger circuit 2
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 5 External exchanger temperature circuit 1
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 6 External exchanger temperature circuit 2
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 7 Water inlet temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 recovery (or external) exchanger
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 8 Water outlet temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 recovery (or external) exchanger
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 9 External temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 10 Water recovery temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 11 NOT USED
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 12 NOT USED
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 13 NOT USED
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 14 NOT USED
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 15 NOT USED
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 16 Temperature display
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 17 NOT USED
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 18 NOT USED
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 19 NOT USED
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 20 NOT USED
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 21 High pressure input circuit 1
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 22 High pressure input circuit 2
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 23 Low pressure input circuit 1
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 24 Low pressure input circuit 2
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 25 Input for dynamic setpoint
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 26 Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 27 Internal exchanger pressure circuit 2
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 28 External exchanger pressure circuit 1
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 29 External exchanger pressure circuit 2
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 30 Pressure display
AiE3 AiE4
 6.2 Digital Input Configuration
Digital inputs There are a total of 6 no voltage digital inputs referred to below as DI1…DI6.
These can be added to by AiL1…AiL5 if the latter are configured as digital inputs (via parameters CL50…5L4+CR50
respectively).

Hence a total of 11+1 digital inputs are available.

Study the following tables:

Table A – parameter association - configuration of digital inputs

Parameter Description Value Description Notes

CL40 DIL digital input configuration 1 -62…+62 See Table B
CL41 DIL digital input configuration 2 -62…+62 See Table B
CL42 DIL digital input configuration 3 -62…+62 See Table B
CL43 DIL digital input configuration 4 -62…+62 See Table B
CL44 DIL digital input configuration 5 -62…+62 See Table B
CL45 DIL digital input configuration 6 -62…+62 See Table B
AiL analogue input configuration 1 Set to 0 if AiL1 is NOT
CL50 -62…+62 See Table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
AiL analogue input configuration 2 Set to 0 if AiL2 is NOT
CL51 -62…+62 See Table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
AiL analogue input 3 configuration Set to 0 if AiL3 is NOT
CL52 -62…+62 See Table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
AiL analogue input configuration 4 Set to 0 if AiL4 is NOT
CL53 -62…+62 See Table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
AiL analogue input configuration 5 Set to 0 if AiL5 is NOT
CL54 -62…+62 See Table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
CE40 DIE digital input configuration 1 -62…+62 See Table B
CE41 DIE digital input configuration 2 -62…+62 See Table B
CE42 DIE digital input configuration 3 -62…+62 See Table B
CE43 DIE digital input configuration 4 -62…+62 See Table B
CE44 DIE digital input configuration 5 -62…+62 See Table B
CE45 DIE digital input configuration 6 -62…+62 See Table B
AiE analogue input configuration 1 Set = 0 if AiE1 is NOT
CE50 -62…+62 See Table B
if configured as a digital input configured as DI
AiE analogue input configuration 2 Set = 0 if AiE2 is NOT
CE51 -62…+62 See Table B
if configured as a digital input configured as DI
AiE analogue input configuration 3 Set = 0 if AiE3 is NOT
CE52 -62…+62 See Table B
if configured as a digital input configured as DI
AiE analogue input configuration 4 Set = 0 if AiE4 is NOT
CE53 -62…+62 See Table B
if configured as a digital input configured as DI
AiE analogue input configuration 5 Set = 0 if AiE5 is NOT
CE54 -62…+62 See Table B
if configured as a digital input configured as DI
Parameter Description Value Description Notes
AIR analogue input configuration 2 Set to 0 if AIR2 is NOT
CR50 -62…+62 See Table B**
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI

Digital inputs: Table B - Digital inputs: configuration table

configuration Polarity is defined as indicated below:
table
Value Description
+ Positive Active when contact closed
- Negative Active when contact open

Value Description Notes

0 Input disabled
±1 Remote STD-BY
±2 Remote OFF Local ON/OFF ineffective
±3 Remote Summer/Winter
±4 Power step 1 request
±5 Power step 2 request
±6 Power step 3 request
±7 Power step 4 request
±8 Digital input heat step 1 request See also digital temperature control
±9 Digital input heat step 2 request See also digital temperature control
±10 Digital input heat step 3 request See also digital temperature control
±11 Digital input heat step 4 request See also digital temperature control
±12 Digital input cool step 1 request See also digital temperature control
±13 Digital input cool step 2 request See also digital temperature control
±14 Digital input cool step 3 request See also digital temperature control
±15 Digital input cool step 4 request See also digital temperature control
±16 NOT USED
 Value Description Notes
±17 NOT USED
±18 NOT USED
±19 NOT USED
±20 Heat pump lock See section
Block heat pump (folder PAr/HP)
±21 Power stage forced to 50% See section
Forced power stage (folder PAr/PL)
±22 Economy input See section
Operating modes - temperature control
(folder PAr/tr)
±23 FreeCooling Consent
±24 General alarm
±25 End of defrost C1
±26 End of defrost C2
±27 Recovery enabling
±28 NOT USED
±29 NOT USED
±30 High pressure pressure switch C1
±31 High pressure pressure switch C2
±32 Low pressure pressure switch C1
±33 Low pressure pressure switch C2
±34 Compressor 1 oil pressure switch
±35 Compressor 2 oil pressure switch
±36 Compressor 3 oil pressure switch
±37 Compressor 4 oil pressure switch
±38 NOT USED
±39 External exchanger fan thermal switch C1
±40 External exchanger fan thermal switch C2
±41 Internal exchanger fan thermal switch
±42 External FreeCooling fan thermal switch
±43 Compressor 1 thermal switch
±44 Compressor 2 thermal switch
±45 Compressor 3 thermal switch
±46 Compressor 4 thermal switch
±47 Internal circuit pump 1 thermal switch
±48 Internal circuit pump 2 thermal switch
±49 External circuit pump 1 thermal switch
±50 Internal exchanger electric heater 1 thermal switch
±51 Internal exchanger electric heater 2 thermal switch
±52 Auxiliary output alarm
±53 External circuit pump 2 thermal switch
±54 NOT USED
±55 Primary circuit flow switch
±56 External circuit flow switch (Recovery)
±57 NOT USED
±58 Display
±59 Compressor 1 special thermal switch
±60 Compressor 2 special thermal switch
±61 Compressor 3 special thermal switch
±62 Compressor 4 special thermal switch

NOTE: If more than one digital input in the table is configured with the same value, the function is activated when the
input with the highest index is piloted.
 6.3 Digital output configuration
Digital Outputs See the section on Electric Connections for the number and capacity of relays/open collectors and for information on the
symbols used on labels supplied with the device.
 High voltage outputs (relays) are identified as DO1, DO2, DO3, DO4 and DO6.
 The low voltage (SELV), open collector output is called DO5

All digital outputs can be configured as outlined in the table below:

Table A – parameter association - output configuration
Parameter Description Value Description Notes
CL90 DOL digital output configuration 1 -53…+53 See Table B Present in all models
CL91 DOL digital output configuration 2 -53…+53 See Table B Present in all models
CL92 DOL digital output configuration 3 -53…+53 See Table B Present in all models
CL93 DOL digital output configuration 4 -53…+53 See Table B Present in all models
Present in all models
CL94 DOL digital output configuration 5 -53…+53 See Table B
(Open Collector Output)
CL95 DOL digital output configuration 6 -53…+53 See Table B Present in models with 5 relays
See Table A –
Analogue Outputs and Models
CL96 AOL digital output configuration 1 -53…+53 See Table B
(Applies if CL71=0, set CL80
appropriately)
See Table A –
Analogue Outputs and Models
CL97 DOE digital output configuration 1 -53…+53 See Table B
(Applies if CL72=0, set CL81
appropriately)
CE90 DOE digital output configuration 1 -53…+53 See Table B Present in all models
CE91 DOE digital output configuration 2 -53…+53 See Table B Present in all models
CE92 DOE digital output configuration 3 -53…+53 See Table B Present in all models
CE93 DOE digital output configuration 4 -53…+53 See Table B Present in all models
Present in all models
CE94 DOE digital output configuration 5 -53…+53 See Table B
(Open Collector Output)
CE95 DOE digital output configuration 6 -53…+53 See Table B Present in models with 5 relays
See Table A –
Analogue Outputs and Models
CE96 AOE digital output configuration 1 -53…+53 See Table B
(Applies if CE71=0, set CE80
appropriately)
See Table A –
Analogue Outputs and Models
CE97 AOE digital output configuration 2 -53…+53 See Table B
(Applies if CE72=0, set CE81
appropriately)
Table B - Outputs: configuration table
Polarity is defined as indicated below:
Value Description
+ Positive Active when contact closed
- Negative Active when contact open

Value Description Type Value Description Type

0 Output disabled Digital ±41 Bypass / Star compressor 4 Digital
±1 Compressor 1 Digital ±42 NOT USED Digital
±2 Compressor 2 Digital ±43 NOT USED Digital
±3 Compressor 3 Digital ±44 NOT USED Digital
±4 Compressor 4 Digital ±45 NOT USED Digital
±5 Reversal valve circuit 1 Digital ±46 NOT USED Digital
±6 Reversal valve circuit 2 Digital ±47 NOT USED Digital
±7 Circuit 1 pump-down valve Digital ±48 NOT USED Digital
±8 Circuit 2 pump-down valve Digital ±49 NOT USED Digital
±9 NOT USED Digital ±50 NOT USED Digital
±10 Free-Cooling Valve Digital ±51 NOT USED Digital
±11 Circuit 1 Recovery Valve Digital ±52 NOT USED Digital
±12 Circuit 2 Recovery Valve Digital ±53 NOT USED Digital
±13 NOT USED Digital ±54 NOT USED Digital
±14 Internal circuit water pump 1 Digital ±55 NOT USED Digital
±15 Internal circuit water pump 2 Digital ±56 Fan Analogue
external exchanger circuit 1
±16 External circuit water pump 1 Digital ±57 Fan Analogue
external exchanger circuit 2
±17 External circuit water pump 2 Digital ±58 NOT USED //
±18 Recirculation fan Digital ±59 Modulating internal circuit water Analogue
pump 1
±19 Fan Digital ±60 Modulating internal circuit water Analogue
external exchanger circuit 1 pump 2
±20 Fan Digital ±61 External Free-Cooling Fan Analogue
external exchanger circuit 2
±21 External Free-Cooling Fan Digital ±62 Modulating external circuit water Analogue
pump 1
Value Description Type Value Description Type
±22 NOT USED Digital ±63 Modulating external circuit water Analogue
pump 2
±23 Electrical heater 1 Digital ±64 NOT USED Analogue
internal exchanger
±24 Electrical heater 2 Digital ±65 NOT USED Analogue
internal exchanger
±25 Electrical heater Digital ±66 NOT USED Analogue
external exchanger 1
±26 Electrical heater Digital ±67 NOT USED Analogue
external exchanger 2
±27 Auxiliary output Digital ±68 NOT USED Analogue
±28 NOT USED Digital ±69 NOT USED Analogue
±29 NOT USED Digital ±70 NOT USED Digital
±30 Boiler Digital ±71 NOT USED Digital
±31 Alarm Digital ±72 NOT USED Digital
±32 NOT USED Digital ±73 NOT USED Digital
±33 NOT USED Digital ±74 NOT USED Digital
±34 Part Winding / Digital ±75 NOT USED Digital
Delta compressor 1
±35 Part Winding / Digital
Delta compressor 2
±36 Part Winding / Digital
Delta compressor 3
±37 Part Winding / Digital
Delta compressor 4
±38 Bypass / Star compressor 1 Digital
±39 Bypass / Star compressor 2 Digital
±40 Bypass / Star compressor 3 Digital

If multiple outputs have been configured to run the same resource, these outputs will be activated in parallel.
 6.4 Configuration of analogue outputs
Analogue Outputs
See the section on Electric Connections for the number and type of analogue outputs used and for information on the
symbols used on labels supplied with the controller.

There are 6 analogue outputs. 1 high voltage one and 5 low (SELV) voltage ones, the exact number depending on the
following models and with the following characteristics:

Table A2 – Analogue Outputs and Models

Expansion
High voltage SELV

Standard
models

models
Open
Label
Models Models Collector 0…20mA
Output on 0..10V
636 646 4…20mA
display
PWM/PPM

636

646

655

636

646

655
TC1 TCL1 3A 230V 2A 230V ● ●
TC2 TCL2 3A 230V ●
AO1 AOL1 ● ● ● ●
AO2 AOL2 ● ● ●
AO3 AOL3 ● ● ● ●
AO4 AOL4 ● ● ● ●
AO5 AOL5 ● ● ● ●

TC1 TCE1 3A 230V 2A 230V ● ●

TC2 TCE2 3A 230V ●
AO1 AOE1 ● ● ● ●
AO2 AOE2 ● ● ●
AO3 AOE3 ● ● ● ●
AO4 AOE4 ● ● ● ●
AO5 AOE5 ● ● ● ●

TRIAC analogue outputs (TC1, TC2)

TRIACs are high voltage outputs generally used to pilot fans or water pumps.
<IMG INFO>
30,75
43,9
The output can be configured for proportional operation (constant speed variation) or as ON/OFF.
1
2
51
-28,35
-1

Remote control switches downstream from the TRIAC are NOT permitted.

The output can be configured as described in the table entitled “Analogue Output TC1 - AO1 AO2: configuration table”

Configuration of low voltage (SELV) analogue output

AO1 always available. If configured as digital, see parameter CL96/CE96

AO2 always available. If configured as digital, see parameter CL97/CE97
They can be configured as:
PPM/PWM (via CFS modules) or
ON/OFF

AO3 – AO4 - low voltage (SELV) output to pilot external modules to run fans. Can be used to pilot 0-10V fans (via
parameters CL61/CL62 – CE61/CE62)
AO5 - low voltage (SELV) output to pilot external modules to run fans.
Can be used to pilot 4-20mA fans or 0-20mA fans (via parameter CL60/CE60)

To configure, see the table below. All analogue outputs can be configured as digital or proportional.
Table B – Analogue Outputs – Configuration parameters

Analogue output TC1 - AO1 AO2: configuration table

Output Parameter Description Values Notes
Phase shift values to
pilot TRIAC with
CL73 Phase shift TCL analogue output 1
0…90 cut-off in the event
CE73 Phase shift TCE analogue output 1
of inductive loads.

TC1 pulse length to pilot

CL76
Only for TCL analogue output pulse length 1 5…40 units Triac
models TCE analogue output pulse length 1 (347…2776 μs) (1 unit = 69.4 μs).
CE76
63x 64x
See
Table B
CL79
TCL analogue output configuration 1 Outputs:
-53…+53 if digital (see polarity)
configuration
56…63 if proportional
TCE analogue output configuration 1 table, paragraph
CE79
on Configuration
of Digital Outputs
0= 65x models See CE95
CE70 Enable TCE TRIAC output 1 see CE73 – CE76 –
1= 63x 64x models
CE79
0= Output configured as digital If =0 see parameter
CL96
(for pulse pilot)
If =1 see
1= Output configured as TRIAC parameters CL74 –
CL71 Enable AOL analogue output 1
CL77 – CL80
CE74 – CE77 – CE80
If=2 see CL82
Note: applies only
2 = PWM
to CL71
0= Output configured as digital If =0 see parameter
CL96/CE96
(for pulse pilot)
CE71 Enable AOE analogue output 1 If =1 see
1= Output configured as TRIAC parameters CL74 –
CL77 – CL80
CE74 – CE77 – CE80
CL74 Phase shift AOL analogue output 1 Active if CL71=1
0…90
CE74 Phase shift AOE analogue output 1 / CE71=1
Active if CL71=1
CL77
AOL analogue output pulse length 1 5…40 units / CE71=1
AOE analogue output pulse length 1 (347…2776 μs) (1 unit = 69.4 μs).
CE77
See Table B
CL80
AOL analogue output configuration 1 -53…+53 if digital (see polarity) Outputs:
AOE analogue output configuration 1 56…63 if proportional configuration
TCE1 CE80
table
0= Output configured as digital If =0 see parameter
CL97
(for pulse pilot)
If =1 see
1= Output configured as TRIAC parameters CL75 –
CL72 Enable AOL analogue output 2
CL78 – CL81
CE75 – CE78 – CE81
If=2 see CL82
2 = PWM Note: applies only
to CL72
0= Output configured as digital If =0 see parameter
CL97/CE97
(for pulse pilot)
CE72 Enable AOE analogue output 2 If =1 see
1= Output configured as TRIAC parameters CL75 –
CL78 – CL81
CE75 – CE78 – CE81
CL75 Phase shift AOL analogue output 2 Active if CL72=1
0…90
CE75 Phase shift AOE analogue output 2 /CE72=1
Active if CL72=1
CL78
AOL analogue output pulse length 2 5…40 units /CE72=1
AOE analogue output pulse length 2 (347…2776 μs) (1 unit = 69.4 μs).
CE78
See
CL81 Table B
AOL analogue output configuration 2 -53…+53 if digital (see polarity)
Outputs:
AOE analogue output configuration 2 56…63 if proportional
CE81 configuration
table
CL82 Analogue output PWM frequency 100Hz…20KHz
* in 636 models, AO2 can be used as TRIAC (TC2)

Low voltage (SELV) analogue output AO3-4-5: configuration table

Parameter Description Values Notes
AOL analogue output type
CL60 5 0 = 4-20mA Current analogue output
See Analogue Output
CE60 AOE analogue output type 1 = 0-20mA Current analogue output
Configuration table
5

Configuration
CL61 AOL analogue output 3 Modulated piloting or
-53…+53 if digital (see polarity)
Configuration on/off via 10V
56…63 if proportional
CE61 analogue output external relay
configuration 3
Configuration
CL62 AOL analogue output 4 Modulated piloting or
-53…+53 if digital (see polarity)
Configuration on/off via 10V
56…63 if proportional
CE62 Analogue output external relay
configuration 4
Configuration
CL63 AOL analogue output 5
-53…+53 if digital (see polarity) Modulated piloting or
Configuration
56…63 if proportional on/off
CE63 AOE analogue output type
5

The following can be piloted:

Loads with output modulation (values from 56 to 63) or
Loads with on/off type switching using:
The Triac as switch (TC1 AO1 AO2)
The output as 0-10V switch (AO3-4)
The output as 0/4…20mA switch(AO5)
7 OPERATING MODES – TEMPERATURE CONTROL (FOLDER PAR/TR)
Temperature control parameters can be viewed and configured in folder tr (see User Interface and Parameters section).

Energy Flex controls the main temperature control setpoint by dynamically modifying its value using special algorithms and
events to maximise plant efficiency and output.

The action on the setpoint can be:

 Direct: modifies the main setpoints

 Indirect: modifies by using the sum of the values (positive or negative) called the setpoint differentials with the
principal setpoints for the Cool and Heat modes.

There are several setpoint differentials:

 Dynamic setpoint differential on dedicated input or external temperature

 Economy function setpoint differential
 Adaptive function setpoint differential (see section in question)

In the same way (by means of the same direct and indirect actions) the temperature controller regulator hysteresis can be
dynamically controlled. This only affects the compressor power stages; the other steps, such as boiler and heaters, have
parameter-set hysteresis.
The main hysteresis differentials for the compressors are:

 Adaptive function hysteresis differential (see section in question)

The results of the direct and indirect actions on the principal setpoints and hysteresis are the real setpoint and hysteresis.

In general, we can say that the main temperature control is based on these 4 values:

1. Real Cool setpoint

2. Real Heat setpoint
3. Real Cool hysteresis (compressors only)
4. Real Heat hysteresis (compressors only)

The main temperature controller calculates the thermal power to be delivered, both in Heat and Cool mode.
The thermal power is expressed a number of steps (hot or cold) to deliver.

7.1 Temperature controller setpoint and hysteresis

7.1.1 Setpoint and hysteresis from parameter value

We list below the parameters used to set the main working setpoints, one for each operating mode:

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
tr10 tr20 Temperature controller setpoint in Cool / Heat
tr11 tr21 Temperature controller minimum setpoint in Cool / Heat
tr12 tr22 Temperature controller maximum setpoint in Cool / Heat
tr13 tr23 Temperature control hysteresis in Cool / Heat

There are direct modifications to the setpoint and hysteresis (direct action on the principal values, such as modification via
COM1) and indirect modifications, which sum the differentials to obtain the real setpoint and hysteresis.

7.1.2 Real setpoint and hysteresis

The real setpoints and hysteresis are calculated from the parameters described above and summing the total differentials
calculated in a specific way from the components described above.

 Real setpoint Heat = Main setpoint Heat + setpoint differential Heat

 Real setpoint Cool = Main setpoint Cool + Setpoint differential Cool

Setpoint differential = Dynamic setpoint differential on dedicated input and/or external temperature
+ Economy function setpoint differential
+/- Adaptive function setpoint differential
+ Remote setpoint differential (from serial)

 Real hysteresis Heat = Main hysteresis Heat + Hysteresis differential Heat

 Real hysteresis Cool = Main hysteresis Cool + Hysteresis differential Cool

Hysteresis differential = Adaptive function hysteresis differential + Remote hysteresis differential (from serial)

Energy Fle
7.1.2.1 Setpoint differential: dynamic differential
See dynamic setpoint section (folder PAr/dS)

7.1.2.2 Setpoint differential: Economy differential

Enabling
The function is enabled only if a digital input has been configured as Economy input (at least one of CL40…CL45,
CL50…CL54=22)

When the digital input is enabled, the setpoint is increased by a differential equal to the value of parameter tr15 or tr25
depending on the current operating mode (Cool or Heat):

Ingresso
Digitale
Economy Funzionamento in modalità Cool

ON

OFF
tr15: Setpoint differential in Cool from
Economy input (typically positive) if Differenziale
the current operating mode is Cool Economy
Set-point
tr15

Ingresso
Digitale
Economy Funzionamento in modalità Heat

ON

OFF
tr25: Setpoint differential in Heat from
Differenziale economy input (typically negative) if
Economy the current operating mode is Heat.
Set-point

<IMG INFO>
tr25

The activation of Economy mode is indicated by the Economy led (if so configured)

7.1.2.3 Setpoint and hysteresis differentials: Adaptive function

See Adaptive section (folder PAr/Ad)

7.1.2.4 Setpoint and hysteresis differentials: Remote differentials (from serial)

There are differentials, called "remote", on both the setpoints and the hysteresis, normally set to 0, which can be modified
(= activated) only via serial, for further details see the Supervision section.

In general, the setpoint can also be modified via COM1.

The modification may affect:
 values in EEPROM (dedicated parameters), non volatile memory
 values in RAM, volatile memory

Modifications via serial to setpoints in non volatile memory (e.g. with Device Manager, DM) have clear effects: they modify
the parameters:

 tr10 Temperature control setpoint in Cool

 tr20 Temperature control setpoint in Heat
Modifications via serial to setpoints in volatile memory (e.g. specific serial command) can only affect the main setpoints in
use at that time, and not the real setpoints.

The effect is to temporarily modify the main setpoints, and this is automatically cancelled if there is a black out (the
setpoints present in the EEPROM are loaded into RAM on reset), or at the next event in case of timed operation, etc.

Note: In the same way as indicated in the section Time band operation, the setpoints visible in the states menu (values Sp)
are those in use and, hence, may differ from the values of the EEPROM parameter tr10 and tr20 if, for example, they have
been modified by serial commands.

The same applies to the hysteresis parameters (and simplified, e.g. time band operation has no effect on hysteresis) as for
the setpoints.

7.2 Temperature controller

The Energy Flex has four types of temperature control, which are selected with tr00 Type of temperature controller:
 Proportional: Calculates the power the unit must supply in relation to the distance of the air/water
temperature from the setpoint
o tr00=0 Proportional temperature control - see diagrams A and B
 Time proportional: This type of control activates the power steps as a function of the time the control probe
remains between two bands B1 and B2 that are symmetrical to the Setpoint.
o tr00=3 Time proportional temperature control - see diagrams C and D

 Differential: Calculates the power the unit must supply in relation to difference in temperature between two
analogue inputs
o tr00=1 Differential temperature control - see diagrams E and F
 Digital (motor condensing)
o tr00=2 Digital temperature control

Temperature control parameters can be viewed and configured in folder tr (see User Interface and Parameters section).

7.2.1 Temperature control probes

Table A Regulation probe selection

Temp. COOL HEAT Description Probe 1 Probe 2

control

control tr02 tr03 Select temperature control probe in See Table B N.A.
Cool / Heat
Time tr02 tr03 Select temperature control probe in See Table B N.A.
proportional Cool / Heat
differential tr04 tr05 Select probe for differential See Table B See Table B
temperature control in Cool/Heat
modes

Table B Control probes

Value Probe 1 Probe 2

Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
0
(CL30…CL34=0)
Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
1
(CL30…CL34=1)
Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature External temperature NTC input
2 (CL30…CL34=8)
Average ((CL30…CL34=2), (CL30…CL34=3))
External exchanger inlet water temperature
3
(CL30…CL34=6)
External exchanger outlet water temperature
4
(CL30…CL34=7)
Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature
5
Average ((CL30…CL34=4), (CL30…CL34=5))

*if one of the probes is in error or not configured, the average is a probe error
 7.2.2 Proportional temperature control
This is a type of control which activates the power steps as a function of the divergence of the actual temperature from
the real setpoint.

Homogeneous or power stage compressors

The steps (heat or cool) are discrete and there are a limited number of them (max 4 for SB devices).
The number of steps (resources) requested is linked to the difference between the control temperature and the real
setpoint; the greater the difference, the larger the number of steps (resources) used to achieve the setpoint.
The temperature interval between application of one power step and the next depends on the proportional band and the
number of resources available (see Compressors section).

Temperature control is usually dependent on the inlet/outlet water/air temperature of the internal exchanger. Installations
with double internal exchanger can control the temperature as a function of the average of the two temperatures
measured at the exchanger outlets.

In some applications (e.g. machines with water reversal in Heat mode) it may be necessary to use the external (recovery)
exchanger inlet/outlet water temperature for temperature control.

Various temperature control probes can be selected for Heat and Cool modes using the parameters given in Table B
Control probes

7.2.3 Proportional power step temperature control in Cool / Heat mode

Temperature control is enabled in Heat mode only if Enable heat pump tr01 = 1

Diagram A Diagram B
COOL HEAT
Compressor Gradini

TR14 should be greather than TR13

TR13
4 4

TR13
3 3

TR13
2 2
tr14

TR13
1 1

tr10 tr13 tr14 tr14 Sensör Sonda

Isteresi Reale
Termoregolazione tr14 tr14 Heat Termoregolazione
Set-point COOL Cool (tr02) Heat (tr03)
reale
IMG INFO

Set-point HEAT
<IMG INFO>
reale

Parameter Description
COOL HEAT Description
tr02 tr03 Select temperature control probe in Cool / Heat
tr14 tr24 Steps/compressors insertion differential in Cool / Heat
Setpoint Real setpoint in Cool / Heat
Hysteresis Real control hysteresis in Cool / Heat

Note: The real hysteresis may not be greater than the differential. In this case the hysteresis is considered equal to the
differential.
7.2.4 Time proportional temperature control in Cool / Heat mode
As in the previous case (tr00=0) temperature control is enabled in Heat mode only if Enable heat pump tr01 = 1

This type of control activates the power steps as a function of the time the control probe remains between two bands B1
and B2 that are symmetrical to the Setpoint.
It operates as follows
 if temperature < (set + B1/2) the compressors do not change
 if (set + B1/2) < temperature < (set + B2/2) the compressors start with delay +I1
 if temperature > (set + B2/2) the compressors start with delay +I2

The same applies to the release of compressors with times –I1 and –I2.
See diagrams C and D

Note
 Band B2> B1. If B2 is lower than B1 the considered value will be B2=B1
 The safety timings all remain active

Diagram C
COOL
Sonda di regolazione COOL (tr02)

+TI2 +TI2 +TI2 C

B2
B
+TI1

A
+1 X +1
B1
+TI2 zone
X X
+TI1 zone
+1 XX
ZN
SET X
COOL Time
+TI1 (tempo) ZN
(reale)
XX -1
-1 X
X -1

-TI1 zone

-TI2 -TI2 -TI2 zone

<IMG INFO>
125-doF

Diagram D
HEAT

Parameter Description
COOL HEAT Description
tr02 tr03 Select temperature control probe in Cool / Heat
differential 'timed'
Setpoint Real setpoint in Cool / Heat
+1 Increase power
B1 B2 Band symmetrical to Setpoint
ZN Neutral zone
+TI1 +TI2 T1/T2 zone increment
-TI1-TI2 T1/T2 zone decrement

COOL Case
 A zone change: this is the first event, the zone timer +T1 has elapsed therefore increment the power and reset
all the timers.
 B +T2 elapses: located in zone +T2 therefore increment the power and reset all the timers
 C T2 elapses: located in zone +T2 therefore increment the power and reset all the timers
 X nothing happens (e.g. when the timers have not elapsed or not in the appropriate zone or in NZ)

The same operation applies to power decrements

HEAT Case
The same operation applies
 7.2.5 Temperature control differential
Differential temperature control is enabled with parameter tr00 Type of temperature controller.
The aim of differential temperature control is to maintain a constant difference between the external temperature and the
temperature of the air/water used for heating/cooling.
The temperature difference in question is defined by

temperature control value = Probe 1 – Probe 2

where Probe 2 is the external temperature.

See Control Probes Table

Installations with double internal exchanger can control the temperature as a function of the average of the two
temperatures measured at the exchanger outlets. The same applies to the external exchangers.

7.2.5.1 Differential temperature control in Cool / Heat mode

Temperature control is enabled in Heat mode only if tr01: Enable heat pump = 1.

Diagram E Diagram F
COOL HEAT
Gradini Gradini

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

tr10 tr14 tr14 Sonda1-Sonda2

Cool (tr04) Isteresi Reale Sonda1-Sonda2
tr24 tr24 Heat
Set-point COOL Cool (tr05)
reale
<IMG INFO>

Set-point HEAT
<IMG INFO>
reale

Parameter Description
COOL HEAT Description
tr04 tr05 Select differential temperature control probe in Cool / Heat
tr14 tr24 Steps/compressors insertion differential in Cool / Heat
Setpoint Real setpoint in Cool / Heat
Hysteresis Real control hysteresis in Cool / Heat

Note: The real hysteresis may not be greater than the differential. In this case the hysteresis is considered equal to the
differential.
7.2.6 Digital temperature control
The function is enabled if the parameter tr00: Type of temperature controller = 2.
In the case of digital temperature control, the power step request depends on the state of specific digital inputs, typically
driven by external thermostats, rather than analogue variables.
The operating mode can also be selected via a digital input.
Note: Safety timings, settings (compressor ON delay, pump ON, ..) and alarms are active as usual.

The digital input configuration depends on the type of thermostat used in the application.
We list below the meanings which can be associated with the digital inputs in question.

Type 1 thermostat

Value DIL1 to DIL5 / AIL1 to Description

AIL5
±8 Digital input heat step 1 request
±9 Digital input heat step 2 request
±10 Digital input heat step 3 request
±11 Digital input heat step 4 request
±12 Digital input cool step 1 request
±13 Digital input cool step 2 request
±14 Digital input cool step 3 request
±15 Digital input cool step 4 request

Type 2 thermostat

Value DIL1 to DIL5 / AIL1 to Description

AIL5
±3 Remote Summer/Winter
±4 Power step 1 request
±5 Power step 2 request
±6 Power step 3 request
±7 Power step 4 request

For further details, see the section on System Configuration (folder PAr/CL-Cr-CF) /
section on Configuration of digital inputs (DIL1 to DIL5 and AIL1 to AIL5) /
Table B - Digital inputs: configuration table

Note:
- If two digital inputs are configured as heat step request and cool step request, activating both at the same time
generates a configuration error, for further details see the alarms table;
- If a digital input has been configured as heat request and the digital input for summer/winter is in the summer position,
this generates a configuration error;
- Temperature control depends directly on the activation of digital inputs which therefore must be activated in a logical
sequence. For example, power steps must be activated and deactivated in the fixed sequence 1-2-3-4 and 4-3-2-1.
 8 OPERATING STATES (FOLDER PAR/ST)
Once it has been configured, the Energy SB600 is ready to control the utilities as a function of the temperature and
pressure measured by the probes and the temperature control functions defined via its parameters.

Operating mode parameters can be viewed and configured in folder St (see User Interface and Parameters sections).

When Energy Flex is not OFF or on StdBy, it is in heat or cool mode

Operating modes Three operating modes can be set in parameter St00- Select operating modes:
 St00=0 Cool only COOL
 St00=1 Heat only HEAT
 St00=2 Heat and cool HEAT + COOL

Operating states Each operating mode is associated with operating states.

Operating states can be selected:
 from the keyboard - if keys are enabled in parameters:
 UI 21 - Enable MODE function from key Enables/disables mode selection from a key
 UI 23 - Enable ON/OFF function from key Enables/disables ON/OFF key for switching the device on or off
 from appropriately configured digital inputs:
 i.e. Remote ON/OFF
 Remote STD-BY

Operating mode
COOL HEAT HEAT+COOL
Cooling
x NA x
Heating NA x x
Operating state Standby (Stdby) x x x
Remote Standby (Stdby) x x x
OFF x x x
Remote OFF x x x

If different states are requested at the same time, the following priorities are assigned (in increasing order):

Current operating mode (current mode) Operating mode

after request
Priority COOL HEAT HEAT+COOL
Action 1 Digital input Digital input Digital input configured Remote OFF (§)
configured as ON/OFF configured as as ON/OFF (§)
(§) ON/OFF (§)
2 ON/OFF key enabled ON/OFF key ON/OFF key enabled OFF
(press and hold DOWN enabled (press and hold DOWN
key) (press and hold key)
DOWN key)
3 Digital input Digital input Digital input configured Standby
configured as Standby configured as as Standby
Standby
4 Mode key enabled Mode key enabled NA Mode selected by
(press and hold ESC (press and hold ESC user
key) key) (see mode,
changeover key)
4’ NA NA Mode key enabled Standby
(*) (*)
5 NA NA Select mode (**) (**)
6 NA NA Mode key enabled Mode selected by
(press and hold ESC user
key) (see mode,
changeover key)

(§) In this case the key [local ON/OFF] has no effect on the operating mode

(*) it will not be possible to switch from COOL mode to HEAT mode (HEAT label not visible by pressing and holding ESC
key (Mode, changeover function))

(*) it will not be possible to switch from HEAT mode to COOL mode (COOL label not visible by pressing and holding ESC
key (Mode, changeover function))

Energy Fle
8.1 Automatic changeover
The automatic changeover function is enabled by parameter St01- Enable changeover from analogue input

The Cool/Heat modes are selected by means of two different differentials set by parameter
(St03 - Differential for automatic changeover in Heat for Heat mode, and St04 - Differential for automatic
changeover in Cool for Cool mode; in the neutral zone (between the two setpoints), the mode can be set from a key as
well (if enabled). See the graph below for more details;

8.1.1 Example of automatic changeover based on water temperature

MODE Set COOL Set HEAT

COOL ON

HEAT

T H20
IMG INFO
St04 St03

8.1.2 Example of automatic changeover based on external air temperature

MODE Set COOL Set HEAT

COOL ON

HEAT

Ext Temp.
<IMG INFO>
St04 St03

MODE Operating mode

T H2O Water temperature (*)
Ext. Temp External temperature (*)
COOL SETPOINT Real temperature control setpoint in Cool (**)
HEAT SETPOINT Real temperature control setpoint in Heat (**)
St03 Differential for automatic changeover in Heat
St04 Differential for automatic changeover in Cool

(*) If St01= 1 see parameters St02

(**) The real setpoints may differ from the values of parameters tr10 and tr20 – see Operating modes –
Temperature control (folder PAr/tr)

Note: St04 is added to COOL setpoint; St03 is added to HEAT setpoint.

Note: St03+St04 < HEAT setpoint - COOL setpoint, or the sum of differentials must ever be more than HEAT setpoint -
COOL setpoint
8.2 Operating states table
Operating states and associated functions/algorithms enabled/disabled for each one are listed in the table below.
● Indicates function enabled
Example: The Hot Start function can be enabled ONLY in HEAT mode

Function Cooling Heating Std-By and remote Std- OFF and remote
COOL HEAT By OFF
User interface ● ● ● ● (°)

Temperature controller ● ●

Operating mode selection ● ● ●

Compressor ● ● ●

Internal circuit water pump ● ● ●

Recirculation fan ● ●

External exchanger fan ● ● ●

External circuit water pump ● ● ●

Internal circuit electric heaters ● ● ●

External circuit electric heaters ● ● ●

Auxiliary output ● ● ●

Boiler ● ●

Defrost ●

Dynamic setpoint ● ●

Economy ● ●

Adaptive function ● ●

Antifreeze with heat pump ● ● ●

Hot Start ●

Power limitation ● ●

Record running time ● ● ● ●

Reset manual alarms ● ● ● ●

Manual defrost ●

MFK ● ● ● ●

Alarm log ● ● ● ●

Diagnostics ● ● ● ●

Serial communication ● ● ● ●

(§) In this case the key [local ON/OFF] has no effect on the operating mode
8.3 Reversal valve management
The change of state between chiller and heat pump requires the switching of the reversal valve.
In order to balance the pressure in the circuits, the status of the valve is temporarily inverted whenever the compressors
come to a complete stop, by means of parameter St08
Energy Flex allows you to set the valve switching modes (slow/fast switching) based on the type of system by configuring
parameter St05.
Parameters St06/St07 instead control transition at start and end of defrost.

Parameter Changeover / transition Changeover

St05 Reversal valve switching delay COOL - HEAT
St06 Reversal valve switching from Heat to Defrost delay HEAT – defrost
St07 Reversal valve switching from Defrost to Heat delay Defrost - HEAT
temporary inversion of
St08 Reversal valve activation time for pressure release
valve state

If the switching time St05 is different from zero, the inversion of the valve due to Heat-Cool or Cool-Heat changeover
happens only with compressors switched off (“soft inversion” mode). The compressors are switched off and on according
to set rules and times. It is a prudent mode, but one which ensures the required efficiency and speed.

8.3.1 Changeover from Cool to Heat and vice versa

 The operation is described below – diagrams A…D.

 Operation in defrost is described in the related sections.
 Note that the changeover with St05=0 also occurs with compressors on and the operation is also identical in
defrost (par. St06/St07) and antifreeze with heat pump

Antifreeze with
Diagram Parameter Changeover defrost
heat pump

A St05 different COOL - HEAT // //

B from 0 HEAT - COOL // //
C COOL - HEAT C C
St05 = 0
D HEAT - COOL D D

Diagram A
CP20

CP24 CP23

St05 St05
ON
Compressore 2 Compressore 2
OFF

ON
Compressore 1 Compressore 1
OFF

ON
OFF Valvola Inversione

tempo

Diagram B
CP20

CP24 CP23

St05 St05
ON
Compressore 2 Compressore 2
OFF

ON
Compressore 1 Compressore 1
OFF

ON
OFF Valvola Inversione

tempo

Parameter Description
St05 different from 0 Reversal valve switching delay
CP20 Minimum off/on for same compressor
CP23 Minimum on/on time for same compressor
CP24 Minimum off/off time for different compressors
 Diagram C

ON
Compressore 2
OFF

ON
Compressore 1
OFF

ON
OFF Valvola Inversione

tempo

Diagram D

ON
Compressore 2
OFF

ON
Compressore 1
OFF

ON
OFF Valvola Inversione

tempo

Parameter Description
St05 = 0 Reversal valve switching delay

8.3.2 Changeover from Cool to Antifreeze and vice versa

Diagram Parameter Changeover
E St05 different COOL - ANTIFREEZE
F from 0 ANTIFREEZE - COOL

Diagram E

COOL CP27 CP27 ANTIFREEZE

St05 St05
ON
Compressore 2 Compressore 2
OFF

ON
Compressore 1 Compressore 1
OFF

ON
OFF Valvola Inversione

tempo

Diagram F

ANTIFREEZE CP27 CP27 COOL

St05 St05
ON
Compressore 2 Compressore 2
OFF

ON
Compressore 1 Compressore 1
OFF

ON
OFF Valvola Inversione

<IMG INFO>
tempo

Parameter Description
St05 different from 0 Reversal valve switching delay
CP27 Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost mode
8.3.3 Heat – defrost changeover

Diagram Parameter Changeover

St06 different
G HEAT – defrost
from 0
St07 different
H Defrost - HEAT
from 0

Diagram G
Inizio sbrinamento Inversione Sbrinamento

CP27 St06 St06 CP27

ON
Compressore 2 Compressore 2
OFF

ON
Compressore 1 Compressore 1
OFF

ON
OFF Valvola Inversione

tempo

Diagram H
Fine sbrinamento Sgocciolamento Inversione HEAT

CP27 dF23 St07 St07 CP27

ON
Compressore 2 Compressore 2
OFF

ON
Compressore 1 Compressore 1
OFF

ON
OFF Valvola Inversione

tempo

Parameter Description
St06 different from 0 Reversal valve switching from Heat to Defrost delay
St07 different from 0 Reversal valve switching from Defrost to Heat delay
CP27 Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost mode
dF23 Coil drainage time
8.3.4 Circuit pressure release
If parameter St08 - Reversal valve activation time for pressure release is
set to a value different from zero
none of the other control sequences described above are in progress,
each time the compressors are completely switched off, the reversal valve is temporarily inverted.
This results in improved balance in the circuits and ensures better restart of the compressors themselves

When the time St08 has elapsed, the valve returns to the previous position.

This valve activation only ever occurs with the compressors switched off, so
the bypass times are not triggered for low pressure alarms.
time interval is cancelled with immediate effect if new conditions occur that require the restarting of the compressors and
the immediate resetting of the valve to its previous position.

Diagram

Inversione
temporanea

CP24 St08

ON
Compressore 2
OFF

ON
Compressore 1
OFF

ON
Valvola Inversione ON ON
OFF

ON
OFF OFF

temp
9 COMPRESSORS (FOLDER PAR/CP)

Compressor parameters can be viewed and configured in folder CP (see User Interface and Parameters chapters).
The parameters are:
 CP00, CP01 to define the type and number of compressors in the installation;
 CP03..CP10 to set timings.

The Energy SB600 is able to control “Alternate”, “Scroll” and “Screw” compressors in a range of configurations.
The Energy SB600 controls up to two cooling circuits, with one or two evaporators.
The Energy SB600 can control from one to four power steps, at most two per cooling circuit.
The Energy SB600 is able to manage compressor activation by means of star-delta switching or part winding (up to four
compressors).
The Energy SB600 is able to manage compressor unloading (up to four compressors).
The Energy SB600 is able to manage pump-down (on two refrigerant circuits).

Safety timings can be set for the actuation of compressors and power stages to prevent damage.
Special on/off sequences can be programmed to optimise the use of the available compressors and power.

General conditions of operation

In Off the compressors are switched off immediately and always (even when the safeties are active).
In Stand-by the compressors are normally switched off; during the transition from On to Stand-by, they are switched off in
accordance with their timings. In Stand-by, the compressors are activated in anti-freeze with heat pump mode.

In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with priority over
the principal regulation itself) may occur:

the compressors are switched off immediately in case of compressor shut-down alarms (see alarms table)

9.1 Types of compressor

Compressors may be controlled in a variety of ways according to their number, size and construction.
Parameter CP00 indicates the type of compressor:

Value CP00 Description

0 Non-power stage compressors
1 Alternate power stage compressors
2 Screw power stage compressors

Configuring digital outputs as compressor:

The compressor or compressors, or compressor and its power stage is/are connected to one of the available relay outputs
D01…D04, D06 or to the D05 open collector output, by setting the following parameters:
--> On SB600/SD600/SC600
 CL90…CL95= ±1…±4 for compressor1..4
 CL90…CL95= ±50…±53 for power steps 1…4
--> On SE600
 CE90…CE95= ±1…±4 for compressor1…4
 CE90…CE95= ±50…±53 for power step 1…4

9.1.1 Non-power stage compressors (CP00 = 0)

This is the most simple case, the individual compressor is switched on/off via a single digital output. If more compressors
are present, they can be of the same or a different power rating and switched on according to the power requirements of
the installation.

Compressor without power stage: CP00 = 0.

Note: Set CP03 = 0

Power Compressor
0 Off
100% On

4 Homogeneous compressors without power stage: CP00 = 0

Power Compressor 1 Compressor 2 Compressor 3 Compressor 4

0 Off Off Off Off
25% On Off Off Off
50% On On* Off Off
75% On On* On* Off
100% On On* On* On*

*In this case, the switching on sequence is fixed. This may not always be the case.

Energy Fle
9.1.2 Power stage compressors (CP00 = 1,2)
The construction of these compressors enable them to modulate their power delivery by means of power stage activation.
Each compressor is switched on or off by a single digital output, but other digital outputs control its power stage
depending on the power requirements of the installation.
The compressor is always switched on or off without power stage.

There are two ways in which the power stage is activated: for alternate multi-cylinder compressors, for screw compressors.
In the first case, the power stage is obtained by short circuiting the suction and discharge valves of the cylinders, in screw
compressors by deviating the discharge flow to various positions along the screw.
The actuation logic for the power stage relays is different in each case, see the following table:

Alternate power stage compressors with 3 power stages: CP00 = 1

There are 3 power stages, i.e. the compressor can supply 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% or 100% of its power

Power Compressor Power stage 1 Power stage 2 Power stage 3

0 Off Off Off Off
25% On On On On
50% On On On Off
75% On On Off Off
100% On Off Off Off

Note: The compressor control timings are different from those of the power stages. See Compressor timings for more
details.

Note: note that, with CP00 = 2, the compressor starts (at 25% power) when two relays are actuated at the same time.

9.2 Compressor configuration

the SB600 can control from one to a maximum of four steps on a single circuit, or up to two steps per circuit for a total of
two circuits.
The installation is configured with the parameters:
 CP01 - Number of circuits
 CP02 - Number of compressors per circuit
 CP03 - Number of power stages per compressor.

Multicompressor configurations always use compressors of the same type/construction.

Multicircuit installations always employ symmetrical circuits.

Permitted configurations:

 In the case of non-power stage compressors (CP00 = 0)

CP00 = 0 Non-power stage compressors

(set CP03=0)
CP02 = 1 CP02 = 2 CP02 = 3 CP02 = 4
Compressor 1
Compressor 1
Compressor 1 Compressor 2
CP01 = 1 Compressor 1 Compressor 2
Compressor 2 Compressor 3
Circuits

Compressor 3
Compressor 4
Compressor 1
Compressor 1
Compressor 2
CP01 = 2 Not allowed Not allowed
Compressor 1
Compressor 2
Compressor 2

NOTE: Set CP03=0

 In the case of power stage compressors (CP00 = 1 and 2) with 1 power stage per compressor (CP03 = 1)

CP00 = 1 and 2 Compressors with 1 power stage

CP03 = 1
CP02 = 1 CP02 = 2 CP02 = 3 CP02 = 4
Compr. 1, Step 0
Compr. 1, Step 0 Compr. 1, Step 1
CP01 = 1 Not allowed Not allowed
Compr. 1, Step 1 Compr. 2, Step 0
Circuits

Compr. 2, Step 1
Compr. 1, Step 0
Compr. 1, Step 1
CP01 = 2 Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed
Compr. 2, Step 0
Compr. 2, Step 1

LEGEND: (Compr. = compressor, Step = Step)

  In the case of power stage compressors (Type of compressor CP00 = 1 and 2) with 2 power stages per
compressor (Number of power stages per compressor CP03 = 2)

CP00 = 1 and 2 Compressors with 2 power stages

CP03 = 2
CP02 = 1 CP02 = 2 CP02 = 3 CP02 = 4
Compr. 1, Step 0

Circuits
CP01 = 1 Compr. 1, Step 1 ( Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed
Compr. 1, Step 2

CP01 = 2 Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed

 In the case of power stage compressors (CP00: Type of compressor = 1 and 2) with 3 power stages per
compressor (CP03: Number of power stages per compressor 3 = )

CP00 = 1 and 2 Compressors with 3 power stages

CP03 = 2
CP02 = 1 CP02 = 2 CP02 = 3 CP02 = 4
Compr. 1, Step 0
Compr. 1, Step 1
Circuits

CP01 = 1 Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed

Compr. 1, Step 2
Compr. 1, Step 3

CP01 = 2 Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed

9.3 Compressor timing

Compressor and power stage on/off states must be limited in time, to ensure the mechanical and electrical safety of the
equipment.
The SB600 provides a set of safety parameters for compressors and power stages.
In some cases these parameters are not relevant, as during defrosting, to ensure machine performance. In other cases, the
safety timings may influence or modify the compressor operation logic.

 CP20: Minimum time between switching off/on for a given compressor [Secx10]
 CP21: Minimum time between switching on/on for a given compressor [Secx10]
 CP22: Minimum on time for a compressor [Secx10]
 CP23: Minimum time between switching on/on for different compressors [Sec]
 CP24: Minimum time between switching off/off for different compressors [Sec]
 CP25: Minimum compressor on time for power stage increase [Sec]
 CP26: Minimum compressor on time for power stage decrease [Sec]
 CP27: Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost mode [Sec]

9.3.1 Minimum time between switching off/on for a given compressor

Defined by parameter CP20: Minimum Off-On time for a given compressor . This is the minimum time that must elapse
between one switch-off and the next start-up. This is expressed in seconds x 10 and is active even after a reset.

9.3.2 Minimum time between switching on/on for a given compressor

Defined by parameter CP21: Minimum On-On time for a given compressor. This is the minimum time that must elapse
between one start-up and the next. This is expressed in seconds x 10 and is active even after a reset.

9.3.3 Minimum compressor on time

Parameter CP22: Minimum compressor on time defines the minimum time between a compressor switching on and off
again. It is expressed in seconds x 10.

<IMG INFO>

9.3.4 Minimum time between the switching on of more than one compressor
Parameter CP23: Minimum compressor on/on time for different compressors defines the minimum time between two
compressors switching on. If requested, a compressor can be switched on only after this time has elapsed since the
previous compressor was switched on. This is expressed in seconds and is active even after a reset.
9.3.5 Minimum time between the switching off of more than one compressor
Parameter CP24: Minimum off/off time for different compressors defines the minimum time between two compressors
switching off. If requested, a compressor can be switched off only after this time has elapsed since the previous
compressor was switched off. This is expressed in seconds and is active even after a reset.

9.3.6 Minimum compressor on time for power stage increase

Parameter CP25: Minimum compressor on time for power stage increase defines the minimum time between power stage
increases (steps). It is expressed in seconds.

9.3.7 Minimum compressor switch on time for decrease in power stages

Parameter CP26: Minimum compressor on time for decrease in power stages defines the minimum time between power
stage (step) decreases. It is expressed in seconds.

Note. CP25 and CP26 have priority over CP23 and CP24
 <IMG INFO>

Note. When safety timings overlap, the longest one prevails.

9.3.8 Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost mode

During defrosting and in anti-freeze with heat pump mode, the timings CP23, CP24, CP25 and CP26 are ignored, and
instead parameter CP27: Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost mode is the unique minimum time for
increasing or decreasing a general power stage.
In other words, this safety timing applies to both compressors, power stages and compressors/power stages.
All other safety timings are ignored in this phase. This speeds up the start and end of defrosting, or at least, controls their
duration.

9.3.9 Other timings

Compressors also obey other timings related to the operational status of other services such as water pumps, reversing
valves, etc.
For details, see the chapters dealing with such services.
 9.4 Tandem/trio compressor cycling
The compressors may be run in rotation, using the ‘tandem’ or ‘trio’ strategies.
This requires there to be 2 or 3 compressors on the circuit.
If any of the compressors are off (one or at most two) the aim is to avoid the other compressors running for too long: this
would result in lubrication problems due to the oil migrating away from the inactive compressors towards the active ones,
thus causing problems when the inactive ones are required to start up again.

Enabling conditions
CP04 - Tandem/trio compressor rotation period at least 10 minutes.

Operating conditions for compressor rotation

 CP00 - Compressor type = 0 (non-step type compressors),
 CP01 - Number of circuits = 1 (single circuit)
 CP02 - Number of compressor per circuit = 2 or 3 (two or three compressors enabled to run).
N.B.: Other cases are not considered

Activation
At least one compressor must be active

Operating logic
 If all available compressors are active at a given time, the function has no effect.
 If at least one compressor is inactive and thus available to be activated, after the delay set in CP04 -
Tandem/trio compressor rotation period (at least 10 minutes), the compressor which has been active for
longest is switched off, and another compressor takes its place, in line with the resource selection logic (e.g.
CP13).
The period set in CP04 is set to zero when:
 all compressors are off,
 all available compressors are running (to prevent continuous rotation among the available compressors).

9.5 Star-delta/part-winding activation

Compressors can be started using a star-delta or part-winding procedure

Star-delta or part-winding activation allows for soft-starting and therefore limits current draw
The star-delta configuration requires the assignment of 3 relays per compressor:
--> On SB600/SD600/SC600
 CL90…CL95
--> On SE600
 CE90…CE95

 A “compressor” relay (assignment of one of the relays using value = ±1…±4 for compressor1…4)
 A “star” relay (assignment of one of the remaining relays using value = 38…41)
 A “delta” relay (assignment of one of the remaining relays using value= 34…37)

All times are expressed in tenths of a second

Accuracy is to one tenth of a second.

Star-delta The parameters concerned are:

 CP30 - Star/line delay
 CP31 - Star activation time
 CP32 -Star/delta delay
NOTE: the minimum configurable value for CP30, CP31 and CP32 is 0.5 seconds (1.5 seconds if using SE600 Expansion
module to drive the compressors

Enabling
 CP31 - Star activation time different from 0
 comp 1 L
ON

Part winding

OFF

Tim

comp 1 S
ON

OFF

Tim

comp 1 T
ON

OFF

Tim
CP30 CP31 CP32
1
Enabling
 CP30 - Star activation time = 0
 CP31 - Star activation time different from 0
 CP32 -Star/delta delay = 0

Refer to the following diagram: - example Compressor 1

comp 1 L : Line compressor 1 comp 1 S : Star compressor 1 comp 1 T : Delta compressor 1

Time : Seconds/10
9.6 Start unloading
Enabling
The function is enabled if:

 CP30 - Star activation time = 0

 CP31 - Star activation time different from 0
 CP32 - Star/delta delay = 0
 Digital Outputs – Appropriately configured

9.7 Compressor on/off sequence

9.7.1 Availability of resources

A resource is available if it can be used (switched on/off).

A compressor ( or its power stage, if applicable) is available if

• it is not blocked due to an alarm (see alarms section)
• it is not blocked by safety timings (see compressors section)
• it is not blocked by the configuration (see compressors section)
• it is not blocked by regulation (e.g. block heat pump function, power limitation, etc.)

In checking the availability of resources, the sequence Compressors  Circuits is always followed.

When selecting (actuating/deactivating) resources, one follows the opposite sequence: Circuits  Compressors (selecting
an evaporator selects its circuit).

A circuit is said to be saturated when it is delivering all the power stages available from its compressors. A circuit is said to
be active or on if it has at least one active compressor; it is off if none of its compressors is on. The current activation level
of a particular circuit is defined as the total number of power steps that the compressors are supplying at the time (for
example, a circuit that has 2 compressors with 1 power stage can supply up to 4 activation levels/steps)

A compressor is said to be saturated when it is supplying its maximum number of deliverable steps (for example, a
compressor with 3 power stages can supply at most 4 levels/steps of activation). A compressor is said to be active or on if
it has at least one active step. The current activation level of a particular compressor is defined as the total number of
power steps that it is supplying at the time (for example, a compressor that has 2 power stages can supply up to 3
activation levels/steps)

9.7.2 Managing resources

If the number of active steps satisfies the current request, it is not modified.

If the temperature controller requests to activate/deactivate a step, the availability of the compressors and circuits is first
analysed to control the services on the basis of two logics, that of saturation and that of balancing.
The procedure is to first select the best circuit and then the best compressor in that circuit.

Saturation: The saturation policy attempts to distribute resources equally over the smallest possible number of
services compatible with the constraints imposed by other requirements, for example compressor
safety timings.
The resulting allocation is intended to have the largest possible number of compressors switched of
and circuits deactivated at any one time.

Balancing: The balancing policy attempts to distribute resources equally over the largest possible number of
services compatible with the constraints imposed by other requirements, for example compressor
safety timings.
The resulting allocation is intended to have compressor and circuit output levels equalized as much as
possible (in other words, the smallest number of compressors and circuits off).

There are two parameters which establish circuit (and evaporator) activation as well as activation of the compressors for
each circuit:
 CP10: Circuit balancing enable
 CP11: Compressor balancing enable

Value Description CP10 Description CP11

CP10
CP11
0 Saturation (circuits) Saturation (compressors)
1 Balancing (circuits) Balancing (compressors)
9.7.3 Resource selection criterion
When the two control selections are applied (saturation and balancing), it may happen that one has to choose between
resources which are equally available (for example, when switching on the very first service of all). This selection must
therefore also take into account factors like hours of operation and fixed on/off sequences.
the hours of operation of a circuit is the sum of the hours of operation of its compressors.

Hours of operation: One chooses the circuit or compressor which has the least hours of operation when
switching on, and most hours of operation when switching off. This tends to use all
resources equally.

Fixed sequence: On(1-2-3-4), Off(4-3-2-1)

In this case, the selection of the circuit or compressor follows a fixed sequence (given
availability). This option uses the resources in a fixed manner, which can be useful in case of
steps of different power or when managing secondary backup resources in special
circumstances.

Operating time: This option applies on when there is a single circuit with two compressors (non-power
stage) or two circuits with two compressors each, and uses the compressor resources (in
this case, non-homogeneous) in a manner equalised to the load.
If the effective operating time of the circuit (TE, time between switching the first
compressor on and the last compressor off during the previous cycle) is less than the time
set in the parameter, on the next request from the temperature controller (for that circuit)
the first resource to be activated shall be that with the lowest index (“resource 1”) and then
resource 2; if the effective operating time of the circuit is greater than the time set in the
parameter, on the next request from the temperature controller the first resource to be
activated shall be that with the highest index (“resource 2”) and then resource 1;

There are two parameters which establish circuit and activation as well as activation of the compressors for each circuit:

 CP12: Circuit selection criterion

 CP13: Compressor selection criterion

Value Description CP12 Description CP13

0 Hours balancing Hours balancing
1 Sequence On 1,2; Off 2, 1 Sequence On 1,2,3 and 4; Off 4,3,2
and 1
2 // Operating time

9.7.4 Selecting the circuit/evaporator

Parameter CP10: Enable circuit balancing is only relevant if there are two circuits. If set to 0 (saturation) all the power
steps of a given circuit are first activated, followed by those of the other circuit. If set to 1 (balancing), the power steps are
activated in such a way that both circuits deliver the same power, or the difference is at most one step.
The circuit is selected according to the value of CP12: Circuit selection criterion

CP12 Saturation Balancing

CP10 = 0 CP10 = 1
Hours of operation When switching on, the circuit with least When switching on, the procedure starts
CP12 = 0 hours of operation is selected (with with a step of the circuit with least hours of
compressors available for switching on) up operation (with compressors available for
to saturation, after which the second switching on), this is then balanced with a
circuit is activated. step from the other circuit and so on until
When switching off, teh circuit with least both are saturated.
steps active is selected (with compressors When switching off, the opposite sequence
available for switching off) or (if the same is followed, giving priority to the circuit
number of steps are active on each), that with most hours of operation (with
with the highest number of hours of compressors available for switching off).
operation.
Fixed sequence When switching on, the first circuit is used When switching on, the procedure starts
On(1,2) Off(2,1) up to saturation, after which the second with a step of the first circuit, this is then
CP12 =1 circuit is activated. balanced with a step from the other circuit
When switching off, first all the second and so on until both are saturated.
circuit and then the first circuit is switched When switching off, the opposite sequence
off. is used.
9.7.5 Selecting the compressor or power stage
Parameter CP11: Enable compressor balancing is only relevant if there are 2 power stage compressors in the same circuit
(which for the SB600 remains single, since it cannot control a second one with the same characteristics).
If set to 0 (saturation) all the power steps of one compressor are first activated, followed by those of the other
compressor. If set to 1 (balancing), the power steps are activated in such a way that both compressors deliver the same
power, or the difference is at most one step. The compressor is selected according to the value of CP13: Compressor
selection criterion.
Parameter CP14: Compressor operation time for on sequence is used if the operation time of the previous cycle is used as
the selection criterion.

CP13 Saturation Balancing

CP11 = 0 CP11 = 1
Hours of operation When switching on, the available When switching on, the procedure starts
CP13 = 0 compressor with the least hours of with the first power stage of the
operation is selected until it is saturated, compressor with least hours of operation,
after which the other compressors are then the first stage of the next compressor
selected. until all compressors are operating, then
When switching off, first the available the second stages, etc..
compressor with least power stages active When switching off, the procedure switches
is selected, or (for an equal number of off the power stages of the available
power stages active) the one with the compressors with the same logic, favouring
greater hours of operation. those with the greater hours of operation.
Fixed sequence When switching on, the first compressor is When switching on, the procedure starts
On(1,2,3,4) used up to saturation, after which the with the first power stage of the first
Off(4,3,2,1) second compressor is activated, and so on. compressor, then the first stage of the
CP13 = 1 When switching off, the first to be selected second compressor until all compressors
is that with the highest index, until it is are operating, then the second stages, etc..
completely switched off, and so on. When switching off, the stages are switched
off with the same logic, starting from the
one with the highest index.
Operating time CP11 is irrelevant inasmuch as selection by operating time is not required if there are two
CP13 = 2 power stage compressors in the same circuit.

If the effective operating time of the circuit is less than the time set in parameter CP14, on
the next temperature controller request the sequences On(1,2) and Off(2,1) are used.
In the case of two circuits with two compressors each, the sequences are On(3,4) and
Off(4,3), independently for the two circuits.
Whereas, if the operating time is greater than CP14 the next sequences will be On(2,1)
and Off(1,2).

9.8 Pump-down on start-up and during shutdown

The pump-down system consists of unloading the evaporator before each stoppage of the last compressor in the circuit.
To achieve this aim, it is necessary to have a solenoid valve on the liquid line, which is able to completely intercept the
refrigerant. The solenoid valve is installed before the thermostatic expansion valve and is able to completely stop the flow
of refrigerant.
The solenoid valve is controlled by the Energy Flex, one for each circuit.

Enabling
The function is enabled if the parameter CP33 - Pump-down time during shutdown is different from 0

The digital outputs Circuit 1 pump-down valve and Circuit 2 pump-down valve are used and appropriately configured
Before the last compressor in the circuit is shut down, the solenoid valve is activated (closed). The compressor remains
active until the low pressure digital input in the same circuit becomes active, or for a maximum time equal to CP33 -
Pump-down time during shutdown

The next time that the circuit compressors are requested, the solenoid valve opens and compressor activation begins when
the low pressure digital input is deactivated (if already deactivated, the activation process begins at the same time that the
valve is opened).
Notes:
 If the low pressure digital input does not deactivate, the compressors do not start and the device raises a low
pressure alarm after a delay equal to CP33.
 If an alarm is active, the procedure is ignored and the compressors shut down immediately.
 If the device is OFF, the procedure is ignored and the compressors shut down immediately.
 If the device is in standby mode, the pump-down during shutdown procedure occurs as normal.
During the pump-down phases, the digital and analogue low pressure alarms are ignored, for further details refer to the
corresponding paragraphs.

Notes:
If the value of the parameters St05/St06/St07 is different from 0, the pump-down during shutdown procedure does not
occur:
 when passing from Heat mode to defrost, and on exiting defrost
 when passing to antifreeze with heat pump
 when changing mode
The alarms which deactivate the digital outputs Circuit 1 pump-down valve and Circuit 2 pump-down valve are the same
alarms which deactivate the compressors in the given circuit (in the alarms table no distinction is made between
compressors and valve in the same circuit).
9.9 Exclusion of a circuit or compressor

The following parameters are available for the purpose of maintenance:

CP40 - Activate Compressor 1 disable
CP41 - Activate Compressor 2 disable
CP42 - Activate Compressor 3 disable
CP43 - Activate Compressor 4 disable
in order to disable the use of one or more compressors without stopping the machine.
To disable a circuit it is necessary to disable all the compressors in the same circuit.
NOTE: Disabling the compressor amounts to disabling all of its steps.
Disabling involves:
zero setting of compressor availability
zero setting of all its possible alarms
10 INTERNAL CIRCUIT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/PI)
The SB600 controls one or two hydraulic pumps on the internal exchanger water circuit. Control may be digital or
analogue, and depends on a number of system variables such as temperature controller status, external exchanger fan
speed and internal exchanger water temperature.
For systems with two pumps, these are connected in parallel, and at most one is operational at a time.

Internal circuit water pump parameters can be viewed and configured in folderPI (see User Interface and Parameters
chapters).

The following must be configured:

Digital control
 at least one digital output as internal circuit water pump 1, using the parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if
digital / CL61…CL63 if digital = ±14.
 **at least one digital output as internal circuit water pump 2, using the parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if
digital / CL61…CL63 if digital = ±15.

Analogue control
 at least one analogue output as modulating internal circuit water pump 1, using the parameters CL80-CL81 if
analogue / CL61…CL63 if analogue = ±59.
 **at least one analogue output as modulating internal circuit water pump 2, using the parameters CL80-CL81 if
analogue / CL61…CL63 if analogue = ±60.

** in the case of two pumps

The configurable outputs for digital pump control are relays, whereas in modulating operation they are the internal triac
(for direct control) or the pulse outputs (for external triacs) and the analogue outputs.

10.1 Configuration of internal circuit water pump

Enabling
The controller is enabled by setting parameter (Pi00 -Select internal circuit water pump operating mode) not equal to
0.
Control of the second pump is enabled only if parameter (Pi05 - Maximum internal circuit water pump changeover
start time is not equal to 0.

Table 1

Parameter Description value

0 1 2
on
request
Continuous
Select internal circuit water (pump on
I pump P100 Pump disabled operation (Always
pump operating mode when
ON)
compress
or on)
0 Not equal to 0
after this time (in minutes) the
Maximum internal circuit water active pump is switched off and
II pump PI05 Pump disabled
pump changeover start time replaced by the second pump if
available.

Table 2

value
Parameter Description

0 1
Internal circuit Internal circuit
antifreeze Enable internal circuit water pump on when
PI10 water pump water pump
heater antifreeze heaters active
disabled enabled
Internal circuit Internal circuit
Enable internal circuit water pump start when
Boiler PI11 water pump water pump
boiler active
disabled enabled

General conditions of operation

At any given time, only one of the pumps may be operating, so that we will talk below of "the pump", rather than "the
pumps".

 In Off the internal circuit pump is immediately and always off (even if post-pumping is underway).
 In Standby the internal circuit pump is normally off; during the transition from On to Stand-by, the pump is
switched off in accordance with its timings (e.g. post-pumping). In Standby, the pump is activated in: antilock,
antifreeze with water pump, antifreeze with internal heater, antifreeze with heat pump.
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur:
 In Defrosting the internal circuit pump is always on (at maximum speed if of the modulating type);

Energy Fle
  The pump is forced on (at maximum speed if of the modulating type) if antifreeze with water pump is active,
which is also active in Standby;
 The pump is forced on (at maximum speed if of the modulating type) if antilock is active, which is also active in
Standby;
 The pump is forced on (without delays) if the internal heater is on in integration mode, both to prevent damage
to the exchanger and to ensure that the heat is effectively dispersed/used.
 The pump is forced on (without delays) if Free-Cooling is active, to enable the pre-cooling of water returning
from the circuit;
 The pump be forced on (at maximum speed if of the modulating type) if antifreeze with internal circuit heater is
active, depending on parameter Pi10: Enable internal circuit water pump on when antifreeze heaters active (also
active in Standby);
 The pump may be forced on (without delays and at maximum speed if modulating) if the boiler is active,
depending on parameter Pi11: Enable internal circuit water pump start when boiler active; with Pi11 = 0, if only
the boiler is active and the pump is enabled on request, the pump is normally off;
 The pump is switched off immediately in case of pump block alarm (see alarms table and flow switch
paragraph).

Note: If an automatic reset flow switch alarm occurs, the pump is kept on to allow it to be reset; if the alarm becomes
manual reset, the pump is switched off. If two pumps are present, the indications of the relative paragraph apply.

Note: The minimum pump off/on period is fixed at 10 seconds. This applies to both pumps individually.

10.1.1 Control of the second pump

The system's two pumps are connected in parallel, and at most one is operational at a time.
At each activation request the pump with least operating hours is activated, if available, i.e. if there is no thermal switch
alarm. If it is not available, the other pump is activated.

If the active pump is active for longer than the time given in parameter Pi05 - Maximum internal circuit water pump
changeover start time, it is switched off and the other is turned on (if available, otherwise the timer is set to zero and the
same pump keeps running).
Switch between the pumps is ‘on the fly’ without involving the compressors

10.2 Continuous operation

Case Pi00= 1.

10.2.1.1 Internal circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat

One of the two digital outputs is always active.

10.2.1.2 Internal circuit pump analogue control in Cool / Heat

One of the two analogue outputs is always active and controlled in continuous mode.

The modulating operation of the internal circuit water pump is either active or not depending on the external exchanger
fan speed. In the case of two circuits, we take the average speed of the two fans.

Diagram A Diagram B
COOL HEAT

<IMG INFO>
217,8
124,3
0
2
1,5
-123
-1
<IMG INFO>
226,3
124,3
0
2

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
PI02 Internal circuit water pump pick-up time.
PI30 PI40 Minimum speed internal circuit water pump in Cool / Heat
PI31 PI41 Maximum speed internal circuit water pump in Cool / Heat
PI34 PI44 Fan speed setpoint to modulate internal circuit water pump in Heat
PI35 PI45 Fan speed hysteresis to modulate internal circuit water pump in Heat
Control probe Average external exchanger fan speed
Modulating function in Cool / Heat mode

The internal circuit modulating pumps connected to the analogue outputs are switched on at maximum speed (relative to
the current mode of operation) for a period given in parameter Pi02 - Internal circuit water pump pick-up time.
After this time, the pump is run at the speed requested by the controller.

Diagram C Diagram D
COOL HEAT

<IMG INFO>
<IMG INFO>

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
PI02 Internal circuit water pump pick-up time.
PI30 PI40 Minimum speed internal circuit water pump in Cool / Heat
PI31 PI41 Maximum speed internal circuit water pump in Cool / Heat
PI32 PI42 Minimum internal circuit water pump speed setpoint in Cool/Heat
PI33 PI43 Internal circuit water pump proportional band in Cool / Heat

Control probe Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature

Note: PI30 / PI40 value should ensure pump physical activation in order to avoid fake flow switch alarms
Note The pump runs at minimum speed if the compressors are off.
Note A probe must be configured as Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature and if two probes are so configured,
the average is taken.

10.3 Operation on call

Case Pi00= 2.

10.3.1.1 Internal circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat

One of the two digital outputs is active in parallel with the compressor. The internal circuit pump is activated when the
main temperature controller calls the first step. The compressor starts after the delay given in parameter Pi20: Delay
internal circuit water pump on and compressor on (Pre-pumping). Once the last power stage of the compressor is off, the
pump is switched off after the delay given in Pi21: Delay compressor off - internal circuit water pump off (Post-pumping).

Note: Post-pumping is also observed in standby mode.

10.3.1.2 Internal circuit pump analogue control in Cool / Heat

The two analogue outputs are activated in the same situations in which the digital outputs are activated (with pre / post-
pumping) but allow for analogue control, with modulating operation according to the diagrams in the previous paragraphs
for continuous operation (modulation as a function of the internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature probe value or
the average of the two.

Note In continuous operation the two digital outputs are always active.
In this case, operation on call, analogue control, digital outputs switch off ‘force’ also analogue outputs to switch off.
Modulating operation according to the diagrams in the previous paragraph are still valid only if digital outputs are active
On contrary analogue outputs will run at 0% independently from minimum speed set by parameter

Note. The pump stops with proper delays if alarms occourr which block the termoregulator
The pump runs normally if the compressors are blocked by alarms, with thermoregulator on call.
10.3.1.3 Operation on call: periodic pump activation
The function is enabled of Pi22 is not equal to 0, and allows water to be driven round the circuit at regular intervals for
improved temperature control (the real water temperature in the circuit can always be measured periodically), with
consequent energy savings.

Use parameter Pi22: Maximum pump of time in operation on call to establish a maximum time for the pump to stay off
after which it is forced on (so long as there are no block alarms, and at maximum speed if modulating) for the minimum
time defined in Pi03: Minimum pump on time.

Note: This function is disabled in standby.

Note: The activation of the compressor could also be delayed by other safety timings, this means that the pre-pumping
time could be longer (never shorter).
 10.4 Pump antilock mode
This function prevents any mechanical faults due to extended disuse.

The antilock function is active when:

<IMG INFO>
42,75
29,75
1
2
51
28 35

 enabled by parameter (PI01 - Internal circuit water pump idle time due to antilock > 0). See table 3
 always active, except for OFF (local and remote) and Stdby (local and remote) unless alarms switch off the
pump

If the pump stays off for longer than or equal to Pi01: Internal circuit water pump idle time due to antilock, the controller
forces it on (at maximum speed if modulating) for the time set in parameter Pi03: Minimum pump on time.

Table 3

Antilock Parameter Description Value

0 >0

PI01 Internal circuit water pump idle time due to antilock Function disabled Function enabled

Diagram E PI03 Minimum internal circuit water pump start time Time in seconds x 10

Diagram E Pump antilock

Note: the broken line indicates the second pump, if present

 10.5 Antifreeze operation with pump
The antifreeze function runs when:
<IMG INFO>
enabled by parameter Pi50 -Select probe for internal circuit + water pump antifreeze.
 See table 4
42,75
29,75
1
2
45,9
11 6

 always active, except for OFF (local and remote) unless alarms switch off the pump

Table 4 - Pi50

Value Probe
0 No probe (pump in antifreeze disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Internal exchanger water outlet temperature circuit 1
4 Internal exchanger water outlet temperature circuit 2
5 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature
6 External temperature

Diagram F Antifreeze operation with pump

<IMG INFO>

Parameter Description
PI51 Internal circuit water pump regulator setpoint for antifreeze
PI52 Internal circuit water pump regulator hysteresis for antifreeze
Control probe
Select probe for internal circuit + water pump antifreeze
Pi50

Note. If the probe selected for antifreeze with the internal circuit pump is in error, the machine is blocked.
11 RECIRCULATION FAN (FOLDER PAR/FI)

The recirculation fan parameters are visible and can be set up in folder FI (see User Interface and Parameters chapters).

The following must be configured:

 at least one digital output as recirculation fan using parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if digital /
CL61…CL63 if digital = ±18.

Enabling
The controller is enabled by setting parameter (Fi00 -Select recirculation fan operation) not equal to 0.

Table 1 - Parameter Fi00

Parameter Description value

0 1 2
Recirculation fan
Select Recirculation fan
Recirculation fan operation on
Enabling Fi00 recirculation fan continuous
disabled temperature
operation operation
controller call

General conditions of operation

 In Off the recirculation fan is immediately off (even when post-ventilation in underway).
 In Standby teh fan is off, in accordance with established timings (e.g. post-ventilation)
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur:
 In defrost, the recirculation fan is off (as per parameter Fi03: Post-ventilation time in Heat mode);
 if at least one of the internal exchanger heaters is on, the fan is forced on (absolute priority); after the last
heater has been turned off, parameter Fi03: Post-ventilation time in Heat mode applies;
 if alarm Er30: Internal circuit antifreeze alarm, is active, the fan is forced on;
 the recirculation fan is immediately switched off in case of a blocking alarm (see alarms table)

11.1.1 Continuous operation

Case Fi00 = 1.
The digital output recirculation fan, is always on except in the conditions specified in the general conditions of operation
section.

11.1.2 Operation on call

Case Fi00 = 2.
Activation of the recirculation fan depends on the status of the compressors (not of the compressor temperature
controller), of the temperature measured by the internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature probe, and the real
temperature controller setpoint (Heat or Cool).
The fan is switched on only is at least one compressor is running and the exchanger inlet air temperature is adequate.

Note. if the Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature is in error (or has not been configured), recirculation fan
activation depends exclusively on the compressor status.

Energy Fle
11.1.2.1 Recirculation fan in Heating / Cooling

Control is dependent on the real setpoint as shown

Diagram A Diagram B
COOLING HEATING

<IMG INFO>
<IMG INFO>

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
Fi01 Fi02 Recirculation fan hysteresis in Cool / Heat
Setpoint Real setpoint in Cool / Heat
Control probe Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature

11.2 Post-ventilation
In Heat mode, the fan is switched off after a delay set in parameter Fi03: Post-ventilation time in Heat mode after the
internal circuit integration heaters have been switched off.
This post-ventilation time allows for the heat generated by the heaters to disperse, thus preventing damage or fire.
12 EXTERNAL EXCHANGER FAN (FOLDER PAR/FE)
The SB600 controls (via digital outputs) the ventilation of the air condensation units of the two chiller/heat pump
temperature control circuits.
Alternatively, it can control ventilation in a modulating mode, via analogue outputs.

The configurable outputs for digital pump control are relays, whereas in modulating operation they are the internal triac
(for direct control) or the pulse outputs and the analogue outputs (indirect control).

External exchanger fan parameters can be viewed and configured in folder FE (see User Interface and Parameters sections).

The following need to be appropriately configured:

 at least one digital output as external exchanger fan with parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if digital /
CL61…CL63 if digital = ±19 (circuit 1)/ ±20 (circuit 2).

Enabling
The controller is enabled by setting parameter FE00 - External exchanger fan mode selection not equal to 0

Table 1 – Parameter FE00

Parameter Description Value

0 1 2
Operation
Continuous on call (ON
External exchanger fan mode Ventilation
Enabling FE00 operation (Always when
selection disabled
ON) compressor
ON)

General conditions of operation

 In Off the fans are switched off immediately and always (even when the cut-off bypass is active).
 In Stand-by the fans are normally switched OFF; during the transition from On to Standby, the fans are switched
off in accordance with their timings (e.g. bypass on cut-off in progress).
NOTE: if switched on, the compressor steps in the specific circuit remain on (compressor safety).
 In On, in addition to the main control specified in subsequent paragraphs, the following situations are also
possible (with priority given to the main control itself):
 In Defrost the behaviour of the fans is governed by FE11: Enable external exchanger fan on in defrost (see
below for details);
 in the Recovery phase, the fans associated with the circuit in recovery are forced off. In particular, the fans
are switched off as soon as the phase-splitting of compressors in the given circuit finishes (or, if the
compressors were initially off, as soon as the recovery valve of the specific circuit is switched on), and
remain off until the recovery is switched off (recovery valve switch-off) in the specific circuit.
 the external exchanger fans are switched off immediately in case of fan shut-down alarms (see alarms
table).

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
FE30 FE50 Minimum speed external exchanger fan in Cool / Heat
FE31 FE51 Average speed external exchanger fan in Cool / Heat
FE32 FE52 Maximum speed external exchanger fan in Cool / Heat
Setpoint Real setpoint in Cool / Heat

External exchanger fan on pick-up

The external exchanger modulating fans connected to the analogue outputs are switched on at maximum speed (relative
to the current mode of operation) for a period given in parameter FE01: External exchanger fan pick-up time. After this
time, the pump is run at the speed requested by the controller.

External exchanger fan control input

Control is achieved with the value of the analogue input configured with parameters FE33: Select probe for external
exchanger fan regulation in Cool and FE53: Select probe for external exchanger fan regulation in Heat.

Parameters table FE33 and FE53

Value Description Control

0 No probe On or On/Off
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
3 Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2) Inverse
4 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
5 Internal exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) Inverse

If the plant has two circuits, the fans on the two external exchangers are controlled independently, on separate probes:
both circuits must have analogue inputs configured for this purpose.
If not, ventilation will always be active.

Energy Fle
 Analogue inputs for ventilation control

Description UM
External exchanger temperature circuit 1 °C
External exchanger temperature circuit 2 °C
High pressure input circuit 1 Bar
High pressure input circuit 2 Bar
Low pressure input circuit 1 Bar
Low pressure input circuit 2 Bar
External exchanger pressure circuit 1 Bar
External exchanger pressure circuit 2 Bar
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1 Bar
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 2 Bar

12.1.1 Continuous operation

Case FE00 = 1.
Control is achieved, independently of the state of the compressors, with the value of the analogue input configured for
control.
The parameter FE21- External exchanger fan preventilation time must be set to 0.

12.1.1.1 External exchanger fan digital control in Cool / Heat

Diagram A Diagram B
COOLING HEATING
Analogue input control

External exchanger temperature Low pressure input External exchanger temperature High pressure input
High pressure input Internal exchanger pressure Low pressure input Internal exchanger pressure
External exchanger pressure External exchanger pressure

Regolazione diretta Regolazione inversa

Regolazione diretta Regolazione inversa
ventilatore ventilatore
FE34 FE34 ventilatore ventilatore
scambiatore scambiatore FE54 FE54
FE38 FE38 scambiatore scambiatore
a perdere a perdere FE58 FE58
ON ON a perdere a perdere
ON ON

OFF OFF
OFF OFF
FE39 sonda FE33 FE39
sonda FE33 FE59 FE59
sonda FE53 sonda FE53

IMG INFO

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
Control probe
Select external exchanger fan control probe in Cool / Heat
FE33 FE53
Minimum external exchanger fan speed setpoint
FE34 FE54 in Cool / Heat
External exchanger fan cut-off hysteresis
FE38 FE58 in Cool / Heat
FE39 FE59 External exchanger fan cut-off differential
12.1.1.2 External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool / Heat

Analogue input control: Analogue input control:

External exchanger temperature Low pressure input
High pressure input Internal exchanger pressure
External exchanger pressure circuit

COOL

Regolazione diretta Regolazione inversa

FE37 FE37

FE32 Max FE32 Max

FE31 Silent FE31 Silent

FE34 FE34
FE38 FE38

FE30 Min FE30 Min

OFF OFF
sonda FE33 sonda FE33
FE36 FE36
FE39 FE35 FE35 FE39

Analogue input control: Analogue input control:

External exchanger temperature High pressure input
Low pressure input Internal exchanger pressure
External exchanger pressure circuit

HEAT

Regolazione diretta Regolazione inversa

FE57 FE57
FE52 Max FE52 Max

FE51 Silent FE51 Silent

FE54 FE54
FE58 FE58
FE50 Min FE50 Min

OFF OFF
sonda FE53 sonda FE53
FE56 FE56
FE55 FE59 FE59 FE55
IMG INFO

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
Control probe
Select external exchanger fan control probe in Cool / Heat
FE33 FE53
Minimum external exchanger fan speed setpoint
FE34 FE54 in Cool / Heat
FE35 FE55 Maximum external exchanger fan speed differential in Cool / Heat
External exchanger fan cut-off hysteresis
FE38 FE58 in Cool / Heat
FE39 FE59 External exchanger fan cut-off differential
12.1.2 Operation in response to request
Case FE00 = 2.
Control is achieved with the value of the analogue input configured for control and as a function of the compressor status

Note: If an analogue input is not configured or if the configured analogue input is in error, ventilation is activated only on
the basis of the compressor status (at maximum speed if modulating).

12.1.2.1 External exchanger fan digital control in Cool / Heat

External exchanger fan control is activated at the moment in which the main temperature controller calls the first step of
the temperature control circuit (to which the external exchanger belongs).

In Heat the compressor, if possible, also starts immediately (no preventilation running).

The compressor (only in Cool mode) starts after the delay given in parameter FE21: External exchanger fan preventilation
time
Note: activation of the compressor may also be delayed by the intervention of other safety times.
Preventilation is not provided in Heat mode.

Furthermore, the digital outputs are controlled by parameter FE34: Setpoint for external exchanger fan minimum speed in
Cool as for continuous operation, with the following exception: after the compressor is activated (e.g. the first compressor
or the first power step in the specific circuit), for the time indicated by parameter FE20: Bypass time for external exchanger
fan cut-off the fans are forced on even if the controller is requesting cut-off.

Preventilation is used in Cool to prevent high temperatures on the exchanger when the compressor is switched on.
The cut-off bypass prevents extreme temperatures on the exchanger.

Note: if there are alarms blocking the compressors, external exchanger fan control remains active even with the
compressors off

Note: The activation of the compressor could also be delayed by other safety timings, this means that the preventilation
time could be longer (never shorter).
 COOL

Gradino 2 Termoregolatore principale - Circuito 2

Gradino 1
Termoregolatore principale - Circuito 1
OFF

CIRCUITO DI TERMOREGOLAZIONE 1
ON
Ventilatore scambiatore a perdere Circuito 1
OFF

ON
Compressore Circtuito 1
OFF

CIRCUITO DI TERMOREGOLAZIONE 2
ON
Ventilatore scambiatore a perdere Circuito 2
OFF

ON
Compressore Circuito 2
OFF
tempo

FE21 FE20 FE21 FE20

Pre-Ventilazione By-Pass su Pre-Ventilazione By-Pass su
<IMG INFO>
in Cool cut-off in Cool cut-off

HEAT

Gradino 2 Termoregolatore principale - Circuito 2

Gradino 1
Termoregolatore principale - Circuito 1
OFF

CIRCUITO DI TERMOREGOLAZIONE 1
ON
Ventilatore scambiatore a perdere Circuito 1
OFF

ON
Compressore Circtuito 1
OFF
tempo

CIRCUITO DI TERMOREGOLAZIONE 2
ON
Ventilatore scambiatore a perdere Circuito 2
OFF

ON
Compressore Circuito 2
OFF
tempo

FE20 FE20
By-Pass su By-Pass su
<IMG INFO>
cut-off cut-off

Note: if there are alarms blocking the compressors, external exchanger fan control remains active even with the
compressors off.
12.1.2.2 External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool
The analogue outputs are activated exactly as the respective digital outputs (with pre-ventilation and cut-off bypass) and
are modulated, except for the cut-off bypass period (where the fans are activated at minimum speed if the controller
requests cut-off), according to parameter FE34: External exchanger fan minimum speed setpoint in Cool as for continuous
operation.
If there is no request for steps the fan is normally off.

12.1.2.3 External exchanger fan analogue control in Heat

The analogue outputs are activated exactly as the respective digital outputs (with cut-off bypass) and are modulated,
except for the cut-off bypass period (where the fans are activated at minimum speed if the controller requests cut-off),
according to parameter FE54: External exchanger fan minimum speed setpoint in Heat as for continuous operation.
If there is no request for steps the fan is normally off.

12.2 Fan control in defrost

Fan activation in defrost mode is useful because pressure at the external exchanger can reach alarm levels if the exchanger
is not totally de-iced. To prevent a high pressure alarm in this situation, the fans are run (at minimum speed if
modulating).

The behaviour of the external exchanger fan during defrost is determined by FE11: Enable external exchanger fan on in
defrost, except for the coil drainage phase, in which the fans run at maximum speed.
If the machine has two temperature control circuits, the status of the fan is dependent on the defrost condition of its
respective circuit.
On completion of defrosting the fan resumes operation as requested by its controller.

 If FE11 = 0, the fan is forced off throughout defrosting.

 If FE11 = 1, the fan is off or on at minimum speed (digital output active) depending on the analogue input
configured for control of the fan in defrost and parameter FE12: External exchanger fan on setpoint in defrost in
the following way:

ventilatore
scambiatore Set Point
primario FE12

ON/Minima

OFF
Sonda FE14
FE13

FE12: External exchanger fan on setpoint in defrost

FE13: External exchanger fan on hysteresis in defrost
FE14: Select probe for external exchanger fan regulation in defrost

Parameter table FE14

Value Description
FE14
0 No probe
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2)
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
3 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2)

Note: if there are two temperature control circuits, each must have a probe configured for this purpose. If no analogue
input is configured or if the configured input is in error, ventilation is always at minimum during defrost (maximum in coil
drainage).

Note: at the end of defrost, the fans are switched on (at maximum speed if modulating) for the time set in parameter
dF23: Coil drainage time, before the reversing valve switches.
12.3 Fan control with single condensation
Parameter FE10: Enable single condensation configures 2 circuit machines with single condensation.

 If FE10 = 0 the two fans are independent and depend on the condensation pressure/temperature and the state
of the compressors on the individual circuits.
 If FE10 = 1 the 2 (in reality 2 digital and 2 analogue) external exchanger fan outputs operate in parallel at the
maximum output value of the two controllers for the two circuits.

12.4 Ventilation control in Free-Cooling

If (internal) FreeCooling is active, the external exchanger fans will be controlled on the basis of the indications given in the
FreeCooling section.
See FreeCooling section (folder PAr/FC)
13 EXTERNAL CIRCUIT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/PE)
The SB600 device controls one or two hydraulic pumps on the external exchanger water circuit. Control may be digital or
analogue, and depends on a number of system variables such as temperature controller status and external exchanger
water temperature.
For systems with two pumps, these are connected in parallel, and at most one is operational at a time.

External circuit water pump parameters can be viewed and configured in folder PE (see User Interface and Parameters
sections).

The following need to be appropriately configured:

Digital control
 at least one digital output as external circuit water pump 1, using the parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if
digital / CL61…CL63 if digital = ±16.
 **at least one digital output as external circuit water pump 2, using the parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if
digital / CL61…CL63 if digital = ±17

Analogue control
 at least one analogue output as modulating external circuit water pump 1, using the parameters CL80-CL81 if
analogue / CL61…CL63 if analogue = ±62.
 at least one analogue output as modulating external circuit water pump 2, using the parameters CL80-CL81 if
analogue / CL61…CL63 if analogue = ±63.

Mixed control
1. pump activation via analogue outputs + digital outputs configured and wired in series to the actuator
2. pump activation via digital outputs and one analogue output used to control a valve that regulates the flow rate;
in the case of a double pump, the analogue output that commands the valve must be actuated at the same time
as the logical switch-on OR of the two digital outputs

Double circuit
If two circuits are present, there are two external exchangers but the pump is shared
Note: in the case of analogue control, the control probe becomes
 the maximum of the two probes T1 and T2 in COOL
 the minimum of the two probes T1 and T2 in HEAT:

** when there are two pumps.

The configurable outputs for digital pump control are relays, whereas in modulating operation they are the internal triac
(for direct control) or the pulse outputs (for external triacs) and the analogue outputs.

Digital Analogue
Mixed
1
1 1

Analogue
1

1
T1
Digital 2

2
T2

IMG INFO
1 circuit 2 circuits

Energy Fle
13.1 Configuration of external circuit water pump
Enabling
The controller is enabled by setting parameter (PE00 -External circuit water pump mode selection) to a value other
than 0.
Control of the second pump is enabled only if parameter (PE05 - Maximum external circuit water pump changeover
start time) is not equal to 0.

Table 1

Parameter Description Value

0 1 2 3
External circuit Continuous on request Operation
I Pump
PE00 water pump operation (pump on when in
heat Disabled
mode selection (Always ON) compressor on) Recovery
0 Not equal to 0
Maximum external circuit after this time (in minutes) the active pump is
II Pump
PE05 water pump switched off and replaced by the second pump
pump Disabled
changeover start time if available

General conditions of operation

At any given time, only one of the pumps may be operating, so that we will talk below of "the pump", rather than "the
pumps".

 In Off the external circuit pump is immediately and always off (even if post-pumping is underway).
 In Stand-by the external circuit pump is normally off; during the transition from On to Stand-by, the pump is
switched off in accordance with its timings (e.g. post-pumping). In Stand-by, the pump is activated in: anti-lock,
antifreeze with water pump, antifreeze with external heaters, antifreeze with heat pump.
 In On, in addition to the main control specified in subsequent paragraphs, the following situations are also
possible (with priority given to the main control itself):
 The pump is forced on (at maximum speed if of the modulating type) if antifreeze with water pump is
active, which is also active in Stand-by;
 The pump is forced on (at maximum speed if of the modulating type) if anti-lock is active, which is also
active in Stand-by;
 The pump is switched off immediately in case of pump block alarm (see alarms table and flow switch
paragraph)

Note: If an automatic reset flow switch alarm occurs, the pump is kept on to allow it to be reset; if the alarm becomes
manual reset, the pump is switched off. If two pumps are present, the indications of the relative paragraph apply.

If PE00 - External circuit water pump mode selection = 3 the pump is ON only if Recovery is enabled and the device is
in Cool mode.
In either case PE00 = 1 and PE00 = 3, with Recovery enabled, the only change in behaviour occurs in Heat mode, in fact in
the first case the pump is normally ON, in the second it is normally OFF (in Heat mode, Recovery is not possible).

Note: The minimum time between the pump switching off then switching back on again is fixed and set at 10 seconds. This
applies to both pumps individually.

13.1.1 Control of the second pump

The system's two pumps are connected in parallel, and at most one is operational at a time.
At each activation request the pump with least operating hours is activated, if available, i.e. if there is no thermal switch
alarm.
If it is not available, the other pump is activated.

If the active pump is active for longer than the time given in parameter PE05 - Maximum external circuit water pump
changeover start time, it is switched off and the other is turned on (if available, otherwise the timer is set to zero and the
same pump keeps running).
Switch between the pumps is ‘on the fly’ without involving the compressors

13.2 Continuous operation

Case PE00 = 1.

13.2.1.1 External circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat

One of the two digital outputs is always active.

13.2.1.2 External circuit pump analogue control in Cool / Heat

One of the two analogue outputs is always active and controlled in continuous mode.
Modulating function in Cool / Heat mode

Analogue inputs for modulating control of the external circuit pumps

Description UM
External exchanger temperature circuit 1 °C
External exchanger temperature circuit 2 °C
High pressure input circuit 1 Bar
High pressure input circuit 2 Bar
Low pressure input circuit 1 Bar
Low pressure input circuit 2 Bar
External exchanger pressure circuit 1 Bar
External exchanger pressure circuit 2 Bar
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1 Bar
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 2 Bar

The operating speed of the external circuit water pump in modulating mode depends on the probe selected with
parameter:

Cool
PE36 - Select probe for external exchanger pump regulation in Cool

Heat
PE46 - Select probe for external exchanger pump regulation in Heat

Table PE36 and PE46

Value Description UM Control

0 No probe - On or On/Off
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2) °C Direct
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2) Bar Direct
3 Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2) Bar Inverse
4 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) Bar Direct
5 Internal exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) Bar Inverse

Diagram C Diagram D
COOL HEAT
Velocita’ PE32 Velocita’ PE42
pompa pompa
a perdere a perdere

PE31 Max PE41 Max

PE30 Min PE40 Min

PE33 PE46 oppure PE43 PE36 oppure

con PE33>0 min(T1, T2) con PE43>0 MAX (T1, T2)
Velocita’ Velocita’
pompa pompa
a perdere a perdere

PE31 Max PE41 Max

PE30 Min PE40 Min

PE33 PE46 oppure PE33 PE36 oppure

con PE33>0 min(T1, T2) con PE43>0 MAX (T1, T2)
<IMG INFO> <IMG INFO>

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
PE02 External circuit water pump pick-up time.
PE30 PE40 Minimum external circuit water pump speed in Cool / Heat
PE31 PE41 Maximum external circuit water pump speed in Cool / Heat
PE32 PE42 Minimum external circuit water pump speed setpoint in Cool / Heat
PE33 PE43 External circuit water pump proportional band in Cool / Heat
Control probe
PE36 PE46 Select probe for external exchanger pump regulation in Cool / Heat

Note: PE30 / PE40 value should ensure pump physical activation in order to avoid fake flow switch alarms
Note: The pump runs at minimum speed if the compressors are off.
Note: If the plant has two circuits, there is nevertheless only one external pump; if the two circuits each have one pump
probe configured, the modulating control is performed respectively considering the following:
 In COOL mode: the maximum value of the two probes
 In HEAT mode: the minimum value of the two probes
13.3 Operation in response to request
Case PE00 = 2.

13.3.1.1 External exchanger pump digital control in Cool and Heat

One of the two digital outputs is active in parallel with the compressor. The external circuit pump is activated when the
main temperature controller calls the first step. The compressor starts after the delay given in parameter PE20: External
circuit pump switch-on - compressor switch-on delay (Pre-pumping). Once the last power stage of the compressor is off,
the pump is switched off after the delay given in PE21: Compressor switch-off - external circuit pump switch-off delay (Post-
pumping).

Note: Post-pumping is also observed in stand-by mode.

13.3.1.2 External exchanger pump analogue control in Cool and Heat

The two analogue outputs are activated in the same situations in which the digital outputs are activated (with pre / post-
pumping) but allow for analogue control, with modulating operation according to the diagrams in the previous paragraphs
for continuous operation

Note In continuous operation the two digital outputs are always active.
In this case, operation on call, analogue control, digital outputs switch off ‘force’ also analogue outputs to switch off.
Modulating operation according to the diagrams in the previous paragraph are still valid only if digital outputs are active
On contrary analogue outputs will run at 0% independently from minimum speed set by parameter

Note. The pump stops with proper delays if alarms occourr which block the termoregulator
The pump runs normally if the compressors are blocked by alarms, with thermoregulator on call.

13.3.1.3 Operation on call: periodic pump activation

The function is enabled if PE22 is not equal to 0, and allows water to be driven round the circuit at regular intervals for
improved temperature control (the real water temperature in the circuit can always be measured periodically), with
consequent energy savings.

Use parameter PE22: Maximum pump off time in operation on call to establish a maximum time for the pump to stay off
after which it is forced on (so long as there are no shutdown alarms, and at maximum speed if modulating) for the
minimum time defined in PE03: Minimum pump on time.

Gradino 1
Termoregolatore principale
OFF

ON
Pompa circuito a perdere
OFF

ON
Compressore 1
OFF
PE20 PE21 PE22 PE03 tempo
Pre-Pompaggio Post-Pompaggio Burst

Note: this function is disabled in stand-by

Note: the activation of the compressor could also be delayed by other safety timings, this means that the pre-pumping
time could be longer (never shorter).
 13.4 Pump anti-lock (anti-sticking) mode
This function prevents any mechanical faults when the pump has been idle for an extended period.

The anti-lock function is activated when:

<IMG INFO>
42,75
29,75
1
2
51
28 35

 It has been enabled via parameter (PE01 - External circuit water pump idle time due to anti-lock > 0). See Table
3
 It is always active except when OFF (local and remote) and on Stand-by (local and remote) unless an alarm
switches off the pump

If the pump is off for a time equal to or greater than the value in parameter PE01: External circuit water pump idle time
due to anti-lock, the controller forces it on (at maximum speed if modulating) for the time set in parameter PE03:
Minimum pump on time.

Table 3

Value
Anti-lock Parameter Description

0 >0

PE01 External circuit water pump idle time due to anti-lock Function disabled Function enabled
External circuit pump minimum ON time
Diagram E PE03 Time in seconds x 10

Diagram E Pump anti-lock

Gradino 1
OFF

ON
Pompa circuito a perdere
OFF
PE01 PE03 PE01 tempo
Burst

Note: the broken line indicates the second pump, if present

<IMG INFO>
42,75
29,75
1
2
51
28 35

13.5 Antifreeze operation with pump

The antifreeze function runs when:
enabled by parameter PE50 -Select probe for external circuit + water pump antifreeze,
 See Table 4
 It is always active except when OFF (local and remote) and on Stand-by (local and remote) unless an alarm
switches off the pump

Table 4 - PE50

Value Probe
0 No probe (pump in antifreeze disabled)
1 External exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 External exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Circuit 1 external exchanger water outlet temperature
4 Circuit 2 external exchanger water outlet temperature
5 Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger water outlet minimum temperature
6 External temperature

Diagram F Antifreeze operation with pump

Pompa
a perdere
PE51

ON

OFF
Ingresso analogico
PE52 PE50
<IMG INFO>
400,45
227,45
0
2
0,05
0
-1

Parameter Description
PE51 External circuit water pump setpoint control for antifreeze
PE52 External circuit water pump hysteresis control for antifreeze
Control probe
Select probe for external circuit + water pump antifreeze
PE50

Note: If the probe selected for antifreeze with the external circuit pump is in error, the machine is shut down.
14 INTERNAL EXCHANGER ELECTRIC HEATERS (FOLDER PAR/HI)
The SB600 controls internal exchanger heaters 1 and 2, which act both for the antifreeze function (typically in machines
with water-type internal exchanger) and integration for the heat pump/heating function (air and water).

Parameters for internal circuit exchanger heaters can be viewed and configured in folder HI: Internal exchanger electric
heater parameters (see User Interface and Parameters chapters).

Antifreeze/integrated use heaters should be connected to a relay output (°) DO1..D04, D06 (see).
 They are active only when the relative parameter enabling them HI00, HI02=1 (see table)

(°) The heater control outputs are all and exclusively those outputs with ON/OFF control.
The heaters can be used in a variety of ways depending on the type of system. We can have one or two internal
exchangers and one or two circuits.

In the case of a single exchanger with single/double circuit: in antifreeze, defrost and integration the heaters are controlled
in equivalent mode.

In the case of a double exchanger with double circuit: in antifreeze and defrost the two heaters are controlled differently,
depending on the variables of the circuit in question; in integration they are controlled equivalently.

For greatest configurability:

 the number of antifreeze heaters and integration heaters can be set independently;
 the control analogue input can be determined individually.
 The heaters (1 or 2) can be used only for antifreeze, only for integration/heating, or for both functions at the
same time.

value
heaters Parameter Description
0 1
Antifreeze Enable internal exchanger heater regulator in
HI00 Heaters disabled Heaters enabled
(Standby) standby for antifreeze
See Heaters in
HI01 Enable force heaters on during defrost See parameters table Hi01
defrost
paragraph
Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger +
Antifreeze HI10 heater 1
See Parameters table Hi10 and Hi11
Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger +
Antifreeze HI11 heater 2

Enable integrated use of internal exchanger heaters See parameters table Hi20
integrated use HI20

14.1 Internal antifreeze heater

Enabling
The internal exchanger antifreeze heaters are enabled with parameters
 HI10 - Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 1
 HI11 - Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 2

General conditions of operation

 In Off the internal exchanger antifreeze heaters are immediately and always off.
 In Standby the internal exchanger antifreeze heaters are active if so configured with ( Hi00 -Enable internal
exchanger antifreeze heaters in Stand-By).
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur:
 In Defrost the internal circuit heaters are controlled by parameter Hi01: Enable force heaters on during
defrost. See dedicated paragraph
 The internal circuit heaters are immediately turned off during heater block alarms (see alarms table).

Note: There are no safety times for heater on/off.

Energy Fle
14.1.1 Internal circuit antifreeze heater control

<IMG INFO>

Parameter Parameter
Hi10 Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 1
Control probe
Hi11 Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 2
Hi12 Internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Setpoint Hi13 Maximum internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Hi14 Minimum internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Hysteresis Hi15 Internal exchanger heater regulator hysteresis for antifreeze

Parameters table Hi10 and Hi11

Value H110 / Hi11 Probe

0 No probe (antifreeze heater disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Internal exchanger water outlet temperature circuit 1
4 Internal exchanger water outlet temperature circuit 2
5 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature

Note: depending on settings, the heaters can be turned on together (using the same probe) or separately (using different
probes).

Note: In case of control probe error, the machine is blocked.

14.2 Configuration of integration heaters
Enabling
Use parameter Hi20 Select heater mode in integration mode to activate the heaters in integration mode controller.
Either 1 or 2 heaters will be controlled, depending on the value of Hi26: Differential setpoint internal exchanger heater 2
on in integrated use: 1 heater if Hi26 = 0, 2 heaters if Hi26  0.

General conditions of operation

 InOff the integration heaters are switched off immediately and always.
 In Stand-by the integration heaters are switched off immediately and always (note that since there are two
controllers on the same heaters, the same heaters may stay on in Standby if so required by the antifreeze heater
controller).
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur:
 In Defrost the internal circuit heaters are controlled by parameter Hi01 Enable force heaters on during defrost.
See dedicated paragraph

The internal circuit heaters are immediately turned off during heater block alarms.

Operating modes
Integration heaters are turned on only in Heat mode; the regulation of the setpoint is obtained by subtracting a differential
from the real Heat setpoint.
This differential can be calculated in a variety of ways by configuring parameter Hi20: Select heater mode for internal
exchanger in integration mode.

Parameter table Hi20

Value Hi20 Description

0 Integration heaters disabled
1 Integration heaters with setpoint differential proportional to external temperature
2 Integration heaters with setpoint differential in steps on external temperature
3 Integration heaters with setpoint differential fixed

14.2.1 Integration heater differential

The integration heater regulation setpoint is calculated by subtracting a differential from the real Heat setpoint.
Integration heater setpoint = real Heat setpoint - integration heater differential
The integration heater differential is calculated in a variety of ways: proportional, step or fixed.

Note: When the heat pump is blocked, the differential for heaters in integrated use will be forced to a fixed value equal to
Hi23: Heater differential in integration mode with heat pump lock. This serves to better control the power steps of the
integration heaters in special circumstances.

Integration heaters with differential setpoint proportional to external temperature

Case H20= 1.

<IMG INFO>
425,25
163,2
0
2

Parameter Parameter
External temperature
//
Control probe
Setpoint Hi21 Internal exchanger heater dynamic differential setpoint in integrated use
Hi22 Maximum dynamic differential internal exchanger heaters in integrated use
Internal exchanger heater dynamic differential proportional band in integrated
Hi24 use
Hysteresis //
Integration heaters with differential in steps on external temperature
Case H20= 2.

Integration heater differential fixed, independent of external temperature

Case Hi20= 3.

Note: In case of error or lack of configuration of the external probe, the differential value is set to Hi22 or Hi23 (both
fixed) depending on circumstances.
14.2.2 Integration heater regulation
Regulation uses the integration heater setpoint calculated with the integration heater differential as explained in the
preceding paragraph. By a step is meant the activation of internal exchanger heater 1 or 2.
The analogue input used for regulation is the main temperature controller probe for Heat mode.

Depending on the value of Hi26: Setpoint differential for activation of internal exchanger heater 2 in integration mode you
can determine whether to activate heater 2 in integration or not.

Note: if you want to activate the two heating elements at the same time (using two outputs to keep the thermal switches
separate), simply give Hi26 a small value, but still non-zero and greater than the hysteresis Hi25 (the hysteresis may not be
greater than the value of the differential, otherwise value of the hysteresis used in control will coincide with that of the
differential).

With Hi26 not equal to 0

With Hi26 = 0

Parameter Parameter
Control probe
tr03 Select temperature control probe in Heat
HEAT
Setpoint // Integration heater setpoint
Hysteresis Hi25 Internal exchanger heater regulator hysteresis in integrated use
Setpoint differential for activation of internal exchanger heater 2 in
Hi26 integration mode
14.3 Heaters in defrost mode
Parameter Hi01: Enable force heaters on during defrost determines the operation of the internal exchanger heaters during
defrost.
One or both of the heaters can be forced on, or heater 1 can be linked to defrosting circuit 1 and heater 2 to circuit 2.

Parameter table Hi01

Value Description
0 Free operation (no forcing)
1 Heater 1 forced on
2 Both heaters forced on
3 Heater 1 forced on for defrost circuit 1, heater 2 for defrost circuit 2 (double exchanger)

Note. For cases with value 1 and 2, the heaters are turned on if at least one of the two circuits is defrosting (typically used
in case of single exchanger).
15 EXTERNAL EXCHANGER ELECTRIC HEATERS (FOLDER PAR/HE)
The external exchanger heater parameters can be viewed and modified in folder HE (see User Interface and Parameters
chapters).

The following must be configured:

at least one digital output as external exchanger 1 heater with parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if digital /
CL61…CL63 if digital = ±25.
at least one digital output as external exchanger 2 heater with parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if digital /
CL61…CL63 if digital = ±26.
See chapter System configuration (folder PAr/CL-Cr-CF) / Configuration of digital outputs

The SB600 controls external exchanger heaters 1 and 2 with antifreeze function (as heat pumps with water external
exchanger).
The heater control outputs are all and exclusively those outputs with ON/OFF control.
The heaters can be used in a variety of ways depending on the type of system. We can have one or two external
exchangers (one or two circuits).

For greatest configurability:

the number of antifreeze heaters can be set;
the control analogue input can be determined individually.

Enabling
The external exchanger heater 1 antifreeze probe is enabled and selected with parameter HE10 - Select probe for
antifreeze external exchanger + heater 1.
The external exchanger heater 2 antifreeze probe is enabled and selected with parameter HE11 - Select probe for
antifreeze external exchanger + heater 2.

General conditions of operation

In Off the external exchanger antifreeze heaters are immediately and always off.
In Standby the external exchanger antifreeze heaters are active if so configured with (HE00 - Enable external exchanger
antifreeze heaters in Stand-By).
In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with priority over
the principal regulation itself) may occur:

The external circuit heaters are immediately turned off during heater block alarms.

Note: There are no safety times for heater on/off.

Table A - external exchanger heater parameters

heaters Parameter Description Value

0 1
Enable external exchanger
External
heater regulator in standby for
exchanger
HE00 antifreeze Heaters disabled Heaters enabled
(Standby
mode)

Heaters Parameter Description Value

0 1 2 3 4
External
exchanger Select probe for antifreeze External
HE10
Enable external exchanger + heater 1 No probe exchanger External External
heater 1 (antifreeze average exchanger exchanger External
External heater temperature inlet water outlet water temperature
exchanger Select probe for antifreeze disabled) circuit 1 and temperature temperature
HE11 2
Enable external exchanger + heater 2
heater 2

Heaters Parameter Description Value

External exchanger heater

External Range defined by parameters HE14….HE13
HE12 switch on setpoint for
exchanger Hysteresis defined by parameter HE15
antifreeze

Energy Fle
External exchanger heaters
Regulation is performed as shown in the figure:

HE10 Analogue input - see table A

HE11 Analogue input - see table A
HE12 Setpoint - see table A
HE13 Maximum external exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
HE14 Minimum external exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
HE15 External exchanger heater regulator hysteresis for antifreeze

Note: depending on the settings, the heaters can be turned on together or separately.
Note: In case of control probe error, the machine is blocked.
 16 AUXILIARY OUTPUT (FOLDER PAR/HA)
Auxiliary output parameters can be viewed and configured in folderHA (see User Interface and Parameters chapters)

The following must be configured:

 at least one digital output as Auxiliary Output with parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if digital /
CL61…CL63 if digital = ±32.

The auxiliary output controller can be used, for example, to control heaters in machines with air condensation to
evaporate the condensation water.

Enabling
The parameter (HA00 - Select probe for auxiliary output regulator) enables the auxiliary output controller.

Table A - meaning of parameter HA00:

Value Probe
HA00
0 No probe (auxiliary output disabled)
1 External temperature
2 External exchanger temperature circuit 1
3 External exchanger temperature circuit 2
4 External exchanger inlet water temperature
5 External exchanger outlet water temperature
6 NOT USED

General conditions of operation

 In Off the auxiliary output is immediately and always off.
 In Standby the auxiliary output is immediately and always off.
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situation (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur: the auxiliary output is immediately turned off in case of a
block alarm for the output itself.

Note: There are no safety times for auxiliary output on/off.

Auxiliary heaters
Regulation is performed as shown in the figure:

Parameter Description
HA00 Control probes - see table A
HA01 Auxiliary output regulator setpoint
HA02 Auxiliary output regulator hysteresis
Auxiliary output Auxiliary output

Note: In case of probe error, the machine is blocked.

Note: if there is a digital input configured as Enable auxiliary output, the state of the controller also depends on the state
of this input:
digital input active: operation unaltered
digital input not active: auxiliary output forced OFF

Energy Fle
17 BOILER (FOLDER PAR/BR)
The SB600 controls, via a digital output, the pump or the permissive signal for a hot water boiler which is used both for
heating and as a supplementary heater (integration mode) for the water heat pump.
The boiler control outputs are all and exclusively those outputs with ON/OFF control.
There are many types of installation and consequently many ways of using the boiler, especially in residential installations.

17.1 Boiler configuration

The boiler is used as a heating power step both for the chiller and the heat pump.
Combined with the integration/heating heaters and the compressors (in heat pump mode) it produces hot water on the
internal circuit.

For maximum configurability, you can set the boiler and other component parameters separately. You can thus determine
when to use the boiler power step for heating and when to inhibit it.

In both modes, heating and integration, the boiler setpoint can be set as a differential (fixed or proportionally variable
depending on the external temperature) with respect to the real setpoint in heat mode.

Note. Normally, when there is no heat pump (heating mode), the differential is set as fixed, and to zero (the regulation
setpoint coincides with the real heat mode setpoint).

Note: if parameter Maximum boiler dynamic differential is set to 0, the setpoint coincides with the real Heat setpoint.

Enabling
Setting parameter br00: Select boiler modenon-zero enables boiler regulation.

General conditions of operation

 In Off the boiler is immediately and always off.
 In Stand-by the boiler is immediately and always off.
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situation (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur: The boiler is immediately off in case of boiler lock alarm
(see alarms table).

Note: There are no safety times for boiler on/off.

Operating modes
The boiler regulator is only active in Heat mode; the regulation of the setpoint is obtained by subtracting a differential
from the real Heat setpoint.
The boiler differential can be calculated as a variety of ways which can be selected with parameter Select boiler modebr00.

Parameter table br00

Value Description
br00
0 Boiler disabled
Boiler with differential
1 Diagram A
Setpoint proportional to external temperature
Boiler with differential
2 Diagram B
Setpoint in steps dependent on external temperature
Boiler with differential
3 Diagram C
Fixed setpoint

Energy Fle
17.1.1 Boiler differential
The boiler regulation setpoint is calculated by subtracting a differential from the real Heat setpoint.

Boiler setpoint = real Heat setpoint - Boiler differential

In case of heat pump block, the Boiler differential takes the fixed value of parameter br03: boiler differential with heat
pump block. This serves to improve the control of the boiler power step in special cases.

Boiler differential setpoint proportional to external temperature

Example br00 = 1.
Diagram A

<IMG INFO>
311,75
125,05
0
2
56,8
0
-1

Parameter Parameter
Regulator
// External temperature
probe
Setpoint br01 Boiler dynamic differential setpoint
br02 Maximum boiler differential
br04 Boiler differential proportional band

Boiler differential in steps as a function of external temperature

Example br00= 2.
Diagram B

<IMG INFO>
305,75
161,75
0
2

Parameter
Regulator
// External temperature
probe
Setpoint br01 Boiler dynamic differential setpoint
br02 Maximum boiler differential br02
br04 Boiler differential proportional band
Hysteresis br05 Boiler regulator hysteresis
Boiler differential fixed, independent of external temperature
Case br00= 3.
Diagram C

IMG INFO

Note: In case of error of the external probe, the differential value is set to br02 or br03 (both fixed) depending on
circumstances.

17.1.2 Boiler regulation

The regulation uses the Boiler setpoint calculated with the boiler differential as explained in the previous paragraph.

<IMG INFO>

Parameter
Boiler
br00 See Boiler differential section
differential
HEAT regulator
tr03 Select temperature control probe in Heat
probe

Setpoint // Boiler setpoint

Hysteresis br05 Boiler regulator hysteresis
18 FREECOOLING (FOLDER PAR/FC)
Energy Flex controls:
 the Free-Cooling valve via an appropriately configured Free-Cooling Valve digital output
 with internal Free-Cooling, the external exchanger fans (two appropriately configured digital outputs, and via
two appropriately configured analogue outputs)
 with external Free-Cooling, the Free-Cooling fans via an appropriately configured digital output or analogue
output

The FreeCooling parameters can be viewed and configured in the FC folder (see User Interface section and Parameters
section).

The following must be configured:

 an analogue input as External temperature
 an analogue input as Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
 an analogue input as Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature (if two sensors are configured then the
average reading of the two sensors is considered)
Note. If at least one of these inputs is not enabled or is in error, the controller is disabled.

Enabling
The controller is enabled with parameter FC00 - Select Free-Cooling mode different from 0

Table 1 – Parameter FC00

Parameter Description Value
0 1 2
Select FreeCooling Internal External
Enabling FC00
Free-Cooling mode Disabled Free-Cooling Free-Cooling

General conditions of operation

 In Off mode FreeCooling is switched off, the FreeCooling fans and FreeCooling valve are switched off
immediately and continuously.
 In Standby and Heat modes Free-Cooling is switched off, the FreeCooling fans and FreeCooling valve are
switched off immediately and continuously.
 In Cool mode, in addition to the main control specified in subsequent paragraphs, the following situations are
also possible (with priority given to the main control itself):

The F.C. fans and the F.C. valve are switched off immediately in the event of shutdown alarms (refer to the alarms table)

18.1 Free-Cooling control and Free-Cooling Valve control

The F.C. is activated (= F.C. valve activated) on the actual Cool setpoint of the main temperature controller, unless a
differential has been specified using parameter FC01- Free-Cooling activation differential
See figure
The analogue input used for the activation is exclusively the External temperature

The activation may take place if and only if all the following conditions have been satisfied:
 device in Cool mode
 if a digital input has been configured for FreeCooling Consent, it must be active (there doesn't need to be a
digital input configured for this purpose, but if one does exist it must be active)
 the minimum time (from parameter FC03 - Free Cooling minimum deactivation/activation time) must have
elapsed since the last deactivation
 the Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature must be greater than parameter FC04 - Antifreeze pre-
alarm Free-Cooling deactivation setpoint

Diagram A
COOLING

FreeCooling Set Point

Function COOL
FreeCooling Actual
Valve
ON

OFF
External temperature
FC01 FC02

The deactivation may take place (forced deactivation) even if at least one of the following conditions is satisfied:
 exit from Cool mode (mode change, e.g. antifreeze with PdC)
 there is an appropriately configured digital input for Free-Cooling Consent, and this input is deactivated
 the Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature becomes lower than or equal to parameter FC04 -
Antifreeze pre-alarm Free-Cooling deactivation setpoint

Energy Fle
18.2 Internal Free-Cooling Fan control
FC00=1
NOTE: In this case the FreeCooling fans coincide with the external exchanger fans.

The fans are controlled by both controllers (external exchanger and FreeCooling fans) at the same time: if the outputs are
digital, only the logical OR will be actuated (fans active if requested by at least one of the two controllers); if, on the other
hand, the control is proportional, the fans will go to the MAX of the values set by the two controllers.

Note. In the case of two circuits, the fan controller may impose different values on the fans of the two external
exchangers, while the FreeCooling controller will pilot the two fans in the same way. The result of this is that, at any given
moment, the fans in one circuit may be piloted by FreeCooling and the fans in the other circuit piloted by the fan
controller.

Ventilation is only activated with the FreeCooling function active, based on the value of the analogue input Internal
exchanger water/air inlet temperature

Note. Generally speaking, it is assumed that this sensor is appropriately positioned, typically before the "FreeCooling
diversion"

18.2.1 Digital control

Diagram B Digital
COOL
Actual
FC Fan SetPoint
= COOL
External
Exchanger FC18
ON

OFF
FC14-FC19 Control Probe
Minimum and Cut-Off
Speed differential

Parameter Description
Control sensor Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
FC14 Setpoint differential for Free-Cooling fan minimum speed
FC18 Free-Cooling fan cut-off hysteresis
FC19 Free-Cooling fan cut-off differential
Note In the example FC14 -FC19 is NEGATIVE
18.2.2 Analogue control
Table 2 - Maximum and minimum speeds for FreeCooling fans
The maximum and minimum speeds for FreeCooling fans are defined by parameter

Parameter Description
FC10 Free-Cooling fan minimum speed
FC11 Free-Cooling fan average speed
FC12 Free-Cooling fan maximum speed

Diagram C Analogue
COOL

FC Fan Speed = Actual Minumum

External SetPoint Speed
Exchanger COOL SetPoint FC17
FC12 Max

FC11 Silent
FC14

FC18
FC10 Min

OFF
Control Probe
FC16
FC19 FC15

Parameter Description
Control sensor Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
FC14 Setpoint differential for Free-Cooling fan minimum speed
FC15 Free-Cooling fan maximum speed differential
FC16 Proportional band for Free-Cooling fan speed
FC17 Free-Cooling fan maximum speed hysteresis
FC18 Free-Cooling fan cut-off hysteresis
FC19 Free-Cooling fan cut-off differential

18.3 External FreeCooling fan control

FC00=2
Note: In this case the FreeCooling fans are independent (they do not coincide with the external exchanger fans): dedicated
digital output and analogue output

Ventilation is activated, only with the FreeCooling function active, based on the value of the analogue input Internal
exchanger water/air inlet temperature

The control, digital and analogue, is the same as that indicated for internal FreeCooling (see diagrams B-C), the only
difference being that it acts exclusively on the FreeCooling fan (which is controlled only by this controller) and has no
effect whatsoever on the behaviour of the external exchanger fans (they are separate outputs).

Starting pickup for FreeCooling Fan

The modulating fan of the external Free-Cooling exchanger connected to the analogue inputs is switched on by bringing
the inputs to maximum speed (relative to the current operating mode) for a time equal to parameter FC05 - External
Free-Cooling fan pickup time.
18.3.1 Power limit with Free-Cooling active

In order to promote energy saving it is possible, by means of parameter FC06 - Enable power limit to 50 in Free-
Cooling, to limit to 50% the power of the system associated with the compressors, if and only if both of the following
conditions are satisfied:
the conditions for active FreeCooling must be checked
the Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature must be lower than parameter FC07 - Setpoint for deactivation of
power limit to 50 in Free-Cooling

Note. The effect on the compressors is the same as the activation of a possible digital input configured for the 50% power
limit function (see Forced Power Stage section).
19 DEFROST (FOLDER PAR/DF)
Defrost parameters can be viewed and configured in the dF folder (see User Interface and Parameters sections).

Defrosting is only possible in HEAT mode.

It is used to prevent ice from forming on the surface of the external exchanger.
Ice builds up on the external exchanger more often as a result of cold external air containing a high degree of humidity.
This considerably reduces the thermodynamic efficiency of the machine and can also result in damage to the machine
itself.

Enabling
Defrosting is enabled if:
 it is enabled via parameter (dF00 - Enable defrost function =1,2)

Parameter table dF00

Value Description
0 Defrosting disabled
1 Simultaneous defrost (only for dual-circuit systems)
2 Independent defrost

General conditions of operation

 In Off defrosting is disabled.
 In Stand-by defrosting is disabled.
 In On, as well as the main regulation function specified in the paragraphs which follow, the following situation is
also possible (with priority over the main regulation): the defrost request is inhibited/cancelled if antifreeze with
heat pump is active.

Types of defrost
SB600 controls both Single defrosting for a single or double external exchanger, and Independent defrosting for the
exchangers of two cooling circuits.

In the first case, single defrosting, the two circuits defrost at the same time when at least of them requires it. This mode
applies to machines with single condensation (parameter FE10: Enable single condensation = 1). The circuit which
completes defrosting first, before it resumes normal operation, waits (with compressors off) for the other circuit to
complete defrosting.

Note: In the case of single condensation, two start probes must be configured (on for circuit 1 and one for circuit 2) along
with two 2 defrost end probes. The times for starting defrosting are nonetheless independent.

In the case of independent defrosting each circuit defrosts separately.

The start and end of the defrost cycle depends on the values of the probes and the parameter settings described below;

defrost Parameter Description

dF01 Enable maximum power for non-defrost circuit
dF10 Select probe to enable interval count between defrosts
dF11 Enable interval count between defrosts setpoint
Start
dF12 Setpoint to clear cumulative time between defrosts
dF13 Cumulative interval between defrosts
dF14 Minimum interval between defrost cycles
dF20 Select probe to end defrost
dF21 Defrost deactivation setpoint
Output
dF22 Maximum defrost time
dF23 Dripping time
dF30 Maximum dynamic defrost differential
Setpoint dF31 Defrost dynamic differential setpoint
dF32 Dynamic defrost differential proportional band

Defrosting is done in heat mode, by reversing the cooling cycle, switching the position of the reversal valve and operating
the circuit in chiller mode.

During defrosting, the reversal valves switch in the same way as for mode changeovers (see section Reversal valve
management), but with the time given in parameter St06 - Reversal valve switching from Heat to Defrost delay and
St07 - Reversal valve switching from Defrost to Heat delay, and compressor on/off times which refer only to
defrosting (parameter CP27 - Defrost compressor step/delay minimum).

In multi-circuit systems, defrosting can be run separately (independently) or at the same time (single) for the various
cooling circuits, depending on the general operational requirements of the plant

Analogue inputs for defrosting start/end

Defrosting can be started in relation to the pressure or temperature measured by the probe selected in parameter dF10:
Select probe to enable interval count between defrosts.

Energy Fle
Defrosting can be ended in relation to the pressure or temperature measured by the probe selected in parameter dF20:
Select probe to end defrost.
In the double circuit case, each circuit must have an analogue input configured for the function in question.

Defrosting function analogue inputs

Description
External exchanger temperature circuit 1
External exchanger temperature circuit 2
High pressure input circuit 1
High pressure input circuit 2
Low pressure input circuit 1
Low pressure input circuit 2
External exchanger pressure circuit 1
External exchanger pressure circuit 2

Parameters table dF10 and dF20

Value Description
0 No probe
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2)
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
3 Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
4 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2)

19.1 Defrost

19.1.1 Start defrost

Defrosting can be started in relation to the pressure or temperature measured by the probes selected in parameter Select
probe to enable interval count between defrosts dF10.
If there is a probe error or no probe is configured, start of defrosting depends solely on the effective operating time of the
compressors and the parameter Cumulative interval between defrosts dF13.
The time between defrosts must be at least equal to the value of parameter Minimum interval between defrost cycles dF14.

The conditions required for starting defrosting of a circuit are as follows:

 When the pressure or temperature detected by the start defrost probe on the circuit drops below the value of
the start defrost setpoint and the circuit is supplying at least one power step, the cumulative defrost delay
counter is started, the value of which can be set with parameter dF13: Cumulative interval between defrosts.
 The start defrost setpoint is a dynamic value calculated on the basis of parameter dF11: Setpoint to enable
interval count between defrosts (see relative section).

 When the pressure or temperature read by the defrost start probe for the circuit returns above the value of the
defrost start setpoint of the circuit is no longer delivering any power steps, the cumulative defrost delay count is
stopped.

 The count is reset to zero after a defrost cycle or after a reset (e.g. power down).

 The cumulative defrost delay count is also reset when the temperature or pressure of the probe configured as
defrost start probe rises above the value set in parameter dF12: Setpoint to clear cumulative time between
defrosts

 When the cumulative defrost delay count terminates (when the time set in the parameter elapses), the circuit
runs a defrost cycle.

Given the above, the start time for the defrost cycle corresponds to the time at which the count ends (before valve
reversal).

Note: In the case of mode changeover, the count is suspended but not reset. In this way, at the next mode changeover
(e.g. from OFF or Standby to Heat), the count resumes from its preceding value.

In the case of independent defrosting or a single circuit, defrosting starts only when the compressor safety times are reset,
and the conditions for starting defrosting are satisfied (the circuit is delivering at least one power step, etc.).

In the case of single defrosting, defrosting starts only when the compressor safety times of both circuits are reset and the
conditions for starting defrosting on the requesting circuit are satisfied. The two circuits defrost in a fully harmonised
manner.

Defrosting starts with the reversal valve switching sequence for the circuits in question in the same way as for mode
changeovers (see section Reversal valve management).

19.1.2 Defrosting cycle

After cycle reversal, the compressors are all on (max. available power). If there is an alarm which inhibits operation of one
or more compressors, defrosting proceeds anyway (as in the case of defrosting during a simple stop).
In the case of independent defrosting of two circuits, parameter dF01: Enable maximum power for non-defrost circuit
allows you to force the other circuit to maximum power (the circuit not to be defrosted), for reasons of compensation.

19.1.3 End defrost and coil drainage

Defrost terminates:

Due to temperature/pressure: if the temperature or pressure of the end defrosting probe of the circuit rises above
the value set in parameter dF21: Defrost deactivation setpoint.
Due to duration: if defrosting does not end due to temperature or pressure within the maximum time
set in parameter dF22: Maximum defrost time..
Due to a digital input: if the digital inputs End defrost circuit 1 and End defrost circuit 2 are configured and
active

If the probe is in error or not configured, defrosting may end in the two other modes (duration and digital input)

The end of defrosting is always independent for each circuit, depending on the analogue or digital end defrost inputs for
the circuit in question.

Defrosting end with the reversal valve switching sequence for the circuit in question in the same way as for the start of
defrosting (St06 / St07) apart from coil drainage.
The compressors are switched off according only to the time set in parameter Cp27: Defrost compressor/step delay
minimum.
Before the valve reverses, coil drainage runs for a period given in df23.
In this phase the compressors stay off and the external exchanger fan of the circuit is run at maximum power.

After coil drainage, if the parameter St07 - Reversal valve switching from Defrost to Heat delay is null, the valve
switches immediately and terminates the defrost cycle

The end of the defrosting phase corresponds to the moment the valve is reversed.

Note: after the end of defrosting, the compressor safety times are no longer regulated by CP27 (the compressor start
sequence of the circuits after defrosting observes normal timings).

Note: If both parameters Coil drainage time dF23 and St06 - Reversal valve switching from Heat to Defrost delay or
St07 - Reversal valve switching from Defrost to Heat delay are set to zero the valve is reversed "on the fly" (“fast
inversion”), even with the compressors active, without any safety.

In the case of single defrosting on two circuits, the compressors are available for temperature control only if both circuits
have stopped defrosting.
In the case of independent defrosting, the compressors of the circuit which has stopped defrosting are immediately -
available for temperature control.
The circuit for which compensation is active (if either) is controlled by the Heat temperature controller on termination of
defrosting.

19.1.4 Heat – defrost mode changeover

See diagrams G and H Operating States section (folder PAr/St)
19.2 Start defrost setpoint
In very dry and cold climates, it is good to be able to vary the reference temperature for the start of defrosting as a
function of the external temperature.
This regulator linearly compensates the defrosting start temperature or pressure with a positive or negative differential
value according to the external temperature.
The real defrost start setpoint is calculated by adding this dynamic differential to the value of parameter dF11: Enable
interval count between defrosts setpoint.

Enabling
The controller is enabled by setting parameter dF30: Maximum dynamic defrost differential to a value other than 0.
Furthermore, an analogue input must be configured as external temperature.

Differenziale dF31
Set-point inizio Differenziale dF31
sbrinamento Set-point inizio dF32 dF32
sbrinamento con dF32<0 con dF32>0
dF30 Temperatura esterna
con dF30>0

dF30
con dF30<0
dF32 dF32 Temperatura esterna
con dF32<0 con dF32>0

Defrost Parameter Description

External
temperature External temperature

Differential dF30 Maximum dynamic defrost differential

Setpoint dF31 Defrost dynamic differential setpoint
dF32 Dynamic defrost differential proportional band

Note: In case of error of the external probe, the differential value is set to zero (compensation disabled).

19.3 Defrost alarm management

For the actuation of loads during alarms, see the diagnostics section.

To summarise, and specifically for defrosting, if probe errors or alarms occur which lock the compressors, the start defrost
and end defrost cycles are already defined and are typically based on parameter timings.
E.g. if during defrosting the compressors are made unavailable by alarms, defrosting will terminate when the maximum
time expires. It may terminate differently if the compressors become available again during the defrosting cycle.

19.4 Manual defrost

EnergySB600 can force defrost manually by pressing and holding the [UP] key.
Manual defrost is possible when:
 dF00 = 1,2
 UI20 -Enable defrost function from key
 if the temperature / pressure of the external exchanger is less than the value set in parameter dF11 Set point
to enable interval count between defrosts

Defrost starts in the sequence described in the section Start Defrost.

 The defrost LED is blinking.

End defrost takes place as described in the section about "End Defrost"

19.5 Power failure during defrost

If a power failure happens during defrost, the procedure will be cancelled. All timings will be cancelled and restarted.
 20 DYNAMIC SETPOINT (FOLDER PAR/DS)
Dynamic setpoint parameters can be viewed and configured in folder dS (see User Interface and Parameters sections).
The regulator is used to modify the setpoint automatically depending on external conditions.
This modification is obtained by adding a negative or positive value to the setpoint (offset or differential) depending on:
 analogue input set as dynamic setpoint input
NOTE: the applies only for AI3 (CL32=24) or AI4 (CL33=24)
or
 External temperature

This function has two purposes: to save energy or to run the machine in extreme external temperatures.

Enabling
Dynamic setpoint
a) As a function of external temperature is enabled if:
 The dynamic setpoint activation/selection parameter dS00= 1 or 2
b) As a function of the dynamic setpoint input
 probe AI3 (analogue inputs) is configured as an dynamic setpoint input (CL32=24) or
 probe AI4 (analogue inputs) is configured as an dynamic setpoint input (CL33=24)

Note:
 these two options (a) and (b) are independent
 If the external temperature probe is in error, the associated dynamic differential is annulled (function disabled)
 The dynamic setpoint input must be a voltage (V) or current (I) input, it may not be an NTC temperature probe.
The Min and Max values of the graphs are associated with the Min (start of scale value) and Max (fullscale value)
values of the input itself. If the dynamic setpoint input is in error, the associated dynamic differential is annulled
(function disabled)

<IMG INFO>
53,05
The Economy LED flashes when this function is active (if so configured: UI07=1)
27,5
1
2

20.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input

20.1.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input with positive
offset.
The following figure shows decalibration in both cooling and heating modes:

Modification
based on the Positive Offset
dynamic setpoint
input with positive
offset

Note
The dynamic setpoint input must be a voltage (V) or current (I) input, it may not be an NTC temperature probe, in other
words, CL02/CL03= 3,4,5 or 6
The Min and Max values of the graphs are associated with the Min (start of scale value) and Max (fullscale value) values of
the input itself, in other words
 Min = CL11 for AI3; CL13 for AI4
 Max = CL10 for AI3; CL12 for AI4

Energy Fle
 20.1.2 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input with negative
offset.
See above

Modification
based on the Negative Offset
dynamic setpoint
input with
negative offset

<IMG INFO>

20.2 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based on the external temperature

The setpoint can be decalibrated based on external temperature either proportionally or with a fixed decalibration; this is
set with parameter dS00 - External temperature controller dynamic differential selection
This allows enabling/selecting the temperature controller dynamic digital differential
 0 = disabled
 1 = Proportional
 2 = Fixed (by steps)

20.2.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based on the external temperature (dS00=1)

Proportional decalibration of the setpoint with positive differential (offset).

The figure shown above shows decalibration in both cooling and heating modes:

Modification Positive Offset

based on the
external dS05 (cooling)
dS06 (heating)
temperature with dS03 (cooling) dS04 (heating)
positive offset

ds01 < 0 ds01 > 0 (cooling) Ext. Temp Ext. Temp

ds02 < 0 ds02 > 0 (heating)

Proportional decalibration of the setpoint with negative differential (offset).

See above

Modification Negative Offset

based on the
external
dS05 (cooling)
dS06 (heating)
temperature with dS03 (cooling) dS04 (heating)

negative offset Ext. Temp Ext. Tem

ds01 < 0 ds01 > 0 (cooling)

ds02 < 0 ds02 > 0 (heating)
<IMG INFO>
425,25
110,15
0
2
0,05
0
-1

Cool Heat
dS01 dS02 Temperature controller dynamic differential proportional band in Cool / Heat
dS03 dS04 Maximum temperature controller dynamic differential in Cool / Heat
dS05 dS06 Temperature controller dynamic differential setpoint in Cool / Heat
Ext. Temp: External temperature
20.2.2 Fixed modification (decalibration) of the setpoint (dS00=2)
Differential > 0 Differential < 0
Band < 0 Band < 0

<IMG INFO>

Differential > 0 Differential < 0

Band > 0 Band > 0

Cool Heat
Temperature controller dynamic differential proportional
dS01 dS02
band in Cool / Heat
Maximum temperature controller dynamic differential in
dS03 dS04
Cool / Heat
Temperature controller dynamic differential setpoint in Cool
dS05 dS06
/ Heat
Temp Ext Air: External temperature
Offset: differential
 21 ADAPTIVE (FOLDER PAR/AD)
<IMG INFO>

Chillers generally contain a water accumulation tank.

24,05
27,7
1
2
79 35

The purpose of these tanks is to create sufficient thermal inertia to stop the compressor from repeatedly switching on and
off in periods in which the temperature requirements in the area to be cooled are relatively few (switching repeatedly on
and off will reduce the life time of compressors).
A water accumulator increases the thermal capacity and provides the inertia required to extend running time.
Nevertheless, water accumulation is also a substantial cost and also adds to the minimum dimensions of the machine.

Adaptive function parameters can be viewed and configured in the Ad folder (see chapters on User Interface and
Parameters).

By adjusting the setpoint and hysteresis, the Adaptive function simulates electronically the inertia of a water accumulator,
meaning it can be used less.

Enabling
Use parameter Ad00 - Select no accumulation mode
when set not equal to zero enables the function and enables selecting the amount to which the adaptive function
temperature differential is to be added or subtracted.

0 1 2 2
Accumulation Setpoint +
Ad00 Select no accumulation mode Setpoint Hysteresis
disabled hysteresis

General conditions of operation

 In Off the adaptive function is disabled.
 In Stand-by the adaptive function is disabled.
 In On the adaptive function is enabled.

MT minimum time and ET real time

Note that compressor on/off times must respect safety time delays:

The function analyses actual running time of the compressor (ET) comparing it with the preset minimum running time
(MT).

Minimum time The minimum time (MT) is set in parameter Ad06 - Reference compressor on time for adaptive accumulation
MT
Parameter Description
MT

Ad06 Reference compressor on time for accumulation offset

Real time ET Real running time (ET) is recorded automatically by the device

Type of plant ET
Single circuit
Count
2 / 4 compressors /
[first compressor on / first partialization, last resource switched off]
Segmented compressors
Double circuit Count
1 / 2 compressors / [first compressor on / first partialization, last resource switched off]
Segmented compressors Independently of the circuits
Count
Ordinary compressor
[compressor on, compressor off]

21.1 Adaptive function with setpoint modification

ET<MT example If ET<MT:

when the compressor switches off, the operating setpoint is changed to a value equal to the adaptive offset (AO)
according to the formula below:

 AO=((MT - ET)* Ad01)/10 + Ad02

Where:
Ad01 Accumulation offset constant
Ad02 Accumulation offset differential

Energy Fle
Adaptive function COOLING MODE
Setpoint  ET<MT example
If the real running time (ET) is less than the minimum time(MT), each time the compressor switches off, the adaptive
modification in
offset is subtracted from the setpoint.
cooling
Cycle 0:
 Setpoint for cycle 0: SET(0) = SET (COOL)
 Hysteresis for cycle 0: HYSTERESIS (0) = HYSTERESIS (COOL)
 Compressor ON: SET (0)+HYSTERESIS (0) ---> SET (COOL) +HYSTERESIS(COOL)**
 Compressor OFF: SET (0)
Cycle 1:
 Setpoint for cycle 1: SET(1) = SET (0) - AO(1) = SET(COOL)-AO(1)
 Compressor ON: SET (0)+HYSTERESIS (0) ---> SET (COOL) +HYSTERESIS(COOL)**
 Compressor OFF: SET (0) - AO(1) = SET (COOL)** - AO(1)
Cycle 2:
 Setpoint for cycle 2: SET(2) = SET (1) - AO(2)
 Compressor ON: SET (0)+HYSTERESIS (0) ---> SET (COOL) +HYSTERESIS(COOL)**
 Compressor OFF: SET (0) - AO(2) = SET (COOL)** - AO(2)
…

 ET>MT example
See differential regression

Adaptive function HEATING MODE

Modification of Same as heating example. The offset is ADDED to the setpoint:
 SET(0) = SET (HEAT)
setpoint in heating
 SET(1) = SET(HEAT)+AO(1)
 SET(2) = SET(HEAT)+AO(2)
…

Note that in both modes, the compressor on temperature is the same for each operating cycle, even when the adaptive
function is activated.
This extends the zone between the setpoint and on temperatures, reducing the number of times the compressor switches
on and off and thereby reducing any overlap with safety times.

Cooling mode
Adaptive function with setpoint modification (Ad00=0) Setpoint modification after calculation of AO1

IMG INFO

SET1 = SET(1), SET2=SET(2)

 21.2 Adaptive function with hysteresis modification
Adaptive function with hysteresis modification (Ad00=1) Hysteresis modification after calculation of AO1

21.3 Adaptive function with setpoint and hysteresis modification

Adaptive function with setpoint and hysteresis Setpoint and hysteresis modification after calculation of
modification (Ad01=2) AO1

<IMG INFO>

21.4 Setpoint regression

ETMT example If ET  MT:

If the cycle time is long enough (and greater than MT), regression of the real setpoint occurs: for each interval of Ad05
(from the start of the cycle), the setpoint is modified by the value set in Ad02.

 in cooling, the setpoint (real for cycle N) is increased:

after Ad05: SET(N) + Ad02
after 2*Ad05: SET(N) + 2*Ad02
and so on until the maximum value (setpoint / hysteresis)

 in heating, the setpoint is reduced as above, down to the minimum value (setpoint / hysteresis)

Hence for long cycle times, the "adaptive" function balances out making the cycle times compatible with compressor
timings.
 Cooling mode
Setpoint regression

<IMG INFO>
314,45
180,3
0
2
39,9
-188,9

Parameter Description Parameter

See
Ad01 Accumulation offset constant Modify setpoint offset calculation
formula
See
Modify setpoint offset calculation
Ad02 Accumulation offset differential formula
See
Setpoint regression
See
Ad03 Block accumulation offset setpoint in cooling mode
Protection in cooling mode
See
Ad04 Block accumulation offset setpoint in heating mode
Protection in heating mode

Ad05 Compressor on time for accumulation offset regression See setpoint regression

Ad06 Reference compressor on time for accumulation offset See MT

21.5 Protection
COOL
If the outlet temperature < Ad03 during general cycle n, the controller performs the following actions:
Switches off the compressor (or compressors)
Clears the adaptive offset AO(n) = 0; the next cycle recommences with the original setpoint and hysteresis

This adjustment can be considered a precursor of the antifreeze alarm (the cycle stops without generating an alarm)
should the adaptive function lead to a very low real setpoint.
We recommend you set Ad03 > AL12 Internal circuit antifreeze alarm regulator setpoint

HEAT
If the outlet temperature > Ad04 during general cycle n, the controller performs the following actions:
Switches off the compressor (or compressors)
Clears the adaptive offset AO(n) = 0; the next cycle recommences with the original setpoint and hysteresis
This adjustment can be considered a precursor of the high pressure alarm (the cycle stops without generating an alarm)
should the adaptive function lead to a very high real setpoint.

To set Ad06, we recommend you refer to the high pressure safety devices in use (pressure switch configuration, type of
refrigerant used, and so on)

Note: if the plant is of the two circuit type and two water temperature sensors are configured on circuit 1 and 2 primary
output, consider the minimum of the two values.
 22 ANTIFREEZE PARAMETERS WITH HEAT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/AF) - ANTIFREEZE

Anti-freeze parameters can be viewed and configured in folder AF (see User Interface and Parameters chapters).

The anti-freeze function with heat pump serves to prevent breakdowns due to internal heat exchanger icing (typically in
machines with water-type internal heat exchangers).
SB600 enables control of machines with one or two cooling circuits and one or two internal heat exchangers.
The anti-freeze function with heat pump is controlled separately for each cooling circuit.

The function is always active in any machine operating state, i.e. cooling, heating and standby.
Anti-freeze function with heat pump is enabled
 via parameter (AF00 - Select antifreeze probe with circuit 1 heat pump ≠ 0)
 via parameter (AF01 - Select antifreeze probe with circuit 2 heat pump ≠ 0)

The Heating LED flashes when this function is active.

<IMG INFO>
56,75
29,75
1
2
51
28 35

Mode change is disabled when this function is enabled.

Defrosting is disabled when this function is enabled.

Analogue inputs for anti-freeze function with heat pump

The analogue inputs used for regulation are selected distinctly for each cooling circuit, using parameters
AF00 - Select antifreeze probe with circuit 1 heat pump
AF01 - Select antifreeze probe with circuit 2 heat pump
Note: For machines with a single circuit AF01 - Select antifreeze probe with circuit 2 heat pump must be set = 0.

Value AF00 / AF01 Probe

0 No probe (anti-freeze function with heat pump disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
4 Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
5 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature

General conditions of operation

 In Off the anti-freeze function with heat pump is disabled.
 In Stand-by the anti-freeze function with heat pump is enabled, as in On.
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situation (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur: anti-freeze function with heat pump inhibited during
defrosts.

NOTE:
The valve reverses with a delay ST05 - Reversal valve switching delay.
Furthermore, during the anti-freeze phase, the compressors run at maximum power and are turned off and on with
reference only to the delay CP27 - Defrost compressor step/delay minimum

Heat pump activation

 The function is enabled (°) if the temperature measured
o Circuit 1: by the anti-freeze with heat pump probe for circuit 1 < AF02 - Anti-freeze regulator
setpoint with heat pump
o Circuit 2: by the anti-freeze with heat pump probe for circuit 2 < AF02 - Anti-freeze regulator
setpoint with heat pump

(°) the heat pump is activated if previously switched off; if previously activated, it remains active

Energy Fle
 Circuit 1 Circuit 2

<IMG INFO>
<IMG INFO> 219
219,9 128,35
128,45 0
0 2
2 -5,15
0,75 -120 9

Heat Pump = pompa di calore Heat Pump = pompa di calore

Anti-freeze probe Anti-freeze probe
anti-freeze function heat pump probe for circuit 1 (AF00) anti-freeze function heat pump probe for circuit 2 (AF01)

Parameter Description
AF02 Anti-freeze regulator setpoint with heat pump
AF03 Anti-freeze regulator hysteresis with heat pump
Regulator probe AF01 (circuit 1) / AF02 (Circuit 2)
 23 BLOCK HEAT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/HP)
<IMG INFO>

The block heat pump function allows energy savings by disabling the heat pump in specific operating conditions, such as:
24,05
25,3
1

 when the installation is not working efficiently due to the external temperature (Block heat pump by external
temperature)
 when on account of the particular electricity supply agreement it would be useful to disable the heat pump at
peak charge times (Block heat pump with digital input)

Block heat pump 1 and 2 parameters table

Differential
Parameter
External Setpoint
Parameter Description (analogue
temperature External
input)
Temperature
Block 1
HP00 Select heat pump 1 lock probe X (=1) x
HP01 Block heat pump 1 setpoint x x
HP02 Block heat pump 1 hysteresis x x
HP03 Heat pump 1 lock maximum dynamic differential x
HP04 Block heat pump 1 dynamic differential setpoint x
Block heat pump 1 dynamic differential proportional
HP05 x
band
Block 2
HP10 Select probe for block heat pump 2 X (=1) x
HP11 Block heat pump 2 setpoint x x
HP12 Block heat pump 2 hysteresis x x

If the external temperature is too low, heat pump performance will not be acceptable; the following are thus available:

Block heat pump Block heat pump based on external temperature

based on external  set a set point (HP01 / HP11) below which the heat pump will be disabled.
 Set the parameters HP00 / HP10 Select probe for block heat pump 1 / 2 = 1
temperature

Block heat pump Block heat pump based on regulation temperature

based on  set a set point (HP01 / HP11) above which the heat pump will be disabled.
 Set the parameters HP00 / HP10 Select probe for block heat pump 1 / 2 > 1
regulation
temperature Value Probe Mode
0 No probe (block pump disabled) -
1 External temperature Heating
2 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature Cooling
3 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature Cooling
4 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature Cooling
5 Recovery exchanger inlet water temperature Cooling
(or external exchanger)
6 Recovery exchanger water outlet temperature Cooling
(or external exchanger)
7 Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature Cooling

Energy Fle
Block heat pump based on external temperature Block heat pump based on regulation temperature
Circuit 1 / Circuit 2 Circuit 1 / Circuit 2

<IMG INFO> IMG INFO

Heat Pump = pompa di calore Heat Pump = pompa di calore

Heat Pump Heat pump state

T ext External temperature
AIn Probe selected by parameter

23.1.1 Block heat pump 1 - setpoint

It is useful to be able to vary the block heat pump temperature according to the external temperature.
This regulator linearly compensates the setpoint for the block heat pump function with a positive or negative differential
value according to the external temperature.
The real setpoint for the block function is calculated by adding this dynamic differential to the value of parameter
HP01 - Block heat pump 1 setpoint

Enabling
The regulator is enabled by setting parameter HP03 - Heat pump 1 lock maximum dynamic differential ≠ 0.
Furthermore, an analogue input must be configured as external temperature.

Positive offset HP03>0 Negative offset HP03<0

<IMG INFO>
202,9
81,95 <IMG INFO>
0 209,9
2 78,35
0,25 0
-83,25 2
-1

Heat Pump = pompa di calore Heat Pump = pompa di calore

23.1.2 Block heat pump from digital input

If a digital input is configured as “Block heat pump” or CL40..CL45 / CL50..CL54=±20 , then when it is activated, the heat
pump will be deactivated.
 24 POWER LIMITATION (FOLDER PAR/PL)
Power limitation parameters can be viewed and set in folder PL (see User Interface and Parameters chapters)

24.1 Operating modes

<IMG INFO>
42,75

The power limitation function:

31,55
1
2
42,35
-39,35
-1

 protects the machine from high and low temperature situations when used with the temperature control probe;
 protects the machine from high pressure situations, when used with the high pressure probe;
 protects the machine from low pressure situations, when used with the low pressure probe;
 prevents the machine from running at a low efficiency level, when used with the external temperature.

Enabling
 Power limitation on external temperature * is enabled by parameter (PL00 - Proportional band for power
limitation on external temperature ≠ 0)
 Power limitation on temperature * is enabled by parameter (PL10 - Proportional band for power limitation on
water/air temperature ≠ 0)
 Power limitation on pressure ** is enabled by parameter (PL20 - Proportional band for power limitation on
pressure ≠ 0)

* The external temperature and temperature power limitation act on the power steps independently of the circuits.
** In the case of machines with two circuits, power limitation is controlled on each circuit separately, as a function of their
parameters.

General conditions of operation

Function active in Cool/Heat mode.
1. In Off the power limitation function is disabled.
2. In Standby the power limitation function is disabled.
3. In On power limitation acts by switching off the power steps in observance of the set safety timings. The same
applies to their turning back on when returning from limitation.
Note: when limitation is active, no special message indicates this on the display
Note: if the control input is not configured or in error, the individual power limitation controllers are disabled.
Apart from probe errors, in this situation there is no special indication on the display

Parameter Parameter Description See diagram

COOL HEAT COOL
HEAT
Power limitation on external temperature proportional band
PL00
External SETPOINT. COOL temperature
External temperature setpoint for power limitation in Cool/Heat.
PL01 PL02 A A’ B B’
External SETPOINT. HEAT temperature
PL11 Select probe for power limitation on water/air temperature See table, parameter PL11
High water temperature setpoint for power limitation
PL12 C
PL12 High temperature SETPOINT
Low water temperature setpoint for power limitation
PL13 D
Low temperature SETPOINT
PL20 Power limitation on pressure proportional band
High pressure setpoint for power limitation
PL21 E E’ E’’
High Pressure SETPOINT
Low pressure setpoint for power limitation
PL22 F F’ F’’
Low Pressure SETPOINT

Table, parameter PL11

Value Probe
0 No probe (regulator disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature
4 Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature
5 Recovery (or external) exchanger water outlet temperature
6 Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature

Energy Fle
Power limitation - 2 compressors

Diagrams A’ B’ E’ E’’ F’ F’’ represent the inhibition/enabling of two power steps (two compressor machine or power stage
compressor);
The pressure or temperature interval between inhibition/enabling of one step and the next depends on the proportional
band and the number of resources present in the circuit.
The switching on/off of steps respects the operating logic set

Power limitation - 4 compressors

The external temperature and temperature power limitation act on the power steps independently of the circuits.

24.2 Power limitation - by external temperature (Cool and Heat)

COOL HEAT
Diagram A Diagram B
for high external temperature for low external temperature PL02 = External SET
PL01 = External SET POINT COOL temperature POINT HEAT temperature
Total of 4 steps
Power Power PL02

SET POINT
PL01 Ext. Temp. HEAT

SET POINT
Ext. Temp. COOL
Step 4
Step 4

Step 3
Step 3

Step 2
Step 2

Step 1
Step 1

Ext. Temp

Ext. Temp
PL00

PL00

NOTE: “POWER” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO BE CUT OUT

Diagram A Diagram B
Total of 2 steps
Power
Power
PL01
SET POINT
Ext. Temp. COOL
Step 2
Step 2

PL02
SET POINT
Ext. Temp. HEAT
Step 1
Step 1

Ext. Temp
Ext. Temp
PL00

PL00

NOTE: “POWER” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO BE CUT OUT

24.3 Power limitation - by temperature (Cool and Heat)

Example of power limitation on temperature in a 4 step machine,

Diagram C Diagram D
for high temperature on the control probe for low temperature on the control probe
(Cool and Heat) (Cool and Heat)
PL12 High temperature SETPOINT PL13 Low temperature SETPOINT
Power Power PL13
SET POINT
PL12 Low.Temp
SET POINT
HIGH temp.
Step 4 Step 4

Step 3
Step 3

Step 2 Step 2

Step 1
Step 1

Low.Temp
High temp.

PL10
PL10 <IMG INFO>
214,2
167,05
<IMG INFO>
209,6
174,25
0
2
-5,05
-175 45

NOTE: “POWER” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO BE CUT OUT

24.4 Power limitation - by high pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
Example of power limitation on high pressure in a 4 step/1 circuit machine

Diagram E
on high pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
PL21 = High Pressure SETPOINT
Power

PL21
SET POINT
HIGH Pressure
Step 4

Step 3

Step 2

Step 1

High Pressure.

PL20

NOTE: “POWER” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO BE CUT

OUT

Example of power limitation on high pressure in a 2 step/2 circuit machine

Diagram E' Diagram E''

on high pressure probe (Cool and Heat) on high pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
PL21 = High Pressure SETPOINT PL21 = High Pressure SETPOINT
Steps to cut out on circuit 1 Steps to cut out on circuit 2
Power Power

PL21 PL21
SET POINT SET POINT
High Pressure High Pressure

Step 2 Step 2

Step 1 Step 1

AI HIGH PRESSURE AI HIGH PRESSURE

PL20 PL20
<IMG INFO>
214,2
<IMG INFO> 144
214,6
144

NOTE: “POWER” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO NOTE: “POWER” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO
BE CUT OUT ON CIRCUIT 1 BE CUT OUT ON CIRCUIT 2
HIGH PRESSURE = high pressure input circuit 1 HIGH PRESSURE = high pressure input circuit 2
24.5 Power limitation - by low pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
Example of power limitation on low pressure in a 4 step/1 circuit machine

Diagram F
on low pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
PL22 Low Pressure SETPOINT

Power PL22
SET POINT
Low Pressure

Step 4

Step 3

Step 2

Step 1

Low Pressure

PL20
<IMG INFO>
225 6

NOTE: “POWER” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO BE CUT

OUT

Example of power limitation on low pressure in a 2 step/2 circuit machine

Diagram F' Diagram F''

on low pressure probe (Cool and Heat) on low pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
PL22 Low Pressure SETPOINT PL22 Low Pressure SETPOINT

Steps to cut out on circuit 1 Steps to cut out on circuit 2

Power Power

Step 2 Step 2

PL22 PL22
SET POINT SET POINT
Low Pressure Low Pressure

Step 1 Step 1

LOW PRESSURE LOW PRESSURE

PL20 PL20
<IMG INFO> <IMG INFO>
222,7 222,15

NOTE: “POWER” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO BE NOTE: “POWER” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO BE
CUT OUT ON CIRCUIT 1 CUT OUT ON CIRCUIT 2
LOW PRESSURE = low pressure input circuit 1 LOW PRESSURE = low pressure input circuit 2
24.6 Power limitation to 50%

Function enabled by configuring:

 a digital input as 50% power limitation or by setting one of parameters CL40…CL45 = ±21
 or an analogue input when configured as digital input CL46…CL54 = ±21;

Activating the digital input halves the availability of power steps, thus reducing energy consumption.
The function may also be activated by the FreeCooling controller, in certain situations (see FreeCooling section): its
purpose is always to promote energy saving.

Power limitation to 50% is independent of the forced power stages described above.
The limitations act in parallel, and the number of steps limited is the maximum of the two limitation functions.

With the SB600 this results in a large number of possible situations: the first column shows the power steps normally
available (without alarms or blocks, a value which depends exclusively on how the SB600 is configured, not on the
particular situation at any given time), while the second column shows the residual power steps with 50% power limitation
active.

Number of power steps Number of power steps available with

Notes
configured limitation to 50% active
1 1 No effect
2 1
3 2
4 2

By step we mean the power equivalent of a compressor power stage; the selection of the step is subordinate to the
compressor controller mechanism (e.g. limitation to 50% makes no distinction between the power stages of different
circuits).
In other words, the selection of which power step to turn off is made by the power stage on/off logic described in the
chapter Compressors.

Example 1
SB device configured with two power steps, one per circuit (= one compressor per circuit): the activation of the input has
no effect if only one compressor is running at the time; if the input stays active, it will affect any request for activation of
the compressor of the other circuit (it will impede it).

Example 2
SB device configured with four power steps (one power stage compressor per circuit): activation of the input has no effect
if only 1 or 2 power stages are active at the time (whether both or only one compressor is running), as for the previous
example. It will have an effect if 3 or 4 power stages are active and 1 or 2 steps are turned off according to the
compressor controller logic (either both compressors or only one remains active).

As fro other forms of limitation, the step off/on sequence is subordinate to the safety timings.

The function has no effect on other resources, and is not indicated on the display in any way.
25 TIME BANDS (FOLDER PAR/TE)

Energy Flex allows for differentiated operation based on the time and the days of the week.
In fact, you can “define” time bands (e.g. in order to save energy at night, when less energy is requested by the system), by
programming specific “profiles” and “events” throughout the course of the week.
You can define the hour and minute of each event, at which point a new “time band” triggers the activation of a specific
mode (ON or STANDBY) and specific Cool / Heat setpoints.

The Time Band control parameters can be viewed and configured in the tE folder (see User interface section and
Parameters section).

Enabling
The function may be enabled using parameter tE00 - Enable time band operation

Parameter Description
0 1
Time bands Time bands
Enable tE00 Enable time band operation
disabled enabled

General conditions of operation

 tE00 - Enable time band operation = 1
 The RTC must be present (models /C)
 The time must first be checked and if necessary adjusted (see paragraph on How to adjust the clock (CL), in the
User Interface section (folder PAr/UI)

NOTE: This DOES NOT affect the Heat/Cool mode change but only the Cool and Heat setpoint values defined by the
indicated parameters, as well as the mode change from ON to STANDBY and vice versa.
The mode change procedure always occurs in accordance with the basic regulation times and rules.

Time Band Operation

Up to 3 profiles are available for each day of the week. They may be selected from the following parameters:

Parameter Description 1 2 3
tE01 Select profile, day 1 (Monday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE02 Select profile, day 2 (Tuesday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE03 Select profile, day 3 (Wednesday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE04 Select profile, day 4 (Thursday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE05 Select profile, day 5 (Friday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE06 Select profile, day 6 (Saturday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE07 Select profile, day 7 (Sunday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3

Up to 4 events can be associated with each profile – see the following table:

Description Description Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3

tE10..tE14 tE38..tE42 tE66..tE70
Hour / Minutes tE10..tE11 tE38..tE39 tE66..tE67
ON/Standby
EVENT 1 operating tE12 tE40 tE68
mode
Cool setpoint tE13 tE41 tE69
Heat setpoint tE14 tE42 tE70
tE17..tE21 tE45..tE49 tE73..tE77
Hour / Minutes tE17...tE18 tE45..tE46 tE73..tE74
ON/Standby
EVENT 2 operating tE19 tE47 tE75
mode
Cool setpoint tE20 tE48 tE76
Heat setpoint tE21 tE49 tE77
tE24..tE28 tE52..tE56 tE80..tE84
Hour / Minutes tE24...tE25 tE52..tE53 tE80..tE81
ON/Standby
EVENT 3 operating tE26 tE54 tE82
mode
Cool setpoint tE27 tE55 tE83
Heat setpoint tE28 tE56 tE84
tE31..tE35 tE59..tE63 tE87..tE91
Hour / Minutes tE31...tE32 tE59..tE60 tE87..tE88
ON/Standby
EVENT 4 operating tE33 tE61 tE89
mode
Cool setpoint tE34 tE62 tE90
Heat setpoint tE35 tE63 tE91

Energy Fle
Each event will have
 a start time defined by 2 parameters
o event start hour
o event start minute
 operating mode
o ON
o Standby
Energy Flex will enter ON or standby when the time coincides with the start of the time band
 Cool mode temperature controller setpoint
 Heat mode temperature controller setpoint
The Cool mode setpoint will be active with Energy Flex in Cool mode when the time coincides with the predefined event
(start of the time band).
Similarly, the Heat mode setpoint will be active with Energy Flex in Heat mode when the time coincides with the start of
the time band
NOTE: the Energy Flex device does NOT change mode but will use the setpoints indicated if in Cool/Heat mode

Example
26 RECOVERY (FOLDER PAR/RC)
The heat recovery controller makes it possible to utilize, under certain conditions, a part of the heat generated by the
condensation (only in Cool mode) to heat or preheat, for example, domestic hot water, water in a secondary system, air in
specific environments, etc.
This notably improves the overall yield and efficiency of the system, allowing for significant energy savings.

The technology adopted consists of enabling the refrigerant to release heat into the water of a recovery circuit, diverting
the flow of refrigerant itself (at the outlet of the compressors in one or both circuits) into a "recovery" exchanger
arranged for this purpose.

The FreeCooling control parameters can be viewed and configured in the rC folder (see User interface section and
Parameters section).

The following must be configured:

 one digital output as Circuit 1 Recovery Valve and/or one digital output as Circuit 2 Recovery Valve
 one digital output as external pump
NOTE. The pump is activated if the recovery is enabled and if the device is in Cool mode, see also the External pump
section

The Recovery regulation controls a Recovery valve (one per circuit) which diverts the refrigerant at the compressor outlet
to the Recovery exchanger and the Recovery water pump, which coincides with the external circuit water pump.

Enabling
Recovery can be enabled for one or more circuits by appropriately setting parameter rC00 -Select Recovery mode.

Table 1 – Parameter rC00

Par. Description Value

0 1 2 3
Recovery on
Recovery Recovery Recovery on Recovery on
Enabling rC00 both circuits
mode selection disabled circuit 1 circuit 2
1 and 2

The following must also be true for Recovery enabling:

 an analogue input must be enabled/configured for Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature. If
this input is not enabled or if it is in error, the controller is disabled.
 if a digital input has been configured to enable Recovery, it must be active (a digital input need not necessarily
exist for this purpose, but if it does exist it must be active). This optional digital input has an effect on the
Recovery of all circuits enabled for this purpose.

Note. It is not strictly necessary for the water pump to be configured for Recovery (PE00 = 2), for example it could also be
configured for continuous operation. However, the operation described in this section for the Recovery water pump
obviously refers to the case PE00 = 2.

General conditions of operation

 In Off the Recovery is switched off, the Recovery valves and the Recovery water pump are always switched off
immediately.
 In Standby and Heat modes the Recovery is switched off, the Recovery valves are always switched off
immediately, the Recovery water pump is normally off but, as described in the dedicated controller, it is
switched on at the same time as the external exchanger heaters (antifreeze).
 In Cool mode, in addition to the main control specified in subsequent paragraphs, the following situations are
also possible (with priority given to the main control itself):
o the Recovery water pump is always active when the Recovery controller is enabled;
o the Recovery valves and Recovery water pump are switched off immediately in the event of shutdown
alarms (refer to the alarms table).

Note: If an automatic reset flow switch alarm occurs, the pump is kept on to allow it to be reset; if the alarm becomes
manual reset, the pump is switched off.

Generally speaking, any circuit not affected by the recovery operates independently, and is not affected by any recovery
enabled on the other circuit.
If FE10=1 (single condensation) and rC00 is set to 1 or 2, the device always behaves as if rC00=1 or 2, without error
messages.

Energy Fle
26.1 Recovery Regulation

26.1.1 Recovery switch-on

Recovery is switched on (= at least one Recovery valve switched on) if and only if all the following conditions have been
satisfied:
 recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature is “sufficiently low” in relation to the Recovery
setpoint, see diagrams A/B
 the specific circuit must have operated continuously in Cool mode without Recovery for at least a time equal to
parameter rc04 Minimum operating time (if FE10 = 1, this requirement translates into "at least one circuit" must
have operated continuously in Cool mode without Recovery for at least a time equal to rC04)
 the Recovery (or external) exchanger outlet water temperature, only and exclusively in the event that there is an
analogue input configured for the purpose, must be less than parameter rC06 - Recovery switch-off
temperature set point
 the Pressure of the external exchanger or the High pressure input in the specific circuit, only and exclusively in
the event that there are analogue inputs configured for the purpose, must be less than parameter rC07 -
Recovery switch-off pressure set point

26.1.2 Recovery switch-off

The Recovery is switched off (= at least one Recovery valve is switched off) if
 the Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature is “sufficiently high”, e.g. it reaches the
temperature corresponding to Recovery switch-off on a specific circuit see diagrams A/B;
Note: the Recovery is actually switched off only if it stayed on for at least a time equal to rC04 -Minimum
operating time

Diagram A Diagram B
rC00=1 or 2 rC00=3
rC00=3 with FE10-Enable single condensation =1 rC00=3 with FE10-Enable single condensation = 0
1 circuit / 2 circuits with single condensation 2 circuits
Gradini
recupero Gradini
Set-point
recupero recupero
Set-point
rC01 recupero
rc01

Gradino 2 rC03

Gradino 1
Gradino 1
rC02

temperatura temperatura
rC02 acqua ingresso rC02 acqua ingresso
scambiatore recupero scambiatore recupero

Diagram A Step 1
 rC00= 1 or 2: actuation of the Recovery valve, the only valve in single-circuit systems (or with Recovery on one
circuit only)
 If FE10 = 1, there is only one step, with simultaneous switch-on of both valves.

Diagram B Step 1
 rC00= 3 one of the two valves in two-circuit systems, the selection depends on the state of the compressors:
the valve corresponding to the circuit with the largest number of active compressor steps is switched on first;
given the same conditions, the Recovery valve of circuit 1 will be switched on first.
Diagram B Step 2
 denotes switch-on of the second Recovery valve.
26.2 Behaviour of the Compressors during recovery

26.2.1 Recovery switch-on

Compressors not active
See diagram C

Compressors active
See diagram D

If one or more compressors in the circuit are active, recovery switch-on for the same circuit is "gradual", e.g. it follows a
specific sequence in order to prevent excessive pressure build-up in the external exchangers.

Essentially this means that, for a certain time (rC05 - Power phase-splitting time for recovery switch-on/switch-off)
before and after the switch-on of the Recovery valve, the compressor power of the specific circuit is "split": in practice a
maximum of 1 power step is actuated per circuit.
Notes.
 If all the conditions for Recovery switch-on are satisfied, with the exception of the rC04 time, the recovery
switch-on will occur as soon as such time has elapsed.
 The external exchanger fans are controlled by their controllers until the power phase-splitting in the associated
circuit finishes (in the first case) or until the recovery valve in the associated circuit is switched on (in the second
case), and are then forced OFF until the end of the recovery.
 If FE10 = 1 and rc00=3 (diagram A), the recovery is switched ON on both circuits and the switching time of
the valves coincides.
 If FE10 = 0 and rc00=3 (diagram B), the recovery is switched ON on both circuits and the valves (if the
conditions for Recovery switch-on are satisfied in both circuits) are enabled with rc04 delay (rc04 MUST be
higher than rc05).

Diagram C Diagram D
Compressors NOT active Compressors active
attivazione
COOL recupero
attivazione
COOL recupero
ON
Compressore Circuito i
OFF
ON
Compressore Circuito i
OFF ON
Parzializzazione
OFF potenza Circuito i

ON
ON Valvola recupero Circuito i
OFF
Valvola recupero Circuito i
OFF
rC04 rC05 rC05
rC04

ON Ventole scambiatore a perdere Ventole scambiatore a perdere

in regolazione standard in Cool forzate OFF
ON Ventole scambiatore a perdere Ventole scambiatore a perdere OFF

OFF in regolazione standard in Cool forzate OFF tempo

tempo

<IMG INFO>

<IMG INFO>
26.2.2 Recovery switch-off

Compressors not active

See diagram E

Compressors active
See diagram F

If one or more compressors in the circuit are active, recovery switch-off for the same circuit is "gradual", e.g. it follows a
specific sequence in order to prevent excessive pressure build-up in the external exchanger.
Essentially this means that, for a certain time (rC05 - Power phase-splitting time for recovery switch-on/switch-off)
before and after the Recovery valve switch-off, the compressor power of the specific circuit is "split":

Diagram E Diagram F
Compressors NOT active Compressors active
disattivazione diaattivazione fine fase
recupero recupero = fine fase recupero Recupero recupero recupero

ON Compressore Circuito i
ON Compressore Circuito i
Compressore Circuito i OFF
OFF

ON
Parzializzazione
OFF potenza Circuito i

ON
Valvola recupero Circuito i ON
OFF Valvola recupero Circuito i
OFF
rC04
rC04 rC05 rC05

ON Ventole scambiatore a perdere Ventole scambiatore a perdere ON Ventole scambiatore a perdere Ventole scambiatore a perdere
forzate OFF in regolazione standard in Cool forzate OFF in regolazione standard in Cool
OFF OFF
tempo tempo

IMG INFO

The external exchanger fans are forced OFF until the recovery valve in the associated circuit is switched off, then the
standard controller reassumes control.

Notes
The recovery switch-off is IMMEDIATE (even when the compressors are on, and even if time rC04 has not elapsed) if at
least one of the following conditions is satisfied:
the Recovery (or external) exchanger outlet water temperature, only and exclusively in the event that there is an analogue
input configured for the purpose, becomes greater than or equal to parameter rC06 - Recovery switch-off temperature
set point. If two circuits are active, they both exit the Recovery.
the Water recovery temperature, only and exclusively in the event that there is an analogue input configured for the
purpose, becomes greater than or equal to parameter rC06 - Recovery switch-off temperature set point. If two circuits
are active, they both exit the Recovery.
the Pressure of the external exchanger or the High pressure inlet in the specific circuit, only and exclusively in the event
that there are analogue inputs configured for the purpose, becomes greater than or equal to parameter rC07 - Recovery
switch-off pressure set point. Only the corresponding circuit exits the recovery (both if FE10 = 1).
 27 ALARMS AND DIAGNOSTICS (FOLDER PAR/AL)
Alarms The “Energy SB600” performs full installation diagnostics and reports a variety of alarms.

Parameters for alarm activation and resetting can be viewed and configured in folder
AL (parameters AL00…AL82) (see User Interface and Parameters section).

Automatic reset Automatic reset

For automatic reset alarms, normal operation is restored as soon as the cause of the alarm has been removed.

Manual reset Manual reset

Alarms can be manually reset by pressing and releasing the [UP + DOWN] keys
Normal operation can only be reset
 by pressing a key on the instrument keyboard and
 Only if the cause of the alarm has been removed.

Alarm acknowledgment
Alarms can be acknowledged by pressing any key.
NOTE: acknowledging an alarm has no effect on the alarm generated other than on the alarm LED, which goes
from fixed to flashing.
<IMG INFO>
42,6
29,75
1
2
51
28 35

An alarm has two effects:

 It blocks the utilities concerned
 Message on display alternates with a message on the main display

The next two sections summarize alarms grouped by type (digital or analogue).
Alarm code and alarm parameters are in bold (folder PAr/AL)

For some alarms, the signal can be excluded for a preset interval, set in the relative parameter.

No. interventions time

The number of interventions per sampling period is defined in parameter AL00 – Time interval for alarm event count

No. interventions For some alarms, the number of events occurring are counted: if, in a period of time defined in AL00 a threshold set in a
time parameter is exceeded, the alarm changes from automatic to manual reset.

Alarms are counted every AL00/32 (minutes) = sampling time.

AL00 and hence also AL00/32 is expressed in minutes.

yyy
;;;
Example: AL10-High pressure alarm circuit 1: if the number of events per hour is set to AL10, for the alarm to change
from automatic to manual reset, the count must reach the number set in AL10.

Example AL10=3
AUTO M

Counter 0 1 2 3=AL10

ON
Alarm
OFF

1
Events
0

1 event 1 event 1 event

Sampling

AL00/32 AL00/32 AL00/32 AL00/32 Time

<IMG INFO>

Event =No. Events

A: automatic reset Sampling AL00/32 sampling time 1
M: manual reset Time: time 2
Alarm: alarm 3 (=AL10)

N.B.:
 if, during the sample time AL10/32 several alarm events of the same type occur (e.g. High pressure alarm
circuit 1), only 1 event will be counted
 If the alarm condition is active for several sample times, only 1 event is counted.
 If the alarm event is active for a period greater than AL00, the counter resets to zero.
Digital alarms
27.1.1 Digital Alarms

Alarm Name of alarm Bypass Bypass Automatic Manual Exit alarm Number of
code activation time alarm alarm deactivation interventions
event activation activation time per sample time
time time
Er01 High pressure None Not Not present Not present Not present AL10
alarm present
circuit 1
Er02 High pressure None Not Not present Not present Not present AL10
alarm present
circuit 2
Er05 Low pressure Circuit AL11 Not present Not present Not present AL12
alarm compressor
circuit 1 activated or
reversal of 4-
way valve
(NOTE 1)
Or deactivation
of circuit 1
pump-down
valve
(NOTE 1b)
Er06 Low pressure Circuit AL11 Not present Not present Not present AL12
alarm compressor
circuit 2 activated or
reversal of 4-
way valve
(NOTE 1)
Or deactivation
of circuit 2
pump-down
valve
(NOTE 1b)
Er20 Internal circuit Internal circuit AL14 AL15 AL16 AL15 Not present
(NOTA 2) flow meter alarm pump
activation
(One of the
two pumps)

Er25 External flow External circuit AL17 AL18 AL19 AL18 Not present
(NOTA 2) switch alarm pump
activation
Er10 Compressor 1 Compressor 1 AL20 Not present Not present Not present AL21
thermal switch switched on
Er11 Compressor 2 Compressor 2 AL20 Not present Not present Not present AL21
thermal switch switched on
Er12 Compressor 3 Compressor 3 AL20 Not present Not present Not present AL21
thermal switch switched on
Er13 Compressor 4 Compressor 4 AL20 Not present Not present Not present AL21
thermal switch switched on
Er15 Compressor 1 oil Compressor 1 AL22 Not present Not present Not present AL23
(NOTA 2) pressure switch switched on
Er16 Compressor 2 oil Compressor 2 AL22 Not present Not present Not present AL23
(NOTA 2) pressure switch switched on
Er17 Compressor 3 oil Compressor 3 AL22 Not present Not present Not present AL23
(NOTA 2) pressure switch switched on
Er18 Compressor 4 oil Compressor 4 AL22 Not present Not present Not present AL23
(NOTA 2) pressure switch switched on
Er40 Internal None Not Not present Not present Not present AL24
exchanger fan present
thermal switch
Er41 External None Not Not present Not present Not present AL25
exchanger fan present
thermal switch
Circuit 1
Er42 External None Not Not present Not present Not present AL25
exchanger fan present
thermal switch
Circuit 2
Alarm Name of alarm Bypass Bypass Automatic Manual Exit alarm Number of
code activation time alarm alarm deactivation interventions
event activation activation time per sample time
time time
Er43 External None Not Not present Not present Not present AL25
FreeCooling fan present
thermal switch

Er21 Internal circuit None Not Not present Not present Not present AL26
pump 1 thermal present
switch
Er22 Internal circuit None Not Not present Not present Not present AL26
pump 2 thermal present
switch
Er26 External circuit None Not Not present Not present Not present AL27
pump 1 thermal present
switch
Er27 External circuit None Not Not present Not present Not present AL27
pump 2 thermal present
switch
Er50 Internal None Not Not present Not present Not present Not present
exchanger present
electric heater
thermal switch
Er51 Internal None Not Not present Not present Not present Not present
exchanger present
electric heater
thermal switch 2
Er56 Auxiliary output None Not Not present Not present Not present Not present
alarm present

(NOTE 1) The bypass is activated by the reversal of the 4-way valve only if at least one compressor is on

(NOTE 1b) The low pressure alarm of a given circuit is not active if the pump-down valve of the same circuit is active
(valve closed, pump-down in progress)

(NOTE 2) The alarm is enabled only if the associated resource (e.g. a given compressor or pump) is active
27.1.1.1 Flow switch alarm
Management of digital flow switch alarms Er20 & Er25 differs from that of other digital alarms: alarm events are not
considered, only the activation time of the digital input is taken into account. See the following examples

Example of external circuit pump automatic reset flow

switch alarm
Alarm generated with activation of digital input D.I. during
bypass;
the count AL15 - Flow switch activation time for internal
circuit automatic alarm
only starts when AL14 - Low switch bypass time after internal
circuit water pump enabled is decremented to 0.

WATER
PUMP ON

OFF

Time

D.I.
ON

OFF

Time

Automatic
Alarm ON

OFF

Time
AL14 AL15 AL15
<IMG INFO>

Example 2 of external circuit pump automatic reset flow switch alarm

Alarm generated with start of next alarm event after the bypass has elapsed

WATER
PUMP ON

OFF

Time

D.I.
ON

OFF

Time

Automatic
Alarm ON

OFF

Time
AL14 AL15
<IMG INFO>
Example of external circuit pump manual reset flow switch alarm
AL15 - Flow switch activation time for internal circuit automatic alarm
AL16 - Flow switch activation time for internal circuit manual alarm

D.I
ON

OFF

Time

ON
Automatic
Alarm

OFF

Time
AL15

ON
Manual
Alarm

OFF

Time
AL16
<IMG INFO>
Analogue alarms
27.1.2 Analogue Alarms

NOTES

(NOTE 1) if No. interventions time = 1, the alarm is always of the manual reset type.
(NOTE 2) Alarm bypass is active in heating mode only.

Automatic No.
Bypass activation
Alarm code Name of alarm Bypass time SET activation Hysteresis alarm time interventions Control probe
event
(NOTE 1) time
High pressure
High pressure probe
Er03 (analogue) None None AL40 AL41 Not present AL42
Circuit 1
Circuit 1
High pressure
High pressure probe
Er04 (analogue) None None AL40 AL41 Not present AL42
Circuit 2
Circuit 2
A circuit 1 compressor
is switched on
Low pressure or reversal of the 4-way
Low pressure probe
Er07 (analogue) valve AL43 Al44 AL45 Not present AL46
Circuit 1
Circuit 1
Or deactivation of circuit
1 pump-down valve
A circuit 1 compressor
switched on
Low pressure or reversal of the 4-way
Low pressure probe
Er08 (analogue) valve AL43 Al44 AL45 Not present AL46
Circuit 2
Circuit 2
Or deactivation of circuit
2 pump-down valve
On/Off (local or
Internal exchanger
Internal circuit remote), input in heat
Er30 AL50 AL51 AL52 Not present A53 water/air outlet
antifreeze mode
temperature
(NOTE 2)
On/Off (local or
External circuit remote), input in heat External exchanger outlet
Er31 AL54 AL55 AL56 Not present A57
antifreeze mode water temperature
(NOTE 2)
Internal exchanger
Automatic
Er35 High temperature None None AL47 AL48 AL49 water/air outlet
reset
temperature
 27.1.3 Alarms Table

 The alarm signal consists of a code, the format being “Ernn” (nn is a 2-figure number identifying the type of alarm, e.g. Er00, Er25, Er39….).
 When more than one alarm occurs at the same time, the one with the lowest number will be shown first (e.g. simultaneous alarms Er00 and Er01). Er00 will be shown alternating
between the display and the main screen
 If the measurement on the main display is incorrect, in the event of an alarm, the alternate alarm code will alternate with “----“.

All possible alarms are listed in the table below with their respective codes and the relative utilities blocked:

Alarm table key

column
Alarm code NOTE: codes are listed in increasing order (Er00, Er01) and
some numbers are “skipped” (Er06 does not exist)
Name of
alarm
Notes CMP 1/2 Compressor 1/power step 2
PUMP 1/2 Pump 1/2
temperature D digital
alarm A analogue
See digital alarms table
Reset AUTO automatic
OFF COMP1 OFF compressor 1
OFF COMP2 OFF compressor 2
OFF COMP3 OFF compressor 3
OFF COMP4 OFF compressor 4
UTILITY OFF (1) When used for temperature control
OFF (2) When used for temperature control and/or
antifreeze
OFF RES1 OFF heater 1
OFF RES2 OFF heater 2
Alarms Table

PUMP-DOWN VALVES

RECIRCULATION FAN
COMPRESSORS AND

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT

RECOVERY VALVES
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
EXCHANGER FAN
Digital/Analogue

FreeCooling FAN

FreeCooling FAN
Name of Alarm

EXCHANGER

EXCHANGER
Alarm Code

Alarm type

AUXILIARY
EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL
INTERNAL

HEATERS

HEATERS
OUTPUT

BOILER
PUMP

PUMP
Notes
Er00 General alarm D AUTO OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Er01 High pressure (digital) circuit 1 D Events OFF (1) OFF (§)
Er02 High pressure (digital) circuit 2 D Events OFF (1) OFF (§)
Er03 High pressure (analogue) circuit 1 A Events OFF (1) OFF (§)
Er04 High pressure (analogue) circuit 2 A Events OFF (1) OFF (§)
Er05 Low pressure (digital) D Events OFF (1) OFF (2) OFF OFF OFF (2)
Er07 Low pressure (analogue) circuit 1 A Events OFF (1) OFF (2) OFF OFF OFF (2)
Er08 Low pressure (analogue) circuit 2 A Events OFF (1) OFF (2) OFF OFF OFF (2)
Er09 No refrigerant A Events OFF OFF (2) OFF OFF OFF (2)
OFF
Er10 Compressor 1 thermal switch CMP 1 D Events
COMP1
OFF
Er11 Compressor 2 thermal switch CMP 2 D Events
COMP2
OFF
Er12 Compressor 3 thermal switch CMP 3 D Events
COMP3
OFF
Er13 Compressor 4 thermal switch CMP 4 D Events
COMP4
OFF
Er15 Compressor 1 oil pressure switch CMP 1 D Events
COMP1
OFF
Er16 Compressor 2 oil pressure switch CMP 2 D Events
COMP2
OFF
Er17 Compressor 3 oil pressure switch CMP 3 D Events
COMP3
OFF
Er18 Compressor 4 oil pressure switch CMP 4 D Events
COMP4
OFF for
manual
Er20 Internal circuit flow switch D Time OFF OFF OFF OFF
reset
alarm
OFF
Er21 Internal circuit pump 1 thermal switch Pump 1 D Events OFF (3) OFF (3) OFF (3) OFF (3)
Pump 1
 PUMP-DOWN VALVES

RECIRCULATION FAN
COMPRESSORS AND

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT

RECOVERY VALVES
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
EXCHANGER FAN
Digital/Analogue

FreeCooling FAN

FreeCooling FAN
Name of Alarm

EXCHANGER

EXCHANGER
Alarm Code

Alarm type

AUXILIARY
EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL
INTERNAL

HEATERS

HEATERS
OUTPUT

BOILER
PUMP

PUMP
Notes
OFF
Er22 Internal circuit pump 2 thermal switch Pump 2 D Events OFF (3) OFF (3) OFF (3) OFF (3)
Pump 2
OFF for OFF for
manual manual
Er25 External circuit flow switch D Time OFF OFF
reset reset
alarm alarm
Er26 External circuit pump 1 thermal switch D Events OFF OFF OFF
Er27 External circuit pump 2 thermal switch D Events OFF OFF OFF
Er30 Internal circuit antifreeze A AUTO OFF OFF OFF OFF
Er31 External circuit antifreeze A AUTO OFF OFF
Er35 High temperature A AUTO OFF

Er40 Internal exchanger fan safety thermal switch D Events OFF OFF OFF

OFF
Er41 External exchanger fan thermal switch circuit 1 D Events OFF (2) OFF (1)
(2)
OFF
Er42 External exchanger fan thermal switch circuit 2 D Events OFF (2) OFF (1)
(2)

Er42 External FreeCooling fan thermal switch D Events OFF OFF

Er45 Error clock faulty AUTO

Er46 Error set clock AUTO
Er47 LAN communication error AUTO
OFF
Er50 Internal exchanger electric heater thermal switch 1 D AUTO RES.1

OFF
Er51 Internal exchanger electric heater thermal switch 2 D AUTO RES.2

Er56 Auxiliary output thermal switch D AUTO OFF

Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature probe
Er60 AUTO See Probe Errors Table
faulty
 PUMP-DOWN VALVES

RECIRCULATION FAN
COMPRESSORS AND

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT

RECOVERY VALVES
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
EXCHANGER FAN
Digital/Analogue

FreeCooling FAN

FreeCooling FAN
Name of Alarm

EXCHANGER

EXCHANGER
Alarm Code

Alarm type

AUXILIARY
EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL
INTERNAL

HEATERS

HEATERS
OUTPUT

BOILER
PUMP

PUMP
Notes
Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature probe
faulty, or
Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
Er61 AUTO See Probe Errors Table
probe faulty, or
Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
probe faulty
Circuit 1 external exchanger temperature probe faulty, or
Er62 AUTO See Probe Errors Table
Circuit 2 external exchanger temperature probe faulty

Er63 AUTO See Probe Errors Table

External exchanger inlet water temperature probe faulty

Er64 AUTO See Probe Errors Table

External exchanger outlet water temperature probe faulty

Er65 AUTO See Probe Errors Table

Water recovery temperature sensor faulty
Display probe
Er67 AUTO See Probe Errors Table
(temperature / pressure) faulty
Er68 External temperature probe faulty AUTO See Probe Errors Table
High pressure input circuit 1 faulty, or
Er69 AUTO See Probe Errors Table
High pressure input circuit 2 faulty
Low pressure input circuit 1 faulty, and/or
Er70 AUTO See Probe Errors Table
Low pressure input circuit 2 faulty
Er73 Dynamic setpoint input failure AUTO See Probe Errors Table
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1 faulty, and/or
Er74 AUTO See Probe Errors Table
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 2 faulty
External exchanger pressure circuit 1 faulty, and/or
Er75 AUTO See Probe Errors Table
External exchanger pressure circuit 2 faulty
Er80 Configuration error AUTO

Er81 Compressor hours of operation exceeded message CMP Manual OFF OFF

Er85 Internal circuit pump hours of operation exceeded signal PUMP Manual

Er86 External circuit pump hours of operation exceeded signal PUMP Manual

Er90 Alarm history records exceeded message Manual

(1) the resources of the associated circuit are switched off
(2) the resources of the associated circuit are switched off if separate condensation, all resources if single condensation. In digital and analogue low pressure alarms, the external exchanger fans
are switched off only if the alarm is of the manual reset type
(3) if the device is configured for two internal water pumps, the resources are switched off only if both thermal switch alarms (pump 1 and pump 2) are active
(§) if manual reset

Probe errors table

Temperature probe error Use Lock machine Notes

Water/air inlet temperature Cool / Heat temperature controllers (proportional and differential) YES
Internal exchanger Cut-off YES
The fan switches
ON/OFF depending
Recirculation fan NO
on the compressor
state
Internal circuit water pump, antifreeze YES
and/or
Internal circuit heater, antifreeze
Antifreeze with heat pump YES
Heat pump lock YES
Power limitation NO
The alarm is
Low refrigerant alarm NO
disabled
Water/air outlet temperature
YES
Internal exchanger
Water outlet temperature probe
YES
Internal exchanger circuit 1
Water outlet temperature probe
YES
Internal exchanger circuit 2
External exchanger temperature Cool / Heat temperature controllers (proportional and differential) YES
circuit 1 External exchanger fans NO
and/or Antifreeze with external circuit heater YES
External exchanger temperature Auxiliary output NO
circuit 2 Defrost, input and output NO
Heat pump lock
and/or YES
Power limitation
Water inlet temperature Cool / Heat temperature controllers (proportional and differential) YES
external exchanger Antifreeze with external circuit heater YES
Auxiliary output NO
Recovery NO
Heat pump lock YES
Power limitation NO
Water outlet temperature
YES
external exchanger
External temperature Cool / Heat temperature controllers (differential) YES
Cut-off NO
Dynamic setpoint NO
Internal circuit water pump, antifreeze YES
Temperature probe error Use Lock machine Notes
Internal integrated heater, differential NO
Auxiliary output NO
External antifreeze heater YES
Boiler, differential NO
Heat pump lock YES
Power limitation NO
Defrost, compensation NO
Internal NO
Input for dynamic setpoint Dynamic setpoint NO
Temperature display Display NO
Pressure probe error Use Lock machine Notes
High pressure input circuit 1 External exchanger fans
YES
and/or Defrost, input and output
High pressure input circuit 2 Power limitation
Low pressure input circuit 1 External exchanger fans
YES
and/or Defrost, input and output
Low pressure input circuit 2 Power limitation
Input for dynamic setpoint Dynamic setpoint NO
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1
and/or YES
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 2 External exchanger fans
External exchanger pressure circuit 1 External exchanger fans
and/or YES
Defrost, input and output
External exchanger pressure circuit 2
Pressure display Display NO
27.2 Energy Flex - Alarm log
The alarm log, saved using the Device Manager software, is a file in TXT format: it can be opened in any text editor
program and can also be imported into Excel for easier viewing.

Guidelines for correct interpretation are provided below:

 Line 1: heading with the name of the Device Manager model used to download data from the device or the
MFK.
 Line 2: date and time the data download took place.
 Line 3: column headings.

“Number” column:
incremental and circular index (FIFO); the alarm with index Eu00 is the most recent, while the Euxx index (max. xx: 98)
indicates the oldest.

“Code” column:
lists the device alarm codes (as shown on the device display).

“Type” column:
indicates whether the alarm is reset automatically or manually.
The example below shows the recording of an alarm which changes from automatic reset to manual reset. The manual
alarm reset was carried out from the functions menu, not by switching the device off and on again, because the alarm end
date and time is also shown.

Eu56 Er20 Reset Manual State Closed 21.52 07-feb 21.52 07-feb
Eu57 Er20 Reset Automatic State Closed 21.52 07-feb 21.52 07-feb

“State” column:
indicates whether the alarm is still present (Open) or has been reset (Closed).

“Time Start” and “Date Start” columns:

indicate the alarm start time and date.

“Time End” and “Date End” columns:

indicate the alarm end time and date.
A lack of data (as shown below) indicates that the alarm is still ongoing.
If the device is switched off with a manual reset alarm, the log will not record this alarm reset procedure.

Number Code Type State Time Date Time Date

Start Start End End
Eu00 Er68 Reset Automatic State Open 20.20 04-mar --:-- --/--
Eu01 Er62 Reset Automatic State Open 20.20 04-mar --:-- --/--
Eu02 Er61 Reset Automatic State Open 20.20 04-mar --:-- --/--

For manual reset alarms, the reset date and time correspond to the alarm reset and not to the change in the status of the
digital input.

Eu56 Er20 Reset Manual State Closed 21.52 07-feb 21.52 07-feb
Eu57 Er20 Reset Automatic State Closed 21.52 07-feb 21.52 07-feb
Eu58 Er20 Reset Manual State Closed 21.51 07-feb 21.51 07-feb

Energy Fle
28 PARAMETERS (PAR)
Parameters are used to configure every aspect of Energy Flex;

They can be modified using:

 The Multi Function key (MFK)
 Keys on the SB600 front panel / SKP 10 terminal / SKW22(L) / SKP22(L) terminals
 PC and DeviceManager software

The following sections analyze each parameter, divided into categories (folders), in detail.

Each folder is designated with a label showing 2 figures (example: CF, UI, etc).

All parameters are described in the Parameters / visibility table

UI parameters are also described in the paragraph User interface (UI) parameters

Label Meaning of label Parameters

folder
CL Configuration Local Local I/O configuration
CE Configuration Local I/O Expansion Configuration
Cr Configuration remote terminal Remote terminal I/O configuration
CF ConFiguration Configuration
Ui User interface User interface
tr thermoregulation Temperature control
St States (Operating modes) Operating states
CP ComPressors Compressor
PI Pump (Internal) Internal circuit water pump
FI Fan (Internal) Recirculation fans (internal)
FE Fan (External) External exchanger fans (external)
PE Pump (External) External exchanger pump
Hi Electric Heaters (Internal) Internal exchanger electric heaters
HE Electric Heaters (External) External exchanger electric heaters
HA Auxiliary Output Auxiliary output
br boiler Boiler
FC FreeCooling Internal
dF deFrost Defrost
dS dynamic Setpoint Dynamic setpoint
Ad Adaptive Adaptive (adaptive function)
AF AntiFreeze Antifreeze
HP Heat Pump Heat pump lock
PL Power Limitation Power limitation
tE Time Events Time Bands
AL ALarm Alarms
rC reCovery Recovery

Visibility and Parameter Values

The Energy SB600 is a family of controllers.
There are 4 hardware models (see Appendix, Models section) with varying numbers of LOCAL inputs and outputs.
The 4 hardware models are divided into 2 DeviceManager models (version with TRIAC and version with 5 relays).
Depending on the model, some configuration parameters may not (usually) be visible and/or be of no significance given
that the associated resource is not present.
Refer also to the following table:

TC1 DO6
Device Hardware
Manager
SB646 SB646/C CL73-CL76-CL79 //
SB646/C/S
Model

SB655 SB655/C // CL95

SB655/C/S

When not indicated otherwise, the parameter is always visible and modifiable, unless customized settings have been
configured via serial.

N.B.: both parameters and folder visibility can be controlled (See Folder table).
If folder visibility is modified, the new setting will apply to all parameters in the folder.
Table A - analogue input configuration

Value Description Value Description

0 Input disabled 17 NOT USED
1 Water/air inlet temperature internal exchanger 18 NOT USED
2 Water/air outlet temperature internal exchanger 19 NOT USED
3 Water outlet temperature 20 NOT USED
internal exchanger circuit 1
4 Water outlet temperature 21 High pressure input circuit 1
internal exchanger circuit 2
5 External exchanger temperature circuit 1 22 High pressure input circuit 2
6 External exchanger temperature circuit 2 23 Low pressure input circuit 1
7 Water inlet temperature 24 Low pressure input circuit 2
recovery (or external) exchanger
8 Water outlet temperature 25 Input for dynamic setpoint
recovery (or external) exchanger
9 External temperature 26 Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1
10 Water recovery temperature 27 Internal exchanger pressure circuit 2
11 NOT USED 28 External exchanger pressure circuit 1
12 NOT USED 29 External exchanger pressure circuit 2
13 NOT USED 30 Pressure display
14 NOT USED 14 NOT USED
15 NOT USED 15 NOT USED
16 Temperature display 16 Temperature display

Table B - Digital inputs: configuration table

Polarity is defined as indicated below:

Value Description
+ Positive Active when contact closed
- Negative Active when contact open

Value Description Value Description

0 Input disabled ±34 Compressor 1 oil pressure switch
±1 Remote STD-BY ±35 Compressor 2 oil pressure switch
±2 Remote OFF ±36 Compressor 3 oil pressure switch
±3 Remote Summer/Winter ±37 Compressor 4 oil pressure switch
±4 Power step 1 request ±38 NOT USED
±5 Power step 2 request ±39 External exchanger fan thermal switch C1
±6 Power step 3 request ±40 External exchanger fan thermal switch C2
±7 Power step 4 request ±41 Internal exchanger fan thermal switch
±8 Digital input heat step 1 request ±42 External FreeCooling fan thermal switch
±9 Digital input heat step 2 request ±43 Compressor 1 thermal switch
±10 Digital input heat step 3 request ±44 Compressor 2 thermal switch
±11 Digital input heat step 4 request ±45 Compressor 3 thermal switch
±12 Digital input cool step 1 request ±46 Compressor 4 thermal switch
±13 Digital input cool step 2 request ±47 Internal circuit pump 1 thermal switch
±14 Digital input cool step 3 request ±48 Internal circuit pump 2 thermal switch
±15 Digital input cool step 4 request ±49 External circuit pump 1 thermal switch
±16 NOT USED ±50 Internal exchanger electric heater 1
thermal switch
±17 NOT USED ±51 Internal exchanger electric heater 2
thermal switch
±18 NOT USED ±52 Auxiliary output alarm
±19 NOT USED ±53 External circuit pump 2 thermal switch
±20 Heat pump lock ±54 NOT USED
±21 Power stage forced to 50% ±55 Primary circuit flow switch
±22 Economy input ±56 External circuit flow switch (Recovery)
±23 FreeCooling Consent ±57 NOT USED
±24 General alarm ±58 Display
±25 End of defrost C1 ±59 Compressor 1 special thermal switch
±26 End of defrost C2 ±60 Compressor 2 special thermal switch
±27 Recovery enabling ±61 Compressor 3 special thermal switch
±28 NOT USED ±62 Compressor 4 special thermal switch
±29 NOT USED ±29 NOT USED
±30 High pressure pressure switch C1 ±30 High pressure pressure switch C1
±31 High pressure pressure switch C2 ±31 High pressure pressure switch C2
±32 Low pressure pressure switch C1 ±32 Low pressure pressure switch C1
±33 Low pressure pressure switch C2 ±33 Low pressure pressure switch C2
NOTE: If more than one digital input in the table is configured with the same value, the function is activated when the
input with the highest index is piloted.
Table C - Outputs: configuration table
Polarity is defined as indicated below:
Value Description
+ Positive Active when contact closed
- Negative Active when contact open

Value Description Type Value Description Type

0 Output disabled Digital ±41 Bypass / Star compressor 4 Digital
±1 Compressor 1 Digital ±42 NOT USED Digital
±2 Compressor 2 Digital ±43 NOT USED Digital
±3 Compressor 3 Digital ±44 NOT USED Digital
±4 Compressor 4 Digital ±45 NOT USED Digital
±5 Reversal valve circuit 1 Digital ±46 NOT USED Digital
±6 Reversal valve circuit 2 Digital ±47 NOT USED Digital
±7 Circuit 1 pump-down valve Digital ±48 NOT USED Digital
±8 Circuit 2 pump-down valve Digital ±49 NOT USED Digital
±9 NOT USED Digital ±50 NOT USED Digital
±10 Free-Cooling Valve Digital ±51 NOT USED Digital
±11 Circuit 1 Recovery Valve Digital ±52 NOT USED Digital
±12 Circuit 2 Recovery Valve Digital ±53 NOT USED Digital
±13 NOT USED Digital ±54 NOT USED Digital
±14 Internal circuit water pump 1 Digital ±55 NOT USED Digital
±15 Internal circuit water pump 2 Digital ±56 Fan Analogue
external exchanger circuit 1
±16 External circuit water pump 1 Digital ±57 Fan Analogue
external exchanger circuit 2
±17 External circuit water pump 2 Digital ±58 NOT USED //
±18 Recirculation fan Digital ±59 Modulating internal circuit Analogue
water pump 1
±19 Fan Digital ±60 Modulating internal circuit Analogue
external exchanger circuit 1 water pump 2
±20 Fan Digital ±61 External Free-Cooling Fan Analogue
external exchanger circuit 2
±21 External Free-Cooling Fan Digital ±62 Modulating external circuit Analogue
water pump 1
±22 NOT USED Digital ±63 Modulating external circuit Analogue
water pump 2
±23 Electrical heater 1 Digital ±64 NOT USED Analogue
internal exchanger
±24 Electrical heater 2 Digital ±65 NOT USED Analogue
internal exchanger
±25 Electrical heater Digital ±66 NOT USED Analogue
external exchanger 1
±26 Electrical heater Digital ±67 NOT USED Analogue
external exchanger 2
±27 Auxiliary output Digital ±68 NOT USED Analogue
±28 NOT USED Digital ±69 NOT USED Analogue
±29 NOT USED Digital ±70 NOT USED Digital
±30 Boiler Digital ±71 NOT USED Digital
±31 Alarm Digital ±72 NOT USED Digital
±32 NOT USED Digital ±73 NOT USED Digital
±33 NOT USED Digital ±74 NOT USED Digital
±34 Part Winding / Digital ±75 NOT USED Digital
Delta compressor 1
±35 Part Winding / Digital
Delta compressor 2
±36 Part Winding / Digital
Delta compressor 3
±37 Part Winding / Digital
Delta compressor 4
±38 Bypass / Star compressor 1 Digital
±39 Bypass / Star compressor 2 Digital
±40 Bypass / Star compressor 3 Digital

If multiple outputs have been configured to run the same resource, these outputs will be activated in parallel.
 28.1.1 User interface parameters (UI) – User Interface

LED utilities table LED symbol LED SB600 / LED Parameter default default Default icon
on display SKW22 22L SB600 / on front
LED panel
SKW22 22L

LED 1 / 11 UI00 / UI30 1 Power step 1

(first from left)
LED 2 / 12 UI01 / UI31 2 Power step 2

LED 3 / 13 UI02 / UI32 3 Power step 3

LED 4 / 14 UI03 / UI33 4 Power step 4

LED 5 / 15 UI04 /UI34 23 Internal exchanger electric heater

LED 6 / 16 UI05 /UI35 19 External exchanger fan

LED 7 / 17 UI06 /UI36 14 Internal circuit water pump
LED symbol LED SB600 Parameter SB600
on display
Economy LED UI07=0 UI07=0 UI07=1 NOT enabled
dS00=0 dS00=1 dS00=0 (LED off)
Economy LED UI07=1 Enabled
dS00=1 (dynamic
setpoint)

To configure LED 1…7

Value Description Notes

±50 Power step 1 output* *values used only for
±51 Power step 2 output* configuring the user
±52 Power step 3 output* interface LEDs, and
±53 Power step 4 output* associated with the
power steps requested
by the main
temperature controller

… … …
±70 Logical OR of the internal pump 1 and internal pump 2 outputs Digital
±71 Logical OR of the external exchanger fan outputs of circuit 1 and circuit 2 Digital
±72 Logical OR of the heater 1 and heater 2 outputs of the internal exchanger Digital
±73 Logical OR of the heater 1 and heater 2 outputs of the external exchanger Digital
±74 Logical OR between the circuit 1 and circuit 2 heat pump lock status Digital
±75 Logical OR of the external pump 1 and internal pump 2 outputs Digital

UI10 Select main display

To select to view the main display
0 AiL analogue input 1 8 AiE Analogue input 2
1 AiL analogue input 2 9 AiE Analogue input 3
2 AiL analogue input 3 10 AiE analogue input 4
3 AiL analogue input 4 11 AiE analogue input 5
4 AiL analogue input 5 12 Clock
5 Analogue Input 1 Remote terminal AIR1 13 Setpoint set
6 Analogue Input 2 Remote terminal AIR2 14 Real Setpoint
7 AiE Analogue input 1
UI11 Select main display (remote terminal) SKW1
Selects the main display* remote terminal
*Note: on display with 2 and a half digits + sign
Same as UI10
Which we will refer to as:

Display Display A Display B*

4-figure read-out Read-out with 2 and a half digits

For displaying time and +/- sign
See parameter UI11

Parameter Key Default icon

[press and hold] on front panel
UI20=1 [UP] = manual defrost

UI21=1 [esc] = change-over Mode

UI22=1 [set] = display disp
UI23=1 [DOWN] = ON/OFF

UI24=1 [Set] = modify SetPoint None

(set key)
Parameter Key Default icon
(press and release) on front panel
UI25=1 UP / DOWN None
(UP and DOWN
keys)
 28.2 Parameters / visibility table, folder visibility table and client table
The tables below list all information required to read, write and decode all accessible resources in the device.
There are three tables:
- The parameters table contains all device configuration parameters stored in the controller's non-volatile
memory, including visibility
- The folders table lists the visibility of all parameter folders
- The client table includes all I/O and alarm status resources available in the volatile memory of the instrument.

Description of columns:

FOLDER This indicates the label of the folder containing the parameter in question.

LABEL This indicates the label used to display the parameters in the menu of the controller.

VALUE PAR The whole part represents the address of the MODBUS register containing the value of the resource to be read or written
ADDRESS in the
instrument. The value after the point indicates the position of the least significant data bit in the register; if it is not
indicated, it means it is equal to zero. This information is always provided when the register contains more than one
information item, and it is necessary to distinguish which bits actually represent the data (the working size of the data
indicated in the column DATA SIZE is also taken into consideration). Given that the modbus registers have the size of one
WORD (16 bit), the index number after the point can vary from 0 (least significant bit –LSb–) to 15 (most significant bit –
MSb–).

Examples (in binary form the least significant bit is the first on the right):

VAL PAR ADDRESS DATA SIZE Value Content of register

8806 WORD 1350 1350 (0000010101000110)
8806 Byte 70 1350 (0000010101000110)
8806,8 Byte 5 1350 (0000010101000110)
8806,14 1 bit 0 1350 (0000010101000110)
8806,7 4 bits 10 1350 (0000010101000110)

Important: when the register contains more than one piece of data, the write procedure is as follows:
 Read current value of register
 Modify bits for the resource concerned
 Write register

VAL PAR ADDRESS The same as above. In this case, the MODBUS register address contains the visibility value of the parameter.
By default all parameters have:
 Data size bit
 Range 0…3
 **Visibility 3
 UM num

**Value Meaning
 Value 3 = parameter or folder always visible
 Value 2 =manufacturer level; these parameters can only be viewed by enter the manufacturer's password (see
parameter UI28) (all parameters declared as always visible, parameters visible at the installation engineer level
and manufacturer's level will be visible).
 Value 1 =installer level; these parameters can only be viewed by enter the installer's password (see parameter
UI17) (all parameters declared as always visible and parameters visible at the installation engineer level).
 Value 0 = parameter or folder NOT visible.

3. Parameters and/or folders with a level of visibility <>3 (password-protected) will be visible only if the correct
password is entered (installer or manufacturer) following this procedure:
4. Parameters and/or folders with a level of visibility = 3 are always visible even without a password: in this case,
the following procedure is not necessary.

Examples (in binary form the least significant bit is the first on the right):
Default visibility:

VAL PAR ADDRESS DATA Value Content of register

SIZE
49482 2 bit 0 120 (0000000001111000)
49482,2 2 bit 2 120 (0000000001111000)
49482,4 2 bit 3 120 (0000000001111000)
49482,6 2 bit 1 120 (0000000001111000)
 Let's modify the visibility of parameter CL04 (address 49482,4) from 3 to 0:

Visibility modified

VAL PAR ADDRESS DATA Value Content of register

SIZE
49482,4 2 bit 0 72 (0000000001001000)

RESET (Y/N) Indicates whether the device MUST be rebooted after the parameter has been modified.
 Y=YES the device MUST be switched off then back on again to modify the parameter.
 N=NO the device DOESN'T need to be switched off then back on again to modify the parameter
Example: ALL configuration parameters (folder CF) equal Y or the controller meaning the controller MUST ALWAYS BE
SWITCHED OFF THEN BACK ON AGAIN AFTER THEY HAVE BEEN CHANGED.

R/W Indicates if resources are read/write, read-only or write-only:

R The resource is read-only
W The resource is write-only
RW The resource can be both read and written to

DATA SIZE Indicates the size of the data in bits.

WORD = 16 bit
Byte = 8 bit
“n” bit = 0...15 bit based on the value of “n”

CPL When the field indicates “Y”, the value read by the register needs to be converted because the value represents a number
with a sign. In the other cases the value is always positive or null.
To carry out conversion, proceed as follows:
 If the value in the register is between 0 and 32.767, the result is the value itself (zero and positive values).
 If the value in the register is between 32.768 and 65.535, the result is the value of the register – 65.536 (negative
values).

RANGE Describes the interval of values that can be assigned to the parameter. It can be correlated with other instrument
parameters (indicated with the parameter label).
N.B. If the real value is outside the permitted limits for the parameter (for example, because other parameters defining
the limits have been changed), the limit that has been passed and not the real value will be displayed.

DEFAULT Indicates the factory setting for the standard model of the instrument. In this table, take hardware to be SB-SD-SC646/C
with 4 relays + TRIAC + 2 analogue outputs A01 AO2 PWM + 1 low voltage analogue output A03 and the SE expansion

EXP If = -1 the value read by the register is divided by 10 (value/10) to convert it to the values indicated in the RANGE and
DEFAULT columns using the unit of measurement in the UM column,
Example: parameter CL04 = 50.0. Column EXP = -1:
 The value read by the device /DeviceManager is 50.0
 The value read from the register is 500 --> 500/10 = 50.0

UM Measurement unit for values converted according to the rules indicated in the CPL and EXP columns.

28.2.1 Parameters / visibility table

(See next page)
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
AiL analogue input type 1
 0= Probe not configured
 1= DI
CL CL00 49208 BYTE 49435,6 RW Y  2= NTC 0 ... 2 0 num
AiL analogue input type 2
CL CL01 49209 BYTE 49436 RW Y See CL00 0 ... 2 0 num
AiL analogue input type 3
 0= Probe not configured
 1= DI
 2= NTC
 3 = 4…20mA
 4=0-10V
 5=0-5V
CL CL02 49210 BYTE 49436,2 RW Y  6=0-1V 0 ... 6 0 num
AiL analogue input type 4
CL CL03 49211 BYTE 49436,4 RW Y See CL02 0 ... 6 0 num
AiL analogue input type 5
CL CL04 49212 BYTE 49436,6 RW Y See CL00 0 ... 2 0 num
CL CL10 16450 WORD Y -1 49437 RW Y AiL analogue input full scale value 3 CL11 ... 999 500 °C/Bar
CL CL11 16462 WORD Y -1 49437,2 RW Y AiL analogue input start of scale value 3 -500 ... CL10 0 °C/Bar
CL CL12 16452 WORD Y -1 49437,4 RW Y AiL analogue input full scale value 4 CL13 ... 999 500 °C/Bar
CL CL13 16464 WORD Y -1 49437,6 RW Y AiL analogue input start of scale value 4 -500 ... CL12 0 °C/Bar
CL CL20 49238 BYTE Y -1 49438 RW Y AiL analogue input differential 1 -120 ... 120 0 °C
CL CL21 49239 BYTE Y -1 49438,2 RW Y AiL analogue input differential 2 -120 ... 120 0 °C
CL CL22 49240 BYTE Y -1 49438,4 RW Y AiL analogue input differential 3 -120 ... 120 0 °C/Bar
CL CL23 49241 BYTE Y -1 49438,6 RW Y AiL analogue input differential 4 -120 ... 120 0 °C/Bar
CL CL24 49242 BYTE Y -1 49439 RW Y AiL analogue input differential 5 -120 ... 120 0 °C
CL CL30 49286 BYTE 49439,2 RW Y AIL analogue input configuration 1 0 ... 16 0 num
CL CL31 49287 BYTE 49439,4 RW Y AIL analogue input configuration 2 0 ... 16 0 num
CL CL32 49288 BYTE 49439,6 RW Y AIL analogue input configuration 3 0 ... 30 0 num
CL CL33 49289 BYTE 49440 RW Y AIL analogue input configuration 4 0 ... 30 0 num
CL CL34 49290 BYTE 49440,2 RW Y AIL analogue input configuration 5 0 ... 16 0 num
CL CL40 49292 BYTE Y 49440,4 RW Y DIL digital input configuration 1 -62 ... 62 0 num
CL CL41 49293 BYTE Y 49440,6 RW Y DIL digital input configuration 2 -62 ... 62 0 num
CL CL42 49294 BYTE Y 49441 RW Y DIL digital input configuration 3 -62 ... 62 0 num
CL CL43 49295 BYTE Y 49441,2 RW Y DIL digital input configuration 4 -62 ... 62 0 num
CL CL44 49296 BYTE Y 49441,4 RW Y DIL digital input configuration 5 -62 ... 62 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
CL CL45 49297 BYTE Y 49441.6 RW Y DIL digital input configuration 6 -62 ... 62 0 num
AIL analogue input configuration 1
if configured as a digital input
CL CL50 49302 BYTE Y 49442.2 RW Y NOTE: Set to 0 if AiL1 is NOT configured as a DI -62 ... 62 0 num
AIL analogue input configuration 2
if configured as a digital input
CL CL51 49303 BYTE Y 49442.4 RW Y NOTE: Set to 0 if AiL2 is NOT configured as a DI -62 ... 62 0 num
AIL analogue input configuration 3
if configured as a digital input
CL CL52 49304 BYTE Y 49442.6 RW Y NOTE: Set to 0 if AiL3 is NOT configured as a DI -62 ... 62 0 num
AIL analogue input configuration 4
if configured as a digital input
CL CL53 49305 BYTE Y 49443 RW Y NOTE: Set to 0 if AiL4 is NOT configured as a DI -62 ... 62 0 num
AIL analogue input configuration 5
if configured as a digital input
CL CL54 49306 BYTE Y 49443.2 RW Y NOTE: Set to 0 if AiL5 is NOT configured as a DI -62 ... 62 0 num
AOL analogue output type 5
 0 = 4-20mA
CL CL60 49248 BYTE 49443.4 RW Y  1 = 0-20mA 0 ... 1 0 num
CL CL61 49310 BYTE Y 49443.6 RW Y AOL analogue output configuration 3 -53 ... 63 59 num
CL CL62 49311 BYTE Y 49444 RW Y AOL analogue output configuration 4 -53 ... 63 0 num
CL CL63 49312 BYTE Y 49444.2 RW Y AOL analogue output configuration 5 -53 ... 63 0 num
Enable AOL analogue output 1
 0 = Output configured as digital – see CL96
 1 = Output configured as TRIAC – see CL74 – CL77 – CL80
CL CL71 49251 BYTE 49444.6 RW Y  2 = PWM – see CL82 0 ... 2 0 num
Enable AOL analogue output 2
 0 = Output configured as digital – see CL97
CL CL72 49252 BYTE 49445 RW Y  1 = Output configured as TRIAC – see CL75 – CL78 – CL81 0 ... 2 0 num
CL CL73 49253 BYTE 49445.2 RW Y Phase shift TCL analogue output 1 0 ... 90 27 Deg
CL CL74 49254 BYTE 49445.4 RW Y Phase shift AOL analogue output 1 0 ... 90 27 Deg
CL CL75 49255 BYTE 49445.6 RW Y Phase shift AOL analogue output 2 0 ... 90 27 Deg
CL CL76 49256 BYTE 49446 RW Y TCL analogue output pulse length 1 5 ... 40 10 69 μsec
CL CL77 49257 BYTE 49446.2 RW Y AOL analogue output pulse length 1 5 ... 40 10 69 μsec
CL CL78 49258 BYTE 49446.4 RW Y AOL analogue output pulse length 2 5 ... 40 10 69 μsec
CL CL79 49314 BYTE Y 49446.6 RW Y TCL analogue output configuration 1 -53 ... 63 56 num
CL CL80 49315 BYTE Y 49447 RW Y AOL analogue output configuration 1 -53 ... 63 0 num
CL CL81 49316 BYTE Y 49447.2 RW Y AOL analogue output configuration 2 -53 ... 63 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
Analogue output PWM frequency
Indicates the period of the PWM signal, during which the width of the Duty Cycle pulse is
CL CL82 16550 WORD 49447.4 RW Y modulated. Only active if CL71, CL72 =2 10…2000 100 Hzx10
CL CL90 49322 BYTE Y 49447.6 RW Y DOL digital output configuration 1 -53 ... 53 1 num
CL CL91 49323 BYTE Y 49448 RW Y DOL digital output configuration 2 -53 ... 53 14 num
CL CL92 49324 BYTE Y 49448.2 RW Y DOL digital output configuration 3 -53 ... 53 5 num
CL CL93 49325 BYTE Y 49448.4 RW Y DOL digital output configuration 4 -53 ... 53 23 num
CL CL94 49326 BYTE Y 49448.6 RW Y DOL digital output configuration (Open Collector) 5 -53 ... 53 2 num
Visible only in models SB655/C/S SD655/C/S SC655/C/S
CL CL95 49327 BYTE Y 49449 RW Y DOL digital output configuration 6 (655 models) -53 ... 53 19 num
CL CL96 49328 BYTE Y 49449.2 RW Y AOL digital output configuration 1 -53 ... 53 30 num
CL CL97 49329 BYTE Y 49449.4 RW Y AOL digital output configuration 2 -53 ... 53 31 num
AIE analogue input type 1
 0= Probe not configured
 1= DI
CE CE00 49696 BYTE 49452 RW Y  2= NTC 0 ... 2 0 num
AIE analogue input type 2
CE CE01 49697 BYTE 49452.2 RW Y See CE00 0 ... 2 0 num
AIE analogue input type 3
 0= Probe not configured
 1= DI
 2= NTC
 3 = 4…20mA
 4=0-10V
 5=0-5V
CE CE02 49698 BYTE 49452.4 RW Y  6=0-1V 0 ... 6 0 num
AIE analogue input type 4
CE CE03 49699 BYTE 49452.6 RW Y See CE02 0 ... 6 0 num
AIE analogue input type 5
CE CE04 49700 BYTE 49453 RW Y See CE00 0 ... 2 0 num
CE CE10 16938 WORD Y -1 49453.2 RW Y AIE analogue input fullscale value 3 CE11 ... 999 500 °C/Bar
CE CE11 16950 WORD Y -1 49453.4 RW Y AIE analogue input start of scale value 3 -500 ... CE10 0 °C/Bar
CE CE12 16940 WORD Y -1 49453.6 RW Y AIE analogue input fullscale value 4 CE13 ... 999 500 °C/Bar
CE CE13 16952 WORD Y -1 49454 RW Y AIE analogue input start of scale value 4 -500 ... CE12 0 °C/Bar
CE CE20 49726 BYTE Y -1 49454.2 RW Y AIE analogue input differential 1 -120 ... 120 0 °C
CE CE21 49727 BYTE Y -1 49454.4 RW Y AIE analogue input differential 2 -120 ... 120 0 °C
CE CE22 49728 BYTE Y -1 49454.6 RW Y AIE analogue input differential 3 -120 ... 120 0 °C/Bar
CE CE23 49729 BYTE Y -1 49455 RW Y AIE analogue input differential 4 -120 ... 120 0 °C/Bar
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
CE CE24 49730 BYTE Y -1 49455.2 RW Y AIE analogue input differential 5 -120 ... 120 0 °C
CE CE30 49748 BYTE 49455.4 RW Y AIE analogue input configuration 1 0 ... 16 0 num
CE CE31 49749 BYTE 49455.6 RW Y AIE analogue input configuration 2 0 ... 16 0 num
CE CE32 49750 BYTE 49456 RW Y AIE analogue input configuration 3 0 ... 30 0 num
CE CE33 49751 BYTE 49456.2 RW Y AIE analogue input configuration 4 0 ... 30 0 num
CE CE34 49752 BYTE 49456.4 RW Y AIE analogue input configuration 5 0 ... 16 0 num
CE CE40 49754 BYTE Y 49456.6 RW Y DIE digital input configuration 1 -62 ... 62 0 num
CE CE41 49755 BYTE Y 49457 RW Y DIE digital input configuration 2 -62 ... 62 0 num
CE CE42 49756 BYTE Y 49457.2 RW Y DIE digital input configuration 3 -62 ... 62 0 num
CE CE43 49757 BYTE Y 49457.4 RW Y DIE digital input configuration 4 -62 ... 62 0 num
CE CE44 49758 BYTE Y 49457.6 RW Y DIE digital input configuration 5 -62 ... 62 0 num
CE CE45 49759 BYTE Y 49458 RW Y DIE digital input configuration 6 -62 ... 62 0 num
AIE analogue input configuration 1
if configured as a digital input
CE CE50 49762 BYTE Y 49458.4 RW Y NOTE: Set = 0 if AiE1 is NOT configured as DI -62 ... 62 0 num
AIE analogue input configuration 2
if configured as a digital input
CE CE51 49763 BYTE Y 49458.6 RW Y NOTE: Set = 0 if AiE2 is NOT configured as DI -62 ... 62 0 num
AIE analogue input configuration 3
if configured as a digital input
CE CE52 49764 BYTE Y 49459 RW Y NOTE: Set = 0 if AiE3 is NOT configured as DI -62 ... 62 0 num
AIE analogue input configuration 4
if configured as a digital input
CE CE53 49765 BYTE Y 49459.2 RW Y NOTE: Set to 0 if AE4 is NOT configured as a DI -62 ... 62 0 num
AIE analogue input configuration 5
if configured as a digital input
CE CE54 49766 BYTE Y 49459.4 RW Y NOTE: Set = 0 if AiE5 is NOT configured as DI -62 ... 62 0 num
AOE analogue output type 5
 0 = 4-20mA
CE CE60 49736 BYTE 49459.6 RW Y  1 = 0-20mA 0 ... 1 0 num
CE CE61 49768 BYTE Y 49460 RW Y AOE analogue output configuration 3 -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE62 49769 BYTE Y 49460.2 RW Y AOE analogue output configuration 4 -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE63 49770 BYTE Y 49460.4 RW Y AOE analogue output configuration 5 -53 ... 63 0 num
Enable TCE analogue output 1
 0 = SE65x models – see CE95
CE CE70 49738 BYTE 49460.6 RW Y  1 = SE64x models – see CE73 – CE76 – CE79 0 ... 1 1 num
CE CE71 49739 BYTE 49461 RW Y Enable AOE analogue output 1 0 ... 1 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
 0 = Output configured as digital – see CE96
 1 = Output configured as triac – see CE74 – CE77 – CE80
Enable AOE analogue output 2
 0 = Output configured as digital – see CE97
CE CE72 49740 BYTE 49461.2 RW Y  1 = Output configured as TRIAC – see CE75 – CE78 – CE81 0 ... 1 0 num
CE CE73 49741 BYTE 49461.4 RW Y Phase shift TCE analogue output 1 0 ... 90 27 Deg
CE CE74 49742 BYTE 49461.6 RW Y Phase shift AOE analogue output 1 0 ... 90 27 Deg
CE CE75 49743 BYTE 49462 RW Y Phase shift AOE analogue output 2 0 ... 90 27 Deg
CE CE76 49744 BYTE 49462.2 RW Y TCE analogue output pulse length 1 5 ... 40 10 69 μsec
CE CE77 49745 BYTE 49462.4 RW Y AOE analogue output pulse length 1 5 ... 40 10 69 μsec
CE CE78 49746 BYTE 49462.6 RW Y AOE analogue output pulse length 2 5 ... 40 10 69 μsec
CE CE79 49772 BYTE Y 49463 RW Y TCE analogue output configuration 1 -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE80 49773 BYTE Y 49463.2 RW Y AOE analogue output configuration 1 -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE81 49774 BYTE Y 49463.4 RW Y AOE analogue output configuration 2 -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE90 49776 BYTE Y 49463.6 RW Y DOE digital output configuration 1 -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE91 49777 BYTE Y 49464 RW Y DOE digital output configuration 2 -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE92 49778 BYTE Y 49464.2 RW Y DOE digital output configuration 3 -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE93 49779 BYTE Y 49464.4 RW Y DOE digital output configuration 4 -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE94 49780 BYTE Y 49464.6 RW Y DOE digital output configuration 5 -53 ... 53 0 num
Visible only in models SE655/C/S
CE CE95 49781 BYTE Y 49465 RW Y DOE digital output configuration 6 (models 655) -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE96 49782 BYTE Y 49465.2 RW Y AOE digital output configuration 1 -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE97 49783 BYTE Y 49465.4 RW Y AOE digital output configuration 2 -53 ... 53 0 num
Air local analogue input type 1
 0= Probe not configured
 1 = not used
Cr Cr00 49664 BYTE 49449.6 RW Y  2= NTC 0 ... 2 0 num
AIR local analogue input type 2
 0= Probe not configured
 1= DI
 2= NTC
Cr Cr01 49665 BYTE 49450 RW Y  3 = 4..20mA 0 ... 3 0 num
Cr Cr10 16900 WORD Y -1 49450.2 RW Y AIR analogue input full scale value 2 Cr11 ... 999 500 C/Bar
Cr Cr11 16904 WORD Y -1 49450.4 RW Y AIR analogue input start of scale value 2 -500 ... Cr10 0 C/Bar
Cr Cr20 49674 BYTE Y -1 49450.6 RW Y AIR analogue input differential 1 -120 ... 120 0 °C
Cr Cr21 49675 BYTE Y -1 49451 RW Y AIR analogue input differential 2 -120 ... 120 0 C/Bar
Cr Cr30 49676 BYTE 49451.2 RW Y AIR analogue input configuration 1 0 ... 16 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
Cr Cr31 49677 BYTE 49451.4 RW Y AIR analogue input configuration 2 0 ... 30 0 num
AIR analogue input configuration 2
if configured as a digital input
Cr Cr50 49683 BYTE Y 49451.6 RW Y NOTE: Set to 0 if Air2 is NOT configured as a DI -62 ... 62 0 num
Select COM1 protocol
Select COM1 (TTL) communication channel protocol:
0 = Eliwell; 1 = Modbus
NOTE:
 If CF01=0, parameters CF20/CF21 should be configured
CF CF01 49169 BYTE 49466 RW Y  If CF01=1, parameters CF30/CF31/CF32 should be configured 0 ... 1 1 num
Eliwell protocol controller address
CF20= address of the controller within the family (values valid from 0 to. 14)
CF21 = controller family (values from 0 to 14).
The two values CF20 and CF21 represent the network address of the controller and the pair are
CF CF20 49176 BYTE 49467.6 RW Y indicated in the following format "FF.DD" (where FF=CF21 and DD=CF20). 0 ... 14 0 num
Eliwell protocol controller family
CF CF21 49177 BYTE 49468 RW Y See CF21 0 ... 14 0 num
Modbus protocol controller address
CF CF30 49178 BYTE 49468.2 RW Y NOTE: 0 (zero) is not included 1 ... 255 1 num
Modbus protocol Baudrate
To modify the Modbus protocol baud rate
 0=1200 baud
 1=2400 baud
 2=4800 baud
 3=9600 baud
 4=19200 baud
 5=38400 baud (maximum speed that can be set using DeviceManager software)
 6=57600 baud
CF CF31 49179 BYTE 49468.4 RW Y  7=115200 baud 0 ... 7 3 num
Modbus protocol parity
 1= EVEN
 2= NONE
CF CF32 49180 BYTE 49468.6 RW Y  3= ODD 1 ... 3 1 num
CF CF43 // BYTE 49469.6 R Y Firmware mask revision 0 ... 999 // num
CF CF44 // BYTE 49470 R Y Firmware release 0 ... 999 // num
Client code 1
Parameter for the exclusive use of customers/users.
The user can assign these parameters values that e.g.
CF CF60 16430 WORD 49470.6 RW Y identify the type and/or model of the system, and its configuration etc. 0 ... 999 0 num
Client code 2
CF CF61 16432 WORD 49471 RW Y See CF60 0 ... 999 0 num
Ui Ui00 49388 BYTE 49471.2 RW Y Configuration of LED1 0 ... 75 50 num
Ui Ui01 49389 BYTE 49471.4 RW Y Configuration of LED2 0 ... 75 51 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
Ui Ui02 49390 BYTE 49471.6 RW Y Configuration of LED3 0 ... 75 52 num
Ui Ui03 49391 BYTE 49472 RW Y Configuration of LED4 0 ... 75 53 num
Ui Ui04 49392 BYTE 49472.2 RW Y Configuration of LED5 0 ... 75 72 num
Ui Ui05 49393 BYTE 49472.4 RW Y Configuration of LED6 0 ... 75 71 num
Ui Ui06 49394 BYTE 49472.6 RW Y Configuration of LED7 0 ... 75 70 num
Configuration of Economy LED
Allows you to configure the Economy LED.
(if=1 the economy LED on the display will be permanently on)
 0 = LED disabled
Ui Ui07 49403 BYTE 49473 RW Y  1 = dynamic setpoint 0 ... 1 1 num
Ui Ui10 49366 BYTE 49473.4 RW Y Select main display 0 ... 14 0 num
Ui Ui11 49367 BYTE 49473.6 RW Y Select main display SKW1 0 ... 14 5 num
Enable Defrost function from key
To enable or disable manual defrost
([UP] key) (manual defrost function) from a key
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
Ui Ui20 49382 BYTE 49474.2 RW Y  1 = Key enabled for the function 0 ... 1 1 num
Enable MODE function from key
To enable or disable mode selection
([esc] key) (mode function) from a key
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
Ui Ui21 49383 BYTE 49474.4 RW Y  1 = Key enabled for the function 0 ... 1 1 num
Enable DISP function from key
To enable or disable configuration of the main display from a
key [set] (disp function)
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
Ui Ui22 49384 BYTE 49474.6 RW Y  1 = Key enabled for the function 0 ... 1 1 num
Enable ON/OFF function from key
To enable or disable the switching on or off of the device from
a key [DOWN] (ON/OFF function)
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
Ui Ui23 49385 BYTE 49475 RW Y  1 = Key enabled for the function 0 ... 1 1 num
Enable SET function from key
To enable or disable access via the "set"
key to the machine state menu and relative subfolders
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
Ui Ui24 49386 BYTE 49475.2 RW Y  1 = Key enabled for the function 0 ... 1 1 num
Setpoint edit function enable from main screen
To enable or disable Setpoint modification
on the main display with the UP and DOWN keys
Ui Ui25 49387 BYTE 49475.4 RW Y  0 = Key not enabled for the function 0 ... 1 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
 1 = Key enabled for the function
Installer password
When enabled (value other than 0)
Ui Ui27 16640 WORD 49476 RW Y it constitutes the access key for parameters 0 ... 255 1 num
Manufacturer password
Ui Ui28 16642 WORD 49476.2 RW Y When enabled (value other than zero), constitutes the password for access to parameters 0 ... 255 2 num
Ui Ui30 49395 BYTE 49476.4 RW Y Configuration of LED11 0 ... 75 50 num
Ui Ui31 49396 BYTE 49476.6 RW Y Configuration of LED12 0 ... 75 51 num
Ui Ui32 49397 BYTE 49477 RW Y Configuration of LED13 0 ... 75 52 num
Ui Ui33 49398 BYTE 49477.2 RW Y Configuration of LED14 0 ... 75 53 num
Ui Ui34 49399 BYTE 49477.4 RW Y Configuration of LED15 0 ... 75 72 num
Ui Ui35 49400 BYTE 49477.6 RW Y Configuration of LED16 0 ... 75 71 num
Ui Ui36 49401 BYTE 49478 RW Y Configuration of LED17 0 ... 75 70 num
Type of temperature controller
 0 = Proportional
 1 = Differential
 2 = Digital
tr tr00 49824 BYTE 49478.2 RW Y  3= Time proportional 0 ... 3 0 num
Enable heat pump
 0 = Heat pump absent
tr tr01 49825 BYTE 49478.4 RW Y  1 = Heat pump present 0 ... 1 1 num
Select temperature control probe in Cool
 0=Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature (CL30…CL34=0)
 1=Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature (CL30…CL34=1)
 2= Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature
Average ((CL30…CL34=2), (CL30…CL34=3))
 3= External exchanger water inlet temperature (CL30…CL34=6)
 4= External exchanger water outlet temperature (CL30…CL34=7)
 5= Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature
tr tr02 49826 BYTE 49478.6 RW Y Average ((CL30…CL34=4), (CL30…CL34=5)) 0 ... 5 0 num
Select temperature control probe in Heat
tr tr03 49827 BYTE 49479 RW Y See tr02 0 ... 5 1 num
Select probe for temperature control differential in Cool
 Probe 1 – see tr02
tr tr04 49828 BYTE 49479.2 RW Y  Probe 2 External temperature NTC input (CL30…CL34=8) 0 ... 5 0 num
Select probe for temperature control differential in Heat
tr tr05 49829 BYTE 49479.4 RW Y See tr04 0 ... 5 0 num
Cool mode setpoint, hysteresis, differentials
tr tr10 17062 WORD Y -1 49479.6 RW N Temperature control setpoint in Cool tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tr tr11 17064 WORD Y -1 49480 RW Y Minimum temperature control setpoint in Cool -500 ... tr12 110 °C
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
tr tr12 17066 WORD Y -1 49480.2 RW Y Maximum temperature control setpoint in Cool tr11 ... 999 200 °C
tr tr13 17068 WORD -1 49480.4 RW N Temperature control hysteresis in Cool 1 ... 255 30 °C
tr tr14 17070 WORD -1 49480.6 RW N Steps/compressors insertion differential in Cool 1 ... 255 30 °C
tr tr15 17072 WORD Y -1 49481 RW N Setpoint differential in Cool from start of Economy -255 ... 255 50 °C
Heat mode setpoint, hysteresis, differentials
tr tr20 17074 WORD Y -1 49481.2 RW N Temperature control setpoint in Heat tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
tr tr21 17076 WORD Y -1 49481.4 RW Y Minimum temperature control setpoint in Heat -500 ... tr22 300 °C
tr tr22 17078 WORD Y -1 49481.6 RW Y Maximum temperature control setpoint in Heat tr21 ... 999 450 °C
tr tr23 17080 WORD -1 49482 RW N Temperature control hysteresis in Heat 1 ... 255 30 °C
tr tr24 17082 WORD -1 49482.2 RW N Steps/compressors insertion differential in Heat 1 ... 255 30 °C
tr tr25 17084 WORD Y -1 49482.4 RW N Setpoint differential in Heat from start of Economy -255 ... 255 -50 °C
tr tr50 17086 WORD -1 49485.2 RW Y Band B1 Time Proportional in Cool 0 ... 255 30 °C
Band B2 Time Proportional in Cool
tr tr51 17088 WORD -1 49485.4 RW Y Note: B2 > B1. If B2 is less than B1 => the considered value of B2 will be =B1 0 ... 255 50 °C
tr tr52 49858 BYTE 49485.6 RW Y Time increment T1 Time Proportional in Cool 0 ... 255 120 sec
tr tr53 49859 BYTE 49486 RW Y Time increment T2 Time Proportional in Cool 0 ... 255 60 sec
tr tr54 49860 BYTE 49486.2 RW Y Time decrement T1 Time Proportional in Cool 0 ... 255 120 sec
tr tr55 49861 BYTE 49486.4 RW Y Time decrement T2 Time Proportional in Cool 0 ... 255 60 sec
tr tr60 17094 WORD -1 49486.6 RW Y Band B1 Time Proportional in Heat 0 ... 255 30 °C
tr tr61 17096 WORD -1 49487 RW Y Band B2 Time Proportional in Heat 0 ... 255 50 °C
tr tr62 49866 BYTE 49487.2 RW Y Time increment T1 Time Proportional in Heat 0 ... 255 120 sec
tr tr63 49867 BYTE 49487.4 RW Y Time increment T2 Time Proportional in Heat 0 ... 255 60 sec
tr tr64 49868 BYTE 49487.6 RW Y Time decrement T1 Time Proportional in Heat 0 ... 255 120 sec
tr tr65 49869 BYTE 49488 RW Y Time decrement T2 Time Proportional in Heat 0 ... 255 60 sec
Operating mode
Select function modes
 0 = cool only Only OFF, STAND-BY and COOL allowed (local and remote).
 1 = heat only Only OFF, STAND-BY and COOL allowed (local and remote).
St St00 49808 BYTE 49488.2 RW Y  2 = Heat pump heat/cool All modes allowed. 0 ... 2 2 num
Enable change-over from analogue input
 0 = not enabled
St St01 49809 BYTE 49488.4 RW Y  1 = enabled 0 ... 1 0 num
Select probe for automatic change-over of operating mode
 0 = external temperature
 1 = internal exchanger inlet water temperature
St St02 49810 BYTE 49488.6 RW Y  2 = internal exchanger water outlet temperature 0 ... 2 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
St St03 17044 WORD Y -1 49489 RW N Differential for automatic mode change-over in Heat -255 ... 255 -100 °C
St St04 17046 WORD Y -1 49489.2 RW N Differential for automatic mode change-over in Cool -255 ... 255 100 °C
Reversal valve
St St05 49816 BYTE 49489.4 RW Y Reversal valve switching delay 0 ... 255 10 sec
St St06 49817 BYTE 49489.6 RW N Reversal valve switching from Heat to Defrost delay 0 ... 255 10 sec
St St07 49818 BYTE 49490 RW N Reversal valve switching from Defrost to Heat delay 0 ... 255 10 sec
Reversal valve activation time for pressure release
Each time the compressors are fully switched off, the reversal valve is temporarily inverted.
St St08 49819 BYTE 49490.2 RW N If = 0 it will not be temporarily inverted when the compressors are fully switched off 0 ... 255 0 sec
Type of System
Type of compressor
 0 = simple (non-power stage)
 1 = alternate power stage
CP CP00 49886 BYTE 49490.4 RW Y  2 = screw power stage 0 ... 2 0 num
Number of circuits
 1 = 1 circuit
CP CP01 49887 BYTE 49490.6 RW Y  2 = 2 circuits 1 ... 2 1 num
Number of compressors per circuit
 1 = 1 compressor
 2 = 2 compressors
 3 = 3 compressors
CP CP02 49888 BYTE 49491 RW Y  4 = 4 compressors 1 ... 4 2 num
Number of capacity steps of compressor
 1 = 1 power stage
 2 = 2 power stages
CP CP03 49889 BYTE 49491.2 RW Y  3 = 3 power stages 0 ... 3 0 num
CP CP04 49890 BYTE 49491,4 RW Y Rotation time for tandem/trio compressors 0 ... 255 0 min
Plant resource management
Enable circuit balancing
Establishes circuit management
 0 = saturation (circuits)
CP CP10 49896 BYTE 49492 RW Y  1 = balancing (circuits) 0 ... 1 0 num
Enable compressor balancing
Establishes circuit management
 0 = saturation (compressors)
 1 = balancing (compressors)
CP CP11 49897 BYTE 49492.2 RW Y  2 = NOT USED 0 ... 1 0 num
Circuit selection criterion
 0 = hours balancing
CP CP12 49898 BYTE 49492.4 RW Y  1 = on sequence 1-->2; off sequence 2-->1 0 ... 1 0 num
Compressor selection criterion
CP CP13 49899 BYTE 49492.6 RW Y Establishes the selection of compressors on each circuit 0 ... 2 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
 0 = hours balancing
 1 = on sequence 1-->2-->3-->4; off sequence 4-->3-->2-->1
 2 = operating time
CP CP14 17132 WORD 49493 RW Y Compressor running time for switch on sequence 0 ... 255 18 sec*10
Compressor Protection
CP CP20 17136 WORD 49493.2 RW Y Minimum off/on for same compressor 0 ... 255 18 sec*10
CP CP21 17138 WORD 49493.4 RW Y Minimum time between the switching on of the same compressor 0 ... 255 30 sec*10
CP CP22 17140 WORD 49493.6 RW Y Minimum compressor on time 0 ... 255 2 sec*10
CP CP23 17142 WORD 49494 RW Y Minimum on/on time for same compressor 1 ... 255 10 sec
CP CP24 17144 WORD 49494.2 RW Y Minimum off/off time for different compressors 1 ... 255 10 sec
CP CP25 17146 WORD 49494.4 RW Y Minimum compressor switch on time for increase in power stages 1 ... 255 10 sec
CP CP26 17148 WORD 49494.6 RW Y Minimum compressor switch on time for decrease in power stages 1 ... 255 5 sec
CP CP27 17150 WORD 49495 RW Y Defrost compressor/step delay minimum 1 ... 255 10 sec
CP CP30 17156 WORD 49495.4 RW Y Star/line delay 0 ... 999 0 sec/10
CP CP31 17158 WORD 49495.6 RW Y Star activation time 0 ... 999 0 sec/10
CP CP32 17160 WORD 49496 RW Y Star/delta delay 0 ... 999 0 sec/10
CP33 Pump-down time during shutdown
To modify the maximum operating time
of the last compressor of the circuit in pump down (<>0)
CP 17162 WORD 49496.2 RW Y If set to 0 function not active 0 ... 999 0 sec
CP40 Activate Compressor 1 disable
0= No, 1=Yes.
CP 49934 BYTE 49496.4 RW Y Note: disabling the compressor involves disabling all of its steps 0 ... 1 0 num
CP41 Activate Compressor 2 disable
CP 49935 BYTE 49496.6 RW Y See CP40 0 ... 1 0 num
CP42 Activate Compressor 3 disable
CP 49936 BYTE 49497 RW Y See CP40 0 ... 1 0 num
CP43 Activate Compressor 4 disable
CP 49937 BYTE 49497.2 RW Y See CP40 0 ... 1 0 num
Select internal circuit water pump operating mode
 0=Pump disabled
 1=Continuous (always on)
Pi PI00 49984 BYTE 49498.2 RW Y  2=on request (pump on when compressor on) 0 ... 2 2 num
Pi PI01 49985 BYTE 49498.4 RW Y Internal circuit water pump idle time due to antilock 0 ... 255 50 hours
Pi PI02 49986 BYTE 49498.6 RW Y Internal circuit water pump pick-up time 0 ... 255 2 sec
Pi PI03 49987 BYTE 49499 RW Y Minimum internal circuit water pump start time 0 ... 255 10 Sec x 10
Maximum internal circuit water pump changeover start time
Pi PI05 49989 BYTE 49499.4 RW Y Pump operation time, after which 0 ... 255 0 hours
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
the active pump is switched off and replaced by the second pump if available.
If = 0 the second pump is not called
Enable internal circuit water pump on when antifreeze heaters active
 0 = Pump disabled
Pi PI10 49992 BYTE 49499.6 RW Y  1 = Pump enabled 0 ... 1 0 num
Enable internal circuit water pump start when boiler active
 0 = Pump disabled
Pi PI11 49993 BYTE 49500 RW Y  1 = Pump enabled 0 ... 1 1 num
Operation in response to request
Pi PI20 49996 BYTE 49500.2 RW Y Delay internal circuit water pump on and compressor on 0 ... 255 60 sec
Pi PI21 49997 BYTE 49500.4 RW Y Delay compressor off - internal circuit water pump off 0 ... 255 60 sec
Internal circuit pump periodic activation interval
Modifies the maximum pump off time
after which the pump is forced on
Pi PI22 49998 BYTE 49500.6 RW Y If modulating, it will be switched on a maximum speed 0 ... 255 30 min
Modulating function in Cool mode
Pi PI30 50002 BYTE 49501 RW Y Minimum internal circuit water pump speed in Cool 1 ... 100 30 %
Pi PI31 50003 BYTE 49501.2 RW Y Maximum internal circuit water pump speed in Cool 0 ... 100 100 %
Pi PI32 17236 WORD Y -1 49501.4 RW N Minimum internal circuit water pump speed setpoint in Cool -500 ... 999 200 °C
Pi PI33 17238 WORD Y -1 49501.6 RW N Internal circuit water pump proportional band in Cool -255 ... 255 80 °C
Pi PI34 50008 BYTE 49502 RW N Fan speed setpoint to modulate internal circuit water pump in Cool 0 ... 100 80 %
Pi PI35 50009 BYTE 49502.2 RW N Fan speed hysteresis to modulate internal circuit water pump in Cool 1 ... 100 10 %
Modulating function in Heat mode
Pi PI40 50012 BYTE 49502.4 RW Y Minimum internal circuit water pump speed in Heat 1 ... 100 30 %
Pi PI41 50013 BYTE 49502.6 RW Y Maximum internal circuit water pump speed in Heat 0 ... 100 100 %
Pi PI42 17246 WORD Y -1 49503 RW N Minimum internal circuit water pump speed setpoint in Heat -500 ... 999 200 °C
Pi PI43 17248 WORD Y -1 49503.2 RW N Internal circuit water pump proportional band in Heat -255 ... 255 180 °C
Pi PI44 50018 BYTE 49503.4 RW N Fan speed setpoint to modulate internal circuit water pump in Heat 0 ... 100 80 %
Pi PI45 50019 BYTE 49503.6 RW N Fan speed hysteresis to modulate internal circuit water pump in Heat 1 ... 100 10 %
Antifreeze with pump
Select probe for internal circuit + water pump antifreeze
 0=No probe (pump in antifreeze disabled)
 1=Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
 2=Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
 3=Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
 4=Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
 5=Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature
Pi PI50 50022 BYTE 49504 RW Y  6=External temperature 0 ... 6 0 num
Pi PI51 17256 WORD Y -1 49504.2 RW N Internal circuit water pump regulator setpoint for antifreeze -500 ... 999 80 °C
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
Pi PI52 17258 WORD -1 49504.4 RW N Internal circuit water pump regulator hysteresis for antifreeze 1 ... 255 20 °C
Select recirculation fan operation
 0 = recirculation fan disabled
 1 = Always on
Fi FI00 49956 BYTE 49504.6 RW Y  2 = On request 0 ... 2 0 num
Fi FI01 17190 WORD -1 49505 RW N Recirculation fan regulator hysteresis in Cool mode 1 ... 255 20 °C
Fi FI02 17192 WORD -1 49505.2 RW N Recirculation fan regulator hysteresis in Heat mode 1 ... 255 20 °C
Fi FI03 17194 WORD 49505.4 RW Y Postventilation time in Heat mode 0 ... 255 10 sec
External exchanger fan mode selection
 0 = fan disabled
 1 = Continuous operation (Always ON)
FE FE00 50038 BYTE 49506.6 RW Y  2 = Operation on call (ON when compressor ON) 0 ... 2 2 num
FE FE01 50039 BYTE 49507 RW Y External exchanger fan pick-up time 0 ... 60 2 sec
FAN CONTROL IN DEFROST
Enable single condensation
Configures 2 circuit machines with a single condenser
 0 = separate condensation / independent fans
FE FE10 50046 BYTE 49507.2 RW Y  1 = single condensation / in parallel 0 ... 1 0 num
Enable external exchanger fan on in defrost
 0 = Fan disabled
FE FE11 50047 BYTE 49507.4 RW Y  1 = Fan enabled 0 ... 1 0 num
FE FE12 17280 WORD Y -1 49507.6 RW N External exchanger fan on setpoint in defrost -500 ... 999 190 °C/Bar
FE FE13 17282 WORD -1 49508 RW N External exchanger fan on hysteresis in defrost 1 ... 255 10 °C/Bar
Select probe for external exchanger fan regulation in defrost
 0 = Probe absent
 1 = External exchanger temperature probe (circuit 1 and 2)
 2 = High pressure probe (circuit 1 and 2)
FE FE14 50052 BYTE 49508.2 RW Y  3 = External exchanger pressure probe (circuit 1 and 2) 0 ... 3 1 num
FE FE20 17290 WORD 49508.4 RW Y Bypass time for external exchanger fan cut-off 0 ... 255 2 sec
FE FE21 17292 WORD 49508.6 RW Y External exchanger fan preventilation time 0 ... 255 0 sec
FAN CONTROL IN COOLING
FE FE30 50062 BYTE 49509 RW Y Minimum speed external exchanger fan in Cool 0 ... 100 50 %
FE FE31 50063 BYTE 49509.2 RW Y Average speed external exchanger fan in Cool 0 ... 100 95 %
FE FE32 50064 BYTE 49509.4 RW Y Maximum speed external exchanger fan in Cool 0 ... 100 100 %
Select probe for external exchanger fan regulation in Cool
 0=No probe
 1=External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2)
 2=High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
 3=Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
FE FE33 50065 BYTE 49509.6 RW Y  4=External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) 0 ... 5 1 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
 5=Internal exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2)
FE FE34 17298 WORD Y -1 49510 RW N External exchanger fan minimum speed setpoint in Cool -500 ... 999 140 °C/Bar
FE FE35 17300 WORD Y -1 49510.2 RW N External exchanger maximum speed differential in Cool 1 ... 999 55 °C/Bar
FE FE36 17302 WORD -1 49510.4 RW N External exchanger fan speed proportional band in Cool 0 ... 255 35 °C/Bar
FE FE37 17304 WORD -1 49510.6 RW N Maximum external exchanger fan hysteresis in Cool mode 1 ... 255 10 °C/Bar
FE FE38 17306 WORD -1 49511 RW N External exchanger fan cut-off hysteresis in Cool 1 ... 255 10 °C/Bar
FE FE39 17308 WORD -1 49511.2 RW N External exchanger fan cut-off differential in Cool 0 ... 255 20 °C/Bar
FAN CONTROL IN HEATING
FE FE50 50082 BYTE 49511.4 RW Y Minimum speed external exchanger fan in Heat 0 ... 100 50 %
FE FE51 50083 BYTE 49511.6 RW Y Average speed external exchanger fan in Heat 0 ... 100 95 %
FE FE52 50084 BYTE 49512 RW Y Maximum speed external exchanger fan in Heat 0 ... 100 100 %
Select probe for external exchanger fan regulation in Heat
 0=No probe
 1=External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2)
 2=High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
 3=Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
 4=External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2)
FE FE53 50085 BYTE 49512.2 RW Y  5=Internal exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) 0 ... 5 1 num
FE FE54 17318 WORD Y -1 49512.4 RW N Minimum external exchanger fan speed setpoint in Heat -500 ... 999 55 °C/Bar
FE FE55 17320 WORD Y -1 49512.6 RW N Maximum external exchanger speed differential in Heat 1 ... 999 17 °C/Bar
FE FE56 17322 WORD -1 49513 RW N External exchanger fan speed proportional band in Heat 0 ... 255 10 °C/Bar
FE FE57 17324 WORD -1 49513.2 RW N Maximum external exchanger fan speed hysteresis in Heat 1 ... 255 5 °C/Bar
FE FE58 17326 WORD -1 49513.4 RW N External exchanger fan cut-off hysteresis in Heat 1 ... 255 5 °C/Bar
FE FE59 17328 WORD -1 49513.6 RW N External exchanger fan cut-off differential in Heat 0 ... 255 10 °C/Bar
External circuit water pump mode selection
 0=Pump disabled
 1=Continuous (always on)
 2=on request (pump on when compressor on)
PE PE00 50098 BYTE 49514 RW Y  3 = Operation in Recovery 0 ... 3 0 num
PE PE01 50099 BYTE 49514.2 RW Y External circuit water pump OFF time for antilock 0 ... 255 50 hours
PE PE02 50100 BYTE 49514.4 RW Y External circuit water pump pick-up time 0 ... 255 2 sec
PE PE03 50101 BYTE 49514.6 RW Y External circuit pump minimum ON time 0 ... 255 10 Sec x 10
PE PE04 50102 BYTE 49515 RW Y External circuit pump minimum OFF time 10 ... 10 10 sec
Maximum external circuit water pump changeover start time
Pump operation time, after which
the active pump is switched off and replaced by the second pump if available.
PE PE05 50103 BYTE 49515.2 RW Y If = 0 the second pump is not called 0 ... 255 0 hours
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
Operation in response to request
PE PE20 50106 BYTE 49516 RW Y External circuit pump switch-on - compressor switch-on delay 0 ... 255 60 sec
PE PE21 50107 BYTE 49516.2 RW Y Compressor switch-off - external circuit pump switch-off delay 0 ... 255 60 sec
External circuit pump periodic activation interval
Modifies the maximum pump off time
after which the pump is forced on
PE PE22 50108 BYTE 49516.4 RW Y If modulating, it will be switched on a maximum speed 0 ... 255 30 min
Modulating function in Cool mode
PE PE30 50109 BYTE 49516.6 RW Y Minimum external circuit water pump speed in Cool 1 ... 100 30 %
PE PE31 50114 BYTE 49517 RW N Maximum external circuit water pump speed in Cool 0 ... 100 100 %
PE PE32 17342 WORD Y -1 49517.2 RW N Minimum external circuit water pump speed setpoint in Cool -500 ... 999 200 °C
PE PE33 17344 WORD Y -1 49517.4 RW N External circuit water pump proportional band in Cool -500 ... 999 80 °C
Select probe for external exchanger pump regulation in Cool
 0=No probe
 1=External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2)
 2=High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
 3=Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
 4=External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2)
PE PE36 50130 BYTE 49518.2 RW Y  5=Internal exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) 0 ... 5 0 num
Modulating function in Heat mode
PE PE40 50117 BYTE 49518.4 RW N Minimum external circuit water pump speed in Heat 1 ... 100 30 %
PE PE41 50122 BYTE 49518.6 RW N Maximum external circuit water pump speed in Heat 0 ... 100 100 %
PE PE42 17350 WORD Y -1 49519 RW N Minimum external circuit water pump speed setpoint in Heat -500 ... 999 200 °C
PE PE43 17352 WORD Y -1 49519.2 RW N External circuit water pump proportional band in Heat -500 ... 999 180 °C
Select probe for external exchanger pump regulation in Heat
 0=No probe
 1=External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2)
 2=High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
 3=Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
 4=External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2)
PE PE46 50131 BYTE 49520 RW N  5=Internal exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) 0 ... 5 0 num
ANTIFREEZE with PUMP
Select probe for external circuit + water pump antifreeze
 0=No probe (pump in antifreeze disabled)
 1=Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
 2=Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
 3=Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
 4=Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
 5=Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature
PE PE50 50125 BYTE 49520.2  6=External temperature 0 ... 6 0 num
PE PE51 17358 WORD Y -1 49520.4 External circuit water pump set point control for antifreeze -500 ... 999 80 °C
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
PE PE52 17360 WORD Y -1 49520.6 External circuit water pump hysteresis control for antifreeze -500 ... 999 20 °C
Enable internal exchanger antifreeze heaters in standby
 0 = Heaters disabled
Hi HI00 50126 BYTE 49521 RW Y  1 = Heaters enabled 0 ... 1 0 num
Enable force heaters on during defrost
 0 = Heaters enabled (ON) when requested by temperature controller (antifreeze or
integrated use)
Hi HI01 50127 BYTE 49521.2 RW Y  1 = Heaters always enabled ON during defrost 0 ... 3 0 num
Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 1
 0=No probe (antifreeze heater disabled)
 1=Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
 2=Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
 3=Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
 4=Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
Hi HI10 50130 BYTE 49521.4 RW Y  5=Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature 0 ... 5 2 num
Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 2
Hi HI11 50131 BYTE 49521.6 RW Y See HI11 0 ... 5 2 num
Hi HI12 17364 WORD Y -1 49522 RW N Internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze Hi14 ... Hi13 40 °C
Hi HI13 17366 WORD Y -1 49522.2 RW Y Maximum internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze Hi14 ... 999 70 °C
Hi HI14 17368 WORD Y -1 49522.4 RW Y Minimum internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze -500 ... Hi13 -100 °C
Hi HI15 17370 WORD -1 49522.6 RW N Internal exchanger heater regulator hysteresis for antifreeze 1 ... 255 5 °C
Select heater mode for internal exchanger in integration mode
 0=Integration heaters disabled
 1=Integration heaters with differential setpoint proportional to external temperature
 2=Integration heaters with differential setpoint in steps to external temperature
Hi HI20 50146 BYTE 49523 RW Y  3=Integration heaters with differential setpoint fixed 0 ... 3 0 num
Hi HI21 17380 WORD Y -1 49523.2 RW N Internal exchanger heater dynamic differential setpoint in integrated use -500 ... 999 100 °C
Hi HI22 17382 WORD -1 49523.4 RW Y Maximum dynamic differential internal exchanger heaters in integrated use 0 ... 999 255 °C
Hi HI23 17384 WORD -1 49523.6 RW N Heater differential in integration mode with heat pump lock 0 ... 999 0 °C
Hi HI24 17386 WORD -1 49524 RW N Internal exchanger heater dynamic differential proportional band in integrated use 0 ... 999 50 °C
Hi HI25 17388 WORD -1 49524.2 RW N Internal exchanger heater regulator hysteresis in integrated use 1 ... 255 10 °C
Hi HI26 17390 WORD -1 49524.4 RW N Differential setpoint internal exchanger heater 2 on in integrated use 0 ... 999 30 °C
Enable external exchanger antifreeze heaters in standby
 0 = Heaters disabled
HE HE00 50166 BYTE 49524.6 RW Y  1 = Heaters enabled 0 ... 1 0 num
Select probe for antifreeze external exchanger + heater 1
 0=No probe (antifreeze heater disabled)
 1=Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature
 2=Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature
HE HE10 50168 BYTE 49525 RW Y  3=Recovery (or external) exchanger outlet water temperature 0 ... 4 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
 4=External temperature
Select probe for antifreeze external exchanger + heater 2
HE HE11 50169 BYTE 49525.2 RW Y See HE10 0 ... 4 0 num
HE HE12 17402 WORD Y -1 49525.4 RW N External exchanger heater switch on setpoint for antifreeze HE14 ... HE13 40 °C
HE HE13 17404 WORD Y -1 49525.6 RW Y Maximum external exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze HE14 ... 999 70 °C
HE HE14 17406 WORD Y -1 49526 RW Y Minimum external exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze -500 ... HE13 -100 °C
HE HE15 17408 WORD -1 49526.2 RW N External exchanger heater regulator hysteresis for antifreeze 1 ... 255 10 °C
Select probe for auxiliary output regulator
 0=No probe (auxiliary output disabled)
 1=External temperature
 2=External exchanger temperature circuit 1
 3=External exchanger temperature circuit 2
 4=Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature
 5=Recovery (or external) exchanger outlet water temperature
HA HA00 50186 BYTE 49526.4 RW Y  6=NOT USED 0 ... 6 0 num
HA HA01 17420 WORD Y -1 49526.6 RW Y Auxiliary output regulator setpoint -500 ... 999 20 °C
HA HA02 17422 WORD Y -1 49527 RW Y Auxiliary output regulator hysteresis -500 ... 999 10 °C
Select boiler mode
 0=Boiler disabled
 1=Boiler with differential setpoint proportional to external temperature
 2=Boiler with differential setpoint in steps as a function of external temperature
br Br00 50200 BYTE 49527.2 RW Y  3=Boiler with differential setpoint fixed 0 ... 3 0 num
br Br01 17434 WORD Y -1 49527.4 RW N Boiler dynamic differential setpoint -500 ... 999 100 °C
br Br02 17436 WORD -1 49527.6 RW Y Maximum boiler dynamic differential 0 ... 999 255 °C
Boiler dynamic differential with heat pump lock
br Br03 17438 WORD -1 49528 RW Y In case of heat pump lock, the Boiler differential takes the fixed value of this parameter 0 ... 999 0 °C
br Br04 17440 WORD -1 49528.2 RW N Boiler dynamic differential proportional band 0 ... 999 50 °C
br Br05 17442 WORD -1 49528.4 RW N Boiler regulator hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
Select Free-Cooling mode
 0 = FreeCooling disabled
 1 = Internal FreeCooling
Fc Fc00 50222 BYTE 49528.6 RW Y  2 = External FreeCooling 0 ... 2 0 num
Fc Fc01 17456 WORD Y -1 49529 RW N Free-Cooling activation differential -500 ... 999 50 °C
Fc Fc02 17458 WORD -1 49529.2 RW N Free-Cooling hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
Fc Fc03 17460 WORD 49529.4 RW Y Free Cooling minimum deactivation/activation time 0 ... 999 15 secs
Fc Fc04 17462 WORD Y -1 49529.6 RW N Antifreeze pre-alarm Free-Cooling deactivation setpoint -500 ... 999 40 °C
Fc Fc05 50232 BYTE 49530 RW Y External Free-Cooling fan pick-up time 0 ... 60 2 sec
Fc Fc06 50233 BYTE 49530.2 RW Y Enable power limit to 50 in Free-Cooling 0 ... 1 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
 0 = power limit to 50 in Free-Cooling disabled
 1 = power limit to 50 in Free-Cooling enabled
Fc Fc07 17466 WORD Y -1 49530.4 RW N Setpoint for deactivation of power limit to 50 in Free-Cooling -500 ... 999 100 °C
Free Cooling Fan Modulation
Fc Fc10 50240 BYTE 49530.6 RW Y Free-Cooling fan minimum speed 0 ... 100 50 %
Fc Fc11 50241 BYTE 49531 RW Y Free-Cooling fan average speed 0 ... 100 95 %
Fc Fc12 50242 BYTE 49531.2 RW Y Free-Cooling fan maximum speed 0 ... 100 100 %
Fc Fc14 17476 WORD Y -1 49531.6 RW N Setpoint differential for Free-Cooling fan minimum speed -500 ... 999 55 °C
Fc Fc15 17478 WORD Y -1 49532 RW N Free-Cooling fan maximum speed differential 1... 999 35 °C
Fc Fc16 17480 WORD -1 49532.2 RW N Proportional band for Free-Cooling fan speed 0... 999 10 °C
Fc Fc17 17482 WORD -1 49532.4 RW N Free-Cooling fan maximum speed hysteresis 1 ... 255 10 °C
Fc Fc18 17484 WORD -1 49532.6 RW N Free-Cooling fan cut-off hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
Fc Fc19 17486 WORD Y -1 49533 RW N Free-Cooling fan cut-off differential -500 ... 999 20 °C
Select defrost mode
 0= Defrost disabled
 1 = Simultaneous defrost (only for dual-circuit systems)
 2 = Independent defrost (for single-circuit systems and dual-circuit systems with
dF dF00 50262 BYTE 49533.2 RW Y separate condensation) 0 ... 2 0 num
Enable maximum power for non-defrost circuit
0= force maximum power NOT enabled
dF dF01 50263 BYTE 49533.4 RW Y 1= force maximum power enabled 0 ... 1 0 num
Select probe to enable interval count between defrosts
 0 = External exchanger temperature
 1 = High pressure input
 2 = Low pressure input
 3 = Internal exchanger pressure
dF dF10 50266 BYTE 49533.6 RW Y  4 = External exchanger pressure 0 ... 4 1 Num.
dF dF11 17500 WORD Y -1 49534 RW N Enable interval count between defrosts setpoint -500 ... 999 25 °C/Bar
dF dF12 17502 WORD Y -1 49534.2 RW N Setpoint to clear cumulative time between defrosts -500 ... 999 130 °C/Bar
dF dF13 17504 WORD 49534.4 RW Y Cumulative interval between defrosts 1... 255 20 Min
dF dF14 17506 WORD 49534.6 RW Y Minimum interval between defrost cycles 1 ... 255 60 Min
Select probe to end defrost
 0 = External exchanger temperature
 1 = High pressure input
 2 = Low pressure input
 3 = Internal exchanger pressure
dF dF20 50280 BYTE 49535 RW Y  4 = External exchanger pressure 0 ... 4 1 Num.
dF dF21 17514 WORD Y -1 49535.2 RW N Defrost deactivation setpoint -500 ... 999 130 °C/Bar
dF dF22 17516 WORD 49535.4 RW Y Maximum defrost time 1 ... 255 5 Minutes
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
dF dF23 17518 WORD 49535.6 RW Y Dripping time 0 ... 255 40 sec
dF dF30 17524 WORD Y -1 49536 RW Y Maximum dynamic defrost differential -500 ... 999 0 °C/Bar
dF dF31 17526 WORD Y -1 49536.2 RW N Defrost dynamic differential setpoint -500 ... 999 100 °C
dF dF32 17528 WORD Y -1 49536.4 RW N Dynamic defrost differential proportional band -500 ... 999 -50 °C
External temperature controller dynamic differential selection
 0 = disabled
 1 = proportional
dS dS00 49876 BYTE 49536.6 RW Y  2 = by steps 0 ... 2 0 num
dS dS01 17096 WORD Y -1 49537 RW N Temperature controller dynamic differential proportional band in Cool -500 ... 999 50 °C
dS dS02 17098 WORD Y -1 49537.2 RW N Temperature controller dynamic differential proportional band in Heat -500 ... 999 50 °C
dS dS03 17100 WORD Y -1 49537.4 RW Y Maximum temperature controller dynamic differential in Cool -500 ... 999 50 °C
dS dS04 17102 WORD Y -1 49537.6 RW Y Maximum temperature controller dynamic differential in Heat -500 ... 999 50 °C
dS dS05 17104 WORD Y -1 49538 RW N Temperature controller dynamic differential setpoint in Cool -500 ... 999 150 °C
dS dS06 17106 WORD Y -1 49538.2 RW N Temperature controller dynamic differential setpoint in Heat -500 ... 999 220 °C
Select no accumulation mode
 0 = Accumulation disabled
 1 = Setpoint
 2 = Hysteresis
Ad Ad00 50308 BYTE 49538.4 RW Y  3 = Setpoint and hysteresis 0 ... 3 0 Num.
Ad Ad01 17542 WORD -1 49538.6 RW Y Accumulation offset constant 0 ... 255 20 Num.
Ad Ad02 17544 WORD -1 49539 RW N Accumulator offset differential 0 ... 255 5 °C
Ad Ad03 17546 WORD Y -1 49539.2 RW N Block accumulation offset setpoint in cooling mode -500 ... 999 40 °C
Ad Ad04 17548 WORD Y -1 49539.4 RW N Block accumulation offset setpoint in heating mode -500 ... 999 500 °C
Ad Ad05 17550 WORD 49539.6 RW Y Compressor on time for accumulation offset/regression 0 ... 255 24 sec x 10
Ad Ad06 17552 WORD 49540 RW Y Reference compressor on time for accumulation offset 0 ... 255 18 sec x 10
Select antifreeze probe with circuit 1 heat pump
 0=No probe (Anti-freeze with Heat Pump function disabled)
 1=Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
 2=Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
 3=Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
 4=Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
AF AF00 50332 BYTE 49540.2 RW Y  5=Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature 0 ... 5 0 num
Select antifreeze probe with circuit 2 heat pump
AF AF01 50333 BYTE 49540.4 RW Y See AF00 0 ... 5 0 num
AF AF02 17566 WORD Y -1 49540.6 RW N Anti-freeze regulator setpoint with heat pump -500 ... 999 50 °C
AF AF03 17568 WORD -1 49541 RW N Anti-freeze regulator hysteresis with heat pump 1 ... 125 30 °C
Select probe for heat pump 1 lock
HP HP00 50408 BYTE 49550.6 RW Y  0=No probe (pump lock disabled) 0 ... 7 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
 1=External temperature - Heating
 2=Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature - Cooling
 3=Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature - Cooling
 4=Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature - Cooling
 5=Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature - Cooling
 6=Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature - Cooling
 7=Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature - Cooling
HP HP01 17642 WORD Y -1 49551 RW N Block heat pump 1 setpoint -500 ... 999 0 °C
HP HP02 17644 WORD -1 49551.2 RW N Block heat pump 1 hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
HP HP03 17646 WORD Y -1 49551.4 RW Y Heat pump 1 lock maximum dynamic differential -500 ... 999 0 °C
HP HP04 17648 WORD Y -1 49551.6 RW Y Block heat pump 1 dynamic differential setpoint -500 ... 999 0 °C
HP HP05 17650 WORD Y -1 49552 RW Y Block heat pump 1 dynamic differential proportional band -500 ... 999 0 °C
HP HP10 50424 BYTE 49552.2 RW Y Select probe for heat pump 2 lock 0 ... 7 0 num
HP HP11 17658 WORD Y -1 49552.4 RW N Heat pump 2 lock setpoint -500 ... 999 450 °C
HP HP12 17660 WORD -1 49552.6 RW N Heat pump 2 lock hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
Power limitation on external temperature
PL PL00 17676 WORD -1 49553 RW Y Power limitation proportional band on external temperature 0 ... 255 0 °C
PL PL01 17678 WORD Y -1 49553.2 RW N External temperature setpoint for power limitation in Cool -500 ... 999 500 °C
PL PL02 17680 WORD Y -1 49553.4 RW N External temperature setpoint for power limitation in Heat -500 ... 999 -50 °C
Power limitation on temperature
PL PL10 17686 WORD -1 49553.6 RW Y Power limitation proportional band on water/air temperature 0 ... 255 0 °C
Power limitation probe selection on water/air temperature
 0=No probe (Controller disabled)
 1=Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
 2=Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
 3=Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature
 4=Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature
 5=Recovery (or external) exchanger outlet water temperature
PL PL11 50456 BYTE 49554 RW Y  6=Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature 0 ... 6 2 Num.
PL PL12 17690 WORD Y -1 49554.2 RW N High temperature setpoint for power limitation -500 ... 999 500 °C
PL PL13 17692 WORD Y -1 49554.4 RW N Low temperature setpoint for power limitation -500 ... 999 50 °C
Power limitation on pressure
PL PL20 17694 WORD -1 49554.6 RW Y Power limitation proportional band on pressure 0 ... 255 0 Bar
PL PL21 17696 WORD Y -1 49555 RW N High pressure setpoint for power limitation -500 ... 999 400 Bar
PL PL22 17698 WORD Y -1 49555.2 RW N Low pressure setpoint for power limitation -500 ... 999 30 Bar
Enable time band operation
 0= time bands disabled
tE tE00 50688 BYTE 49555.4 RW Y  1= time bands enabled 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE01 50689 BYTE 49555.6 RW Y Select profile, day 1 1 ... 3 1 Num.
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
To select the profile of the first day of the week MONDAY
 1= Profile 1
 2= Profile 2
 3= Profile 3
Select profile, day 2
tE tE02 50690 BYTE 49556 RW Y TUESDAY – See tE01 1 ... 3 1 Num.
Select profile, day 3
tE tE03 50691 BYTE 49556.2 RW Y WEDNESDAY – See tE01 1 ... 3 1 Num.
Select profile, day 4
tE tE04 50692 BYTE 49556.4 RW Y THURSDAY – See tE01 1 ... 3 1 Num.
Select profile, day 5
tE tE05 50693 BYTE 49556.6 RW Y FRIDAY – See tE01 1 ... 3 1 Num.
Select profile, day 6
tE tE06 50694 BYTE 49557 RW Y SATURDAY – See tE01 1 ... 3 2 Num.
Select profile, day 7
tE tE07 50695 BYTE 49557.2 RW Y SUNDAY – See tE01 1 ... 3 3 Num.
PROFILE 1
EVENT 1 / PROFILE 1
tE tE10 50700 BYTE 49557.4 RW Y Event start time hour 1, profile 1 0 ... 23 7 Hours
tE tE11 50701 BYTE 49557.6 RW Y Event start time minutes 1, profile 1 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
Operating mode from event 1, profile 1
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
tE tE12 50702 BYTE 49558 RW Y  1 = Standby 0 ... 1 0 Num.
Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 1, profile 1
tE tE13 17936 WORD Y -1 49558.2 RW N Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode) tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 1, profile 1
tE tE14 17938 WORD Y -1 49558.4 RW N Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode) tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
PROFILE 1
EVENT 2 / PROFILE 1 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE17 50712 BYTE 49559 RW Y Event start time hour 2, profile 1 0 ... 23 12 Hours
tE tE18 50713 BYTE 49559.2 RW Y Event start time minutes 2, profile 1 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE19 50714 BYTE 49559.4 RW Y Operating mode from event 2, profile 1 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE20 17948 WORD Y -1 49559.6 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 2, profile 1 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tE tE21 17950 WORD Y -1 49560 RW N Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 2, profile 1 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
PROFILE 1
EVENT 3 / PROFILE 1 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE24 50724 BYTE 49560.4 RW Y Event start time hour 3, profile 1 0 ... 23 15 Hours
tE tE25 50725 BYTE 49560.6 RW Y Event start time minutes 3, profile 1 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE26 50726 BYTE 49561 RW Y Operating mode from event 3, profile 1 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE27 17960 WORD Y -1 49561.2 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 3, profile 1 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
tE tE28 17962 WORD Y -1 49561.4 RW N Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 3, profile 1 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
PROFILE 1
EVENT 4 / PROFILE 1 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE31 50736 BYTE 49562 RW Y Event start time hour 4, profile 1 0 ... 23 22 Hours
tE tE32 50737 BYTE 49562.2 RW Y Event start time minutes 4, profile 1 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE33 50738 BYTE 49562.4 RW Y Operating mode from event 4, profile 1 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE34 17972 WORD Y -1 49562.6 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 4, profile 1 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tE tE35 17974 WORD Y -1 49563 RW N Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 4, profile 1 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
PROFILE 2
EVENT 1 / PROFILE 2 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE38 50748 BYTE 49563.4 RW Y Event start time hour 1, profile 2 0 ... 23 7 Hours
tE tE39 50749 BYTE 49563.6 RW Y Event start time minutes 1, profile 2 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE40 50750 BYTE 49564 RW Y Operating mode from event 1, profile 2 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE41 17984 WORD Y -1 49564.2 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 1, profile 2 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tE tE42 17986 WORD Y -1 49564.4 RW N Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 1, profile 2 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
PROFILE 2
EVENT 2 / PROFILE 2 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE45 50760 BYTE 49565 RW Y Event start time hour 2, profile 2 0 ... 23 12 Hours
tE tE46 50761 BYTE 49565.2 RW Y Event start time minutes 2, profile 2 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE47 50762 BYTE 49565.4 RW Y Operating mode from event 2, profile 2 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE48 17996 WORD Y -1 49565.6 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 2, profile 2 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tE tE49 17998 WORD Y -1 49566 RW N Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 2, profile 2 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
PROFILE 2
EVENT 3 / PROFILE 2 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE52 50772 BYTE 49566.4 RW Y Event start time hour 3, profile 2 0 ... 23 15 Hours
tE tE53 50773 BYTE 49566.6 RW Y Event start time minutes 3, profile 2 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE54 50774 BYTE 49567 RW Y Operating mode from event 3, profile 2 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE55 18008 WORD Y -1 49567.2 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 3, profile 2 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tE tE56 18010 WORD Y -1 49567.4 RW N Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 3, profile 2 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
PROFILE 2
EVENT 4 / PROFILE 2 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE59 50784 BYTE 49568 RW Y Event start time hour 4, profile 2 0 ... 23 22 Hours
tE tE60 50785 BYTE 49568.2 RW Y Event start time minutes 4, profile 2 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE61 50786 BYTE 49568.4 RW Y Operating mode from event 4, profile 2 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE62 18020 WORD Y -1 49568.6 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 4, profile 2 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tE tE63 18022 WORD Y -1 49569 RW N Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 4, profile 2 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
PROFILE 3
EVENT 1 / PROFILE 3 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE66 50796 BYTE 49569.4 RW Y Event start time hour 1, profile 3 0 ... 23 7 Hours
tE tE67 50797 BYTE 49569.6 RW Y Event start time minutes 1, profile 3 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE68 50798 BYTE 49570 RW Y Operating mode from event 1, profile 3 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE69 18032 WORD Y -1 49570.2 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 1, profile 3 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tE tE70 18034 WORD Y -1 49570.4 RW N Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 1, profile 3 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
PROFILE 3
EVENT 2 / PROFILE 3 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE73 50808 BYTE 49571 RW Y Event start time hour 2, profile 3 0 ... 23 12 Hours
tE tE74 50809 BYTE 49571.2 RW Y Event start time minutes 2, profile 3 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE75 50810 BYTE 49571.4 RW Y Operating mode from event 2, profile 3 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE76 18044 WORD Y -1 49571.6 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 2, profile 3 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tE tE77 18046 WORD Y -1 49572 RW N Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 2, profile 3 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
PROFILE 3
EVENT 3 / PROFILE 3 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE80 50820 BYTE 49572.4 RW Y Event start time hour 3, profile 3 0 ... 23 15 Hours
tE tE81 50821 BYTE 49572.6 RW Y Event start time minutes 3, profile 3 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE82 50822 BYTE 49573 RW Y Operating mode from event 3, profile 3 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE83 18056 WORD Y -1 49573.2 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 3, profile 3 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tE tE84 18058 WORD Y -1 49573.4 RW N Heat mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 3, profile 3 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
PROFILE 3
EVENT 4 / PROFILE 3 (see tE10…tE14)
tE tE87 50832 BYTE 49574 RW Y Event start time hour 4, profile 3 0 ... 23 22 Hours
tE tE88 50833 BYTE 49574.2 RW Y Event start time minutes 4, profile 3 0 ... 59 0 Minutes
tE tE89 50834 BYTE 49574.4 RW Y Operating mode from event 4, profile 3 0 ... 1 0 Num.
tE tE90 18068 WORD Y -1 49574.6 RW N Cool mode temperature controller setpoint, from event 4, profile 3 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tE tE91 18070 WORD Y -1 49575 RW N Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 3 tr21 ...tr22 400 °C
Time interval for alarm event count
To modify the interval in which alarm events are counted
AL AL00 50572 BYTE 49575.4 RW Y Alarms are sampled every AL00/32 = sampling time 1 ... 99 60 Min
AL AL01 50573 BYTE 49575.6 RW Y Maximum number of events in alarm log for alarm signal 0 ... 99 99 num
DIGITAL ALARMS
AL AL10 50580 BYTE 49576 RW Y Number of high pressure alarm events 1 ... 255 1 num
AL AL11 50581 BYTE 49576.2 RW Y Low pressure alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 120 sec
AL AL12 50582 BYTE 49576.4 RW Y Number of low pressure alarms 1 ... 255 3 num
AL AL13 50583 BYTE 49576.6 RW Y Enable low pressure alarm during defrost 0 ... 1 0 num
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
 0 = Alarm disabled
 1 = Alarm enabled
AL AL14 50584 BYTE 49577 RW Y Bypass flow switch time from activation of the internal circuit water pump 0 ... 255 15 sec
AL AL15 50585 BYTE 49577.2 RW Y Flow switch activation/deactivation time on internal circuit automatic alarm 0 ... 255 5 sec
AL AL16 50586 BYTE 49577.4 RW Y Flow switch activation time for internal circuit manual alarm 0 ... 255 2 Sec x 10
AL AL17 50587 BYTE 49577.6 RW Y Bypass flow switch time from activation of the external circuit water pump 0 ... 255 15 sec
AL AL18 50588 BYTE 49578 RW Y Flow switch activation/deactivation time on external circuit automatic alarm 0 ... 255 5 sec
AL AL19 50589 BYTE 49578.2 RW Y Flow switch activation time for external circuit manual alarm 0 ... 255 2 sec x 10
AL AL20 50590 BYTE 49578.4 RW Y Compressor thermoswitch alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 1 sec
AL AL21 50591 BYTE 49578.6 RW Y Number of compressor thermoswitch alarms 1 ... 255 1 num
AL AL22 50592 BYTE 49579 RW Y Compressor oil pressure switch alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 1 sec
AL AL23 50593 BYTE 49579.2 RW Y Number of compressor oil pressure switch alarms 1 ... 255 1 num
AL AL24 50594 BYTE 49579.4 RW Y Number of internal exchanger fan thermoswitch alarms 1 ... 255 1 num
AL AL25 50595 BYTE 49579.6 RW Y Number of external exchanger fan thermoswitch alarms 1 ... 255 1 num
AL AL26 50596 BYTE 49580 RW Y Number of internal circuit pump thermoswitch alarms 1 ... 255 2 num
AL AL27 50597 BYTE 49580.2 RW Y Number of external circuit pump thermoswitch alarms 1 ... 255 2 num
ANALOGUE ALARMS
AL AL40 17840 WORD Y -1 49580.4 RW N High pressure alarm regulator setpoint from analogue input -500 ... 999 420 Bar
AL AL41 17842 WORD -1 49580.6 RW N High pressure alarm regulator hysteresis from analogue input 1 ... 255 20 Bar
AL AL42 50612 BYTE 49581 RW Y Number of high pressure alarms from analogue input 1 ... 255 1 num
AL AL43 50613 BYTE 49581.2 RW Y Low pressure alarm bypass time from analogue input 0 ... 255 10 sec
AL AL44 17846 WORD Y -1 49581.4 RW N Low pressure alarm regulator setpoint from analogue input -500 ... 999 20 Bar
AL AL45 17848 WORD -1 49581.6 RW N Low pressure alarm regulator hysteresis from analogue input 1 ... 255 20 Bar
AL AL46 50618 BYTE 49582 RW Y Number of low pressure alarms from analogue input 1 ... 255 2 num
AL AL47 17852 WORD Y -1 49582.2 RW N High temperature alarm regulator setpoint from analogue input -500 ... 999 800 °C
AL AL48 17854 WORD -1 49582.4 RW N High temperature alarm regulator hysteresis from analogue input 1 ... 255 20 °C
AL AL49 50624 BYTE 49582.6 RW Y Time high temperature before alarm 0 ... 255 30 sec x 10
AL AL50 50625 BYTE 49583 RW Y Internal circuit antifreeze alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 1 min
AL AL51 17858 WORD Y -1 49583.2 RW N Internal circuit antifreeze alarm regulator setpoint -500 ... 999 40 °C
AL AL52 17860 WORD -1 49583.4 RW N Internal circuit antifreeze alarm regulator hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
AL AL53 50630 BYTE 49583.6 RW Y Number of internal circuit antifreeze alarms 1 ... 255 1 num
AL AL54 50631 BYTE 49584 RW Y External circuit antifreeze alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 1 min
AL AL55 17864 WORD Y -1 49584.2 RW N External circuit antifreeze alarm regulator setpoint -500 ... 999 40 °C
AL AL56 17866 WORD -1 49584.4 RW N External circuit antifreeze alarm regulator hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
 DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
VALUE PAR

DATA SIZE
ADDRESS

ADDRESS

DEFAULT
VAL PAR
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

R/W
EXP
CPL

UM
NO REFRIGERANT
AL AL57 50636 BYTE 49584.6 RW Y Number of external circuit antifreeze alarms 1 ... 255 1 num
AL AL70 50640 BYTE 49585 RW Y Enable low refrigerant alarm 0 ... 1 0 num
AL AL71 50641 BYTE 49585.2 RW Y Low refrigerant alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 5 min
AL AL72 17874 WORD -1 49585.4 RW N Low refrigerant alarm differential 0 ... 255 20 °C
AL AL73 50644 BYTE 49585.6 RW Y Time low refrigerant before alarm 0 ... 255 30 min
MAINTENANCE
AL AL80 50652 BYTE 49586 RW Y Compressor start time for maintenance signal 0 ... 255 0 hoursx100
AL AL81 50653 BYTE 49586.2 RW Y Internal pump start time on maintenance signal 0 ... 255 0 hoursx100
AL AL82 50654 BYTE 49586.4 RW Y External pump start time on maintenance signal 0 ... 255 0 hoursx100
Select recovery mode
 0= Recovery Disabled
 1 = Recovery circuit 1
 2 = Recovery circuit 2
rC rC00 50508 BYTE 49587.4 RW Y  3 = Recovery on both circuits 1 and 2 0 ... 3 0 num
rC rC01 17742 WORD Y -1 49587.6 RW N Recovery regulator set point -500 ... 999 450 °C
rC rC02 17744 WORD -1 49588 RW N Recovery regulator hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
rC rC03 17746 WORD Y -1 49588.2 RW N Circuits switching differential in recovery -500 ... 999 30 °C
rC rC04 17748 WORD 49588.4 RW Y Recovery minimum time 0 ... 999 10 min
Power phase-splitting time for recovery switch-on/switch-off
Modifies the power-splitting phase time of the compressors before and after switch-on of the
rC rC05 17750 WORD 49588.6 RW Y Recovery valve 0 ... 999 15 sec
rC rC06 17752 WORD Y -1 49589 RW N Recovery switch-off temperature set point -500 ... 999 550 °C
rC rC07 17754 WORD -1 49589.2 RW N Recovery switch-off pressure set point 0 ... 255 200 Bar

28.2.2 Folder visibility table

LABEL ADDRESS R/W DESCRIPTION DATA SIZE CPL RANGE DEFAULT

_VisSt0 49424 RW Visibility Folder Ai 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt1 49424.2 RW Visibility Folder 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt2 49424.4 RW Visibility Folder AO 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt3 49424.6 RW Visibility Folder dO 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt4 49425 RW Visibility Folder SP 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt5 49425.2 RW Visibility Folder Sr 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt6 49425.4 RW Visibility Folder Hr 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
LABEL ADDRESS R/W DESCRIPTION DATA SIZE CPL RANGE DEFAULT
_VisPa0 49425.6 RW Visibility Folder Par 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPa1 49426 RW Visibility Folder Fnc 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPa2 49426.2 RW Visibility Folder PASS 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPa3 49426.4 RW Visibility Folder EU 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSSp0 49426.6 RW Visibility Folder SP/COOL 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSSp1 49427 RW Visibility Folder SP/HEAT 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSSr0 49427.2 RW Visibility Folder Sr/COOL 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSSr1 49427.4 RW Visibility Folder Sr/HEAT 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP0 49427.6 RW Visibility Folder Par/CL 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP1 49428 RW Visibility Folder Par/Cr 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP2 49428.2 RW Visibility Folder Par/CE 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP3 49428.4 RW Visibility Folder Par/CF 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP4 49428.6 RW Visibility Folder Par/Ui 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP5 49429 RW Visibility Folder Par/tr 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP6 49429.2 RW Visibility Folder Par/St 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP7 49429.4 RW Visibility Folder Par/CP 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP8 49429.6 RW Visibility Folder Par/Pi 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP9 49430 RW Visibility Folder Par/Fi 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP10 49430.2 RW Visibility Folder Par/FE 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP11 49430.4 RW Visibility Folder Par/PE 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP12 49430.6 RW Visibility Folder Par/Hi 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP13 49431 RW Visibility Folder Par/HE 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP14 49431.2 RW Visibility Folder Par/HA 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP15 49431.4 RW Visibility Folder Par/br 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP16 49431.6 RW Visibility Folder Par/FC 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP17 49432 RW Visibility Folder Par/dF 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP18 49432.2 RW Visibility Folder Par/dS 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP19 49432.4 RW Visibility Folder Par/Ad 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP20 49432.6 RW Visibility Folder Par/AF 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP22 49433.2 RW Visibility Folder Par/HP 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP23 49433.4 RW Visibility Folder Par/PL 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
LABEL ADDRESS R/W DESCRIPTION DATA SIZE CPL RANGE DEFAULT
_VisPP24 49433.6 RW Visibility Folder Par/tE 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP25 49434 RW Visibility Folder Par/AL 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP26 49434.2 RW Visibility Folder Par/rC 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPF0 49434.4 RW Visibility Folder Fnc/dEF 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPF1 49434.6 RW Visibility Folder Fnc/tA 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPF2 49435 RW Visibility Folder Fnc/St 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPF3 49435.2 RW Visibility Folder Fnc/CC 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPF4 49435.4 RW Visibility Folder Fnc/Eur 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPFCC0 49576 RW Visibility Folder Fnc/CC/UL 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPFCC1 49576.2 RW Visibility Folder Fnc/CC/dL 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPFCC2 49576.4 RW Visibility Folder Fnc/CC/Fr 2 bits 0 ... 3 3 num
28.2.3 Client Table

INDEX FOLDER LABEL ADDRESS R/W DESCRIPTION DATA SIZE CPL RANGE DEFAULT EXP UM
1 AI LocalAInput[0] 412 R AIL analogue input 1 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
2 AI LocalAInput[1] 414 R AIL analogue input 2 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
3 AI LocalAInput[2] 416 R AIL analogue input 3 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C/Bar
4 AI LocalAInput[3] 418 R AIL analogue input 4 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C/Bar
5 AI LocalAInput[4] 420 R AIL analogue input 5 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
6 DI DIL LocalDigInput 1 33158 R DIL digital input 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
7 DI DIL LocalDigInput 2 33158.1 R DIL digital input 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
8 DI DIL LocalDigInput 3 33158.2 R DIL digital input 3 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
9 DI DIL LocalDigInput 4 33158.3 R DIL digital input 4 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
10 DI DIL LocalDigInput 5 33158.4 R DIL digital input 5 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
11 DI DIL LocalDigInput 6 33158.5 R DIL digital input 6 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
12 DI DIL LocalDigInput 7 33158.6 R DIL digital input 7 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
13 DO DOL LocalDigOutput 1 33159.2 R DOL digital output 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
14 DO DOL LocalDigOutput 2 33159.3 R DOL digital output 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
15 DO DOL LocalDigOutput 3 33159.4 R DOL digital output 3 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
16 DO DOL LocalDigOutput 4 33159 R DOL digital output 4 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
17 DO DOL LocalDigOutput 5 33159.1 R DOL digital output 5 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
18 DO DOL LocalDigOutput 6 33159.5 R DOL digital output 6 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
19 AO AOL LocalDigOutput 1 33159.6 R AOL digital output 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
20 AO AOL LocalDigOutput 2 33159.7 R AOL digital output 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
21 AO TC Analog.Out 1 33224 R TCL analogue output 1 BYTE Y 0 ... 100 0 num
22 AO AOL Analog.Out 1 33225 R AOL analogue output 1 BYTE Y 0 ... 100 0 num
23 AO AOL Analog.Out 2 33226 R AOL analogue output 2 BYTE Y 0 ... 100 0 num
24 AO AOL Analog.Out 3 466 R AOL analogue output 3 WORD Y 0 ... 999 0 -1 num
25 AO AOL Analog.Out 4 468 R AOL analogue output 4 WORD Y 0 ... 999 0 -1 num
26 AO AOL Analog.Out 5 470 R AOL analogue output 5 WORD Y 0 ... 999 0 -1 num
27 AI ExtAInput[0] 898 R AIE analogue input 1 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
28 AI ExtAInput[1] 900 R AIE analogue input 2 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
29 AI ExtAInput[2] 902 R AIE analogue input 3 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C/Bar
30 AI ExtAInput[3] 904 R AIE analogue input 4 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C/Bar
31 AI ExtAInput[4] 906 R AIE analogue input 5 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
32 DI DIL ExtDigInput 1 33742 R DIE digital input 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
33 DI DIL ExtDigInput 2 33742.1 R DIE digital input 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
34 DI DIL ExtDigInput 3 33742.2 R DIE digital input 3 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
35 DI DIL ExtDigInput 4 33742.3 R DIE digital input 4 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
36 DI DIL ExtDigInput 5 33742.4 R DIE digital input 5 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
37 DI DIL ExtDigInput 6 33742.5 R DIE digital input 6 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
38 DI DIL ExtDigInput 7 33742.6 R DIE digital input 7 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
39 DO DOL ExtDigOutput 1 33743 R DOE digital output 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
40 DO DOL ExtDigOutput 2 33743.1 R DOE digital output 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
41 DO DOL ExtDigOutput 3 33743.2 R DOE digital output 3 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
42 DO DOL ExtDigOutput 4 33743.3 R DOE digital output 4 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
43 DO DOL ExtDigOutput 5 33743.4 R DOE digital output 5 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
44 DO DOL ExtDigOutput 6 33743.5 R DOE digital output 6 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
45 AO AOE ExtDigOutput 1 33743.6 R AOE digital output 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
46 AO AOE ExtDigOutput 2 33743.7 R AOE digital output 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
47 AO TCE Analog.Out 1 33710 R TCE analogue output 1 BYTE Y 0 ... 100 0 num
48 AO AOE Analog.Out 1 33712 R AOE analogue output 1 BYTE Y 0 ... 100 0 num
49 AO AOE Analog.Out 2 33714 R AOE analogue output 2 BYTE Y 0 ... 100 0 num
50 AO AOE Analog.Out 3 936 R AOE analogue output 3 WORD Y 0 ... 999 0 -1 num
51 AO AOE Analog.Out 4 938 R AOE analogue output 4 WORD Y 0 ... 999 0 -1 num
52 AO AOE Analog.Out 5 940 R AOE analogue output 5 WORD Y 0 ... 999 0 -1 num
53 AI RemAInput[0] 894 R AIr analogue input 1 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
54 AI RemAInput[1] 896 R AIr analogue input 2 WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C/Bar
55 setpoint Cool real setpoint 1019 R Cool mode setpoint WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
56 setpoint Heat real setpoint 1021 R Heat mode setpoint WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
57 hysteresis Cool real hysteresis 1023 R Cool mode hysteresis WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
58 hysteresis Heat real hysteresis 1025 R Heat mode hysteresis WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
59 time _TimMinOnOnCps 542 R Compressors minimum on/on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
60 time _TimMinOfOfCps 544 R Compressors minimum off/off time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
61 time _TimMinOnOnPrz 546 R Capacity steps minimum on/on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
62 time _TimMinOfOfPrz 548 R Capacity steps minimum off/off time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
63 time _TimMinOfOnCp0 550 R Compressor 1 minimum off/on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
64 time _TimMinOfOnCp1 552 R Compressor 2 minimum off/on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
65 time _TimMinOfOnCp2 554 R Compressor 3 minimum off/on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
66 time _TimMinOfOnCp3 556 R Compressor 4 minimum off/on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
67 time _TimMinOnOnCp0 558 R Compressor 1 minimum on/on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
68 time _TimMinOnOnCp1 560 R Compressor 2 minimum on/on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
69 time _TimMinOnOnCp2 562 R Compressor 3 minimum on/on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
70 time _TimMinOnOnCp3 564 R Compressor 4 minimum on/on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
71 time _TimMinOnCp0 566 R Compressor 1 minimum on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
72 time _TimMinOnCp1 568 R Compressor 2 minimum on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
73 time _TimMinOnCp2 570 R Compressor 3 minimum on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 s
74 time _TimMinOnCp3 572 R Compressor 4 minimum on time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 d
75 time _TimEntraSbriC1 582 R Circuit 1 defrost interval/duration timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 d
76 time _TimEntraSbriC2 584 R Circuit 2 defrost interval/duration timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 d
77 time _TimSgoccioC1 586 R Circuit 1 coil drainage time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 d
78 time _TimSgoccioC2 588 R Circuit 2 coil drainage time timer WORD 0 ... 32768 0 d
79 time _TimRitOnCpPomPri 592 R Timer compressor on delay after internal pump WORD 0 ... 32768 0 d
80 time _TimRitOfPomPriCp 594 R Timer internal pump off delay after compressors WORD 0 ... 32768 0 d
81 state _SbrinOnC1 33870.6 R Defrost status 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
82 state _SbrinOnC2 33870.7 R Defrost status 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
83 Mode _MemoOff 33028 R Device OFF 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
84 Mode _MemoRemotOff 33028.1 R Device OFF 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
85 Mode _MemoLocalStBy 33028.2 R Device STANDBY 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
86 Mode _MemoRemotStBy 33028.3 R Device STANDBY 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
87 Mode _MemoLocalCool 33028.4 R Device COOL 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
88 Mode _MemoRemotCool 33028.5 R Device COOL 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
89 Mode _MemoLocalHeat 33028.6 R Device HEAT 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
90 Mode _MemoRemotHeat 33028.7 R Device HEAT 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
91 counter STCPOreFunz[0] 979 R Compressor 1 hours of operation WORD 0 ... 65535 0 hours
92 counter STCPOreFunz[1] 981 R Compressor 2 hours of operation WORD 0 ... 65535 0 hours
93 counter STCPOreFunz[2] 983 R Compressor 3 hours of operation WORD 0 ... 65535 0 hours
94 counter STCPOreFunz[3] 985 R Compressor 4 hours of operation WORD 0 ... 65535 0 hours
95 counter STPMOreFunz[0] 987 R Pump 1 hours of operation WORD 0 ... 65535 0 hours
96 counter STPMOreFunz[1] 989 R Pump 2 hours of operation WORD 0 ... 65535 0 hours
97 counter STPMOreFunz[2] 991 R Pump 3 hours of operation WORD 0 ... 65535 0 hours
98 counter STPMOreFunz[3] 993 R Pump 4 hours of operation WORD 0 ... 65535 0 hours
99 differential SBDiffSetPoint 1039 R Temperature controller setpoint dynamic differential WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
100 offset SBDiffAdaptive 1041 R Adaptive function offset WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
101 differential STDiffResPri 1043 R Supplementary heater setpoint dynamic differential WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
102 differential STDiffBoiler 1045 R Boiler setpoint dynamic differential WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
103 setpoint SBSetStartSbri 1053 R Defrost start setpoint WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
104 differential SBDiffStartSb 1055 R Defrost setpoint dynamic differential WORD Y -500 ... 999 0 -1 °C
105 state SBCircuiti[0].OutAttive 33835 R Temperature control steps supplied circuit 1 BYTE 0 ... 4 0 num
106 state SBCircuiti[1].OutAttive 33841 R Temperature control steps supplied circuit 2 BYTE 0 ... 4 0 num
107 alarm Er00 33104 R General alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
108 alarm Er01 33104.1 R Digital high pressure alarm circuit 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
109 alarm Er02 33104.2 R Digital high pressure alarm circuit 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
110 alarm Er03 33104.3 R Analogue high pressure alarm circuit 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
111 alarm Er04 33104.4 R Analogue high pressure alarm circuit 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
112 alarm Er05 33104.5 R Digital low pressure alarm circuit 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
113 alarm Er06 33104.6 R Digital low pressure alarm circuit 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
114 alarm Er07 33104.7 R Analogue low pressure alarm circuit 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
115 alarm Er08 33105 R Analogue low pressure alarm circuit 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
116 alarm Er09 33105.1 R Low refrigerant alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
117 alarm Er10 33105.2 R Thermal switch alarm compressor 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
118 alarm Er11 33105.3 R Thermal switch alarm compressor 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
119 alarm Er12 33105.4 R Thermal switch alarm compressor 3 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
120 alarm Er13 33105.5 R Thermal switch alarm compressor 4 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
121 alarm Er15 33105.7 R Oil pressure switch alarm compressor 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
122 alarm Er16 33106 R Oil pressure switch alarm compressor 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
123 alarm Er17 33106.1 R Oil pressure switch alarm compressor 3 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
124 alarm Er18 33106.2 R Oil pressure switch alarm compressor 4 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
125 alarm Er20 33106.4 R Internal circuit flow meter alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
126 alarm Er21 33106.5 R Internal circuit pump 1 thermal switch alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
127 alarm Er22 33106.6 R Internal circuit pump 2 thermal switch alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
128 alarm Er25 33107.1 R Internal circuit pump thermal switch alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
129 alarm Er26 33107.2 R External circuit water pump 1 thermal switch alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
130 alarm Er27 33107.3 R External circuit water pump 2 thermal switch alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
131 alarm Er30 33107.6 R Internal circuit antifreeze alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
132 alarm Er31 33107.7 R External circuit antifreeze alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
133 alarm Er35 33108.3 R High temperature alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
134 alarm Er40 33109 R Internal exchanger fan thermal switch alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
135 alarm Er41 33109.1 R External exchanger fan thermal switch alarm circuit 1 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
136 alarm Er42 33109.2 R External exchanger fan thermal switch alarm circuit 2 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
137 alarm Er43 33109.3 R Free-cooling heat exchanger fan thermal switch alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
138 alarm Er45 33109.5 R Clock faulty alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
139 alarm Er46 33109.6 R Time loss alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
140 alarm Er47 33109.7 R LAN communication absent alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
141 alarm Er50 33110.2 R Internal exchanger electric heater 1 thermal switch alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
142 alarm Er51 33110.3 R Internal exchanger electric heater 2 thermal switch alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
143 alarm Er56 33111 R Auxiliary output alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
Internal exchanger faulty air/water inlet temperature
144 alarm Er60 33111.4 R probe alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
Internal exchanger faulty air/water outlet temperature
145 alarm Er61 33111.5 R probe alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
146 alarm Er62 33111.6 R External exchanger faulty temperature probe alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
 External exchanger faulty air/water inlet temperature
147 alarm Er63 33111.7 R probe alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
External exchanger faulty air/water outlet temperature
148 alarm Er64 33112 R probe alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
149 alarm Er67 33112.3 R Faulty display probe alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
150 alarm Er68 33112.4 R Faulty external temperature probe alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
151 alarm Er69 33112.5 R High pressure transducer circuit 1 or 2 faulty alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
152 alarm Er70 33112.6 R Low pressure transducer circuit 1 or 2 faulty alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
153 alarm Er73 33113.1 R Input dynamic setpoint faulty alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
154 alarm Er74 33113.2 R Internal exchanger transducer faulty alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
155 alarm Er75 33113.3 R External exchanger 1 or 2 transducer faulty alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
156 alarm Er80 33114 R Configuration error alarm 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
157 alarm Er81 33114.1 R Compressor hours of operation exceeded signal 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
Internal circuit pump hours of operation exceeded
158 alarm Er85 33114.5 R signal 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
External circuit pump hours of operation exceeded
159 alarm Er86 33114.6 R signal 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
160 alarm Er90 33115.2 R Alarm log full signal 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 flag
161 net command Alarm reset 33552.2 W Reset manual alarms 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
162 net command COOL 33552.3 W Select COOL mode 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
163 net command HEAT 33552.4 W Select HEAT mode 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
164 net command STAND BY 33552.5 W Select STANDBY mode 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
165 net command DEF 33552.6 W Activate manual defrost 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
166 net command ON/OFF 33552.7 W Select ON/OFF mode 1 bit 0 ... 1 0 num
Energy Fle
29 FUNCTIONS (FOLDER FNC)
The Functions menu is used to perform a number of manual functions such as switching the device on/off, acknowledging
alarms, deleting the alarm history, running a manual defrost and using the Multi Function key (MFK).
A number of these operations can be done from the keyboard and main display using the keys - see User Interface
chapter.
Functions associated to keys can be disabled and password-only access allowed to these functions at a "Service" level only
via parameters (see Parameters chapter).
For more details, see the table below:

folder operation Function Notes

activated by
[key] if
configured
FnC dEF Manual defrost YES [UP]
tA Alarm acknowledgment YES [UP+DOWN]
St Switch device on/off YES [DOWN]
CC Copy Card Use (multi- NO
function key)
EUr Reset alarm log NO

To open the Functions menu (folder Fnc) perform steps 1-4 as indicated below:

To view
folder
FnC in
the
main
displa
y,
press
the
1
Esc
and
Set
keys at
the
same
time.
[esc+s
et]
Pressing
both
keys
will
open
the
Progra
mmin
g
menu:
2 ------------
<IMG INFO>
217
98,3
0

-------
The first
folder
you
will
see is
the
PAr
folder.

Scroll
with
the
“Up”
and
“DOW
N”
keys
3 until
you
find
the
FnC
folder.
------------
-----
Press the

Energy Fle
 set
key to
open
the
Functi
ons
menu.
The first
label
you
will
see is
dEF.
------------
-------
Scroll
using
the
“up”
and
4 “down
” keys
to find
other
labels/
folder
s. In
this
order:
 (dEF)
 tA
 St
 CC
 EUr
29.1 Manual defrost activation (dEF folder)

Press [esc + set] in the main screen.

The label ‘PAr’ will appear. Scroll with ‘UP’ and
See 1-4 ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘FnC’ label.
Press ‘set’. The label ‘dEF’ will appear. Scroll
with ‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘dEF’ label

Press the "set" key to activate defrost manually

from the keyboard

The DEFROST LED will start to blink.

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0

29.2 Alarm acknowledgment (folder tA)

Press [esc + set] in the main screen.

The label ‘PAr’ will appear. Scroll with ‘UP’ and
See 1-4 ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘FnC’ label.
Press ‘set’. The label ‘dEF’ will appear. Scroll
with ‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘TA’ label.

Press the "set" key to acknowledge active

alarms.
29.3 Change On/OFF state (folder St)

Press [esc + set] in the main screen.

The label ‘PAr’ will appear. Scroll with ‘UP’ and
See 1-4 ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘FnC’ label.
Press ‘set’. The label ‘dEF’ will appear. Scroll
with ‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘St’ label.

The label "OFF" will appear in the "St" folder if

the device is ON, or "OFF", if the device is
switched OFF locally or by remote

Press the set key to change state from OFF to

On

------------------------------------------------------

or from On to OFF

29.4 Multi Function key

When connected to the Energy TTL serial port, the Multi Function Key (MFK) allows you to rapidly program device
parameters (up/download parameter map to or from one or more devices of the same type) and also program the
device’s firmware.

<IMG INFO>
346,15
149,75
0
2
0,05
0
-1

NOTE: The MFK and SB600 connect with the YELLOW cable.
For fast parameter programming, the upload (label UL), download (label dL) and copy card formatting (label Fr)
operations are as explained below:

UPLOAD (copy from DEVICE to MULTI FUNCTION KEY)

By doing this, the programming parameters and alarms log will be downloaded from Energy SB600 to the Multi
Function Key.
DOWNLOAD (copy from MULTI FUNCTION KEY to DEVICE)
By doing this, the programming parameters will be uploaded from the Multi Function Key to the device.
FORMAT*
Formatting the Multi Function Key consists of deleting the contents of the Multi Function Key
* This should be done prior to the Upload when used for the first time

Upload / Download / Formatting

The download procedure is illustrated in
the figure.
Press [esc + set] in the main screen.
See 1-4 The label ‘PAr’ will appear. Scroll with ‘UP’ and
‘DOWN’ to find the ‘FnC’ label.
Press ‘set’. The label ‘dEF’ will appear. Scroll
with ‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘CC’ label

The commands you need to use the Multi

Function Key are in the "CC" folder. Press
the ‘set’ key to access the functions.

Scroll with the UP and DOWN keys to find the

desired function:
 UL for upload
 dL for download
 Fr for format

Press the ‘set’ key and the upload (or

download) will be performed. (in this
example, dL- download)

Wait for a few seconds...

Wait for a few seconds...

<IMG INFO>
217
97,8
0

If this completes successfully, ‘yes’ is displayed;

otherwise ‘Err’ is displayed (°).

On completion, remove the MFK.

<IMG INFO>
217
96,7
0
29.4.1 Download from reset
Connect the key with the device OFF.

Download firmware
At start up, if a compatible firmware is loaded into the MFK (the MFK can be prepared fro this with the Device Manager
software), the new firmware is downloaded into the device.
This happens as follows:
 firmware verification/update (MFK led flashes)
 termination with successful programming (MFK on fixed)
 switch off the device
If a compatible firmware is not loaded into the MFK, no download takes place.
If, on termination, the MFK led does not stay on fixed, the operation must be repeated as this means it failed.

Download parameters
On start up, if there is a compatible parameter map in the MFK, the programming parameters are loaded into the device;

lamp test completed…

<IMG INFO>
217
97,8
0

Example A
…dLY… appears on the display
If the procedure terminates successfully.

<IMG INFO>
217
97,2
0

Example B
…dLn… appears on the display.
If the procedure does not complete
successfully (°)

<IMG INFO>
217
96,7
0

In both cases, the device will be switched OFF

locally (OFF appears on the display).
When you press [DOWN] (°°), the device will
operate:
With the new map Example A
With the previous map Example B

Remove the Copy Card on completion

(°°) see
User Interface chapter, (folder Par/UI) local
ON/OFF section
Change On/OFF state (folder St) section

NOTES:
 If the MFK is loaded with both a compatible firmware and a compatible parameter map, the firmware is
downloaded first and then (after the device has been switched off and back on again manually) the parameter
map.
 The formatting function is ONLY REQUIRED FOR UPLOADING (**):
o to use the Multi Function Key the first time (Multi Function Key that has never been used) and
o to use the Multi Function Key with models that are not mutually compatible.
o (**) a pre-programmed key supplied by Eliwell to DOWNLOAD parameters does not need to be
formatted. NOTE. Formatting can NOT be cancelled.
 after the download operation, the instrument will work with the newly loaded parameters map/firmware.
  Remove the key on completion of the operation

(°) If the string Err / dLn (download from reset) appears:

 Check that the key is connected to the device
<IMG INFO>
42,75
29,75
1
2
51
28 35

 Check the Multi Function Key - Energy SB600 connection (check the TTL cable)
 Check that the key is compatible with the device
 Contact Eliwell technical support

29.5 Reset alarm log (folder EUr)

Press [esc + set] in the main screen.
The label ‘PAr’ will appear. Scroll with ‘UP’ and
‘DOWN’ to find the ‘FnC’ label.
See 1-4 Press ‘set’. The label ‘dEF’ will appear. Scroll
with ‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘EUr’
label.

Press the "set" key for 3 seconds [set]

The ‘YES’ label appears to indicate that the

alarm log has been deleted

<IMG INFO>
217
97,8
0
30 DEVICE OPERATION
Permitted use

This product is used to control centralised air-conditioning units

For safety reasons the instrument must be installed and used in accordance with the instructions supplied. Users must not
be able to access parts with dangerous voltage levels under normal operating conditions. The device must be suitably
protected from water and dust according to the specific application and only be accessible using special tools (except for
the front keypad). The device can be fitted to refrigeration equipment for household and/or similar use. It has been tested
and in safety terms, conforms to applicable harmonized European standards. It has been rated as:
• In terms of design, as a built-in automatic electronic control controller;
• In terms of automatic operating features, as a type 1B and 1Y (TRIAC model) controller;
• In terms of software class and structure, as a Class A controller.

Unintended Use
The use of the unit for applications other than those described above is
forbidden. It should be noted that the relay contacts supplied with the device are functional and therefore may be subject
to fault.
Any protection devices required to comply with product requirements or dictated by common sense due for obvious
safety reasons should be installed externally.

31 DEVICEMANAGER
The Device Manager software uses the TTL serial connection of the SB600 to simplify and aid in installing and managing
the SB600

Main features
 Device parameters management.
 Real-time monitoring and recording of system variables.
 Device alarms records management.
 Firmware updating.

All basic components required for the use of DeviceManager are described below.

31.1.1 Device Manager software component

The software has a graphic user interface, which is described in the DeviceManager manual.
The Device Manager software supports both Eliwell and Modbus protocols.
The functionalities available to the customer depend on which Device Manager hardware interface he/she has purchased.

31.1.2 Device Manager interface component

The USB/TTL hardware interface, used in association with the software package, enables:
 use of the software itself.
 connection to devices for controlling them.
 connection to the Multi Function Key component.

There are three different types of interface, corresponding to three user levels:
 DMI 100-1 END USER.
 DMI 100-2 SERVICE.
 DMI 100-3 MANUFACTURER.
Depending on the type purchased, the client has access to the functions described above.

31.1.3 Multi Function Key Component

This is a memory device, which enables:
 updating the device's parameter values.
 updating the device's firmware.
 downloading parameter values from the device.
 downloading the alarms records from the device.

For more details

--> See manual
8MAx0219 Device Manager
X = 0 IT; 1 EN; 2 FR; 3 ES; 5 DE; A RU

Energy Fle
32 SUPERVISION
The TTL serial - referred to also as COM1 - can be used to configure the device, parameters, states, and variables using the
Modbus protocol.

32.1 Configuration with Modbus RTU

Modbus is a client/server protocol for communication between network linked devices.
Modbus devices communicate using a master-slave technique in which a single device (the master) can send messages. All
other devices in the network (slaves) respond by returning the data required to the master or executing the action
indicated in the message received. A slave is defined as a device connected to a network that processes information and
sends the results to a master using the Modbus protocol.
The master can send messages to individual slaves or to the entire network (broadcast) whilst slaves can only reply to
messages received individually from the master.
The Modbus standard used by Eliwell uses RTU coding for data transmission.

32.1.1 Data format (RTU)

The data coding model used defines the structure of messages sent to the network and the way in which the information
is decoded. The type of coding selected is generally based on specific parameters (baud rate, parity, etc)*** and some
devices only support specific code models. However, the same model must be used for all devices connected to a Modbus
network.
The protocol used the RTU binary method with the following bytes:
8 bits for data, even parity bit (not configurable), 1 stop bit.

***configured with parameters CF30, CF31 - see table at start of paragraph

NOTE: transmission speed must be set at 9600 baud.

The device is fully configurable via parameter settings
They can be modified with:
 the instrument’s keyboard
 Multi Function key
 by sending data via the Modbus protocol straight to individual instruments, or via broadcast, using the
address 0 (broadcast)

The connection diagram when using Modbus is shown below

ModBus - device connection diagram ModBus - multiple devices connection diagram

Single via TTL Via RS485

IMG INFO

IMG INFO

PC / Interface connection RS232 cable

Device / Bus Adapter connection TTL cable with 5 way connector (30cm) (available
with other sizes/lengths)
Bus adapter BA150
Bus Adapter / Interface connection RS485 cable
shielded and twisted (example: Belden model 8762
cable)

Energy Fle
32.1.2 Modbus commands available and data areas

The commands implemented are:

Modbus
Description of command
command
3 Read multiple registers on Client side
16 Write multiple registers on Client side
43 Read device ID
DESCRIPTION
Manufacturer ID
Model ID
Version ID

Length restrictions

maximum length in bytes of messages sent to device 30 BYTES

maximum length in bytes of messages received by device 30 BYTES

Multiple read of 2 real setpoints

Field Decimal Hex Dimension

Device address (slave): 1 0x01 byte
Read command code: 3 0x03 byte
Start address: 975 0x03CF Word
Number of registers (words) to read: 3 0x0003 Word

Configuration of COOL operating mode

Write value 8 to word for remote commands at address h2FC

Field Decimal Hex Dimension

Device address (slave): 1 0x01 byte
Write command code: 10 0x0A byte
Write address: 764 0x02FC Word
Number of words to write: 1 0x0001 Word
Number of bytes (No. words x 2): 2 0x02 Word
Value (word) to write: 8 0x0008 Word

At the end of this operation, the device will switch to COOL mode (if enabled).

Configuration of ON/OFF operating mode

Write value 128 to word for remote commands at address h2FC

At the end of this operation, the device will toggle the On/Off state (if enabled).

The Ram variables that can be monitored and commands available are listed below.

Commands available:
 Manual alarm reset
 Change operating mode (Heat, Cool and St-By)
 Switch device on/off
 Enable defrost

Additional operations can be performed by following specific procedures:

 read alarm log
 change/set time
 reset running time of compressor and pump outputs
Details for read alarm log
The alarm log is saved in the EEPROM in a circular buffer composed of 7-byte records formatted as follows

Byte bit index Data Values

0 Bit 0 Alarm record flag free Must always be 0
1 Bit 1 Alarm state 0 = alarm reset; 1 = alarm current
2 Bit 2 Automatic reset alarm 0 = automatic reset; 1 = manual reset
3 -
0
4 -
5 - Not used
6 -
7 -
0 Bit 0
1 Bit 1
2 Bit 2 0÷59 = minutes
Start of alarm minute
3 Bit 3 >59 = undetermined value
1
4 Bit 4
5 Bit 5
6 Bit 0
7 Bit 1
0 Bit 2 0÷59 = minutes
End of alarm minute
1 Bit 3 >59 = undetermined value
2 Bit 4
3 Bit 5
2
4 Bit 0
5 Bit 1
0÷23 = hours
6 Bit 2 Start of alarm hour
>23 = undetermined value
7 Bit 3
0 Bit 4
1 Bit 0
2 Bit 1
0÷23 = hours
3 Bit 2 End of alarm hour
3 >23 = undetermined value
4 Bit 3
5 Bit 4
6 Bit 0
7 Bit 1
1÷31 = day
0 Bit 2 Start of alarm day
0 or >31 = undefined value
1 Bit 3
2 Bit 4
3 Bit 0
4
4 Bit 1
1÷31 = day
5 Bit 2 End of alarm day
0 or >31 = undefined value
6 Bit 3
7 Bit 4
0 Bit 0
1 Bit 1 0÷23 = hours
Start of alarm month
2 Bit 2 >23 = undetermined value
3 Bit 3
5
4 Bit 0
5 Bit 1 0÷23 = hours
End of alarm month
6 Bit 2 >23 = undetermined value
7 Bit 3
0 Bit 0
1 Bit 1
2 Bit 2
3 Bit 3 0÷99 = alarm code
6 Alarm code
4 Bit 4 >99 Not allowed
5 Bit 5
6 Bit 6
7 Bit 7

To identify the index of the first record, read variable PntStorAll at address h83A8
To identify the number of records present, read variable NumStorAll at address h83A9

Address 0x83A8 => data: 0x0027 = Index of first record (most recent);
Address 0x83A9 => data: 0x0027 = number of records (39);

To calculate the address of the most recent record:

Address EU00 = 51712 + (N-1)x7 = 51712 + 17x7 = 51832 (0xCA77)
Read EU00
TX: 01, 03, CA, 77, 00, 07, 8B, CA.
RX: 01, 03, 0E, 00, 82, 00, DD, 00, CF, 00, FE, 00, 04, 00, 06, 00, 3C, 9B, 13.

Address 0xCA77 => data: 0x0082 = Byte 0 of alarms log;

Address 0xCA78 => data: 0x00DD = Byte 1 of alarms log;
Address 0xCA79 => data: 0x00CF = Byte 2 of alarms log;
Address 0xCA7A => data: 0x00FE = Byte 3 of alarms log;
Address 0xCA7B => data: 0x0004 = Byte 4 of alarms log;
Address 0xCA7C => data: 0x0006 = Byte 5 of alarms log;
Address 0xCA7D => data: 0x003C = Byte 6 of alarms log;

Alarm record flag free =b0 =0

Alarm state =b1 =1
Automatic reset alarm =b0 =0
Not used = b 10000 = free
Start of alarm minute = b 011101 = 29
End of alarm minute = b 111111 = 63 (undefined)
Start of alarm hour = b 01100 = 12
End of alarm hour = b 11111 = 31 (undefined)
Start of alarm day = b 10011 = 19
End of alarm day = b 00000 = 0 (undefined)
Start of alarm month = b 0110 =6
End of alarm month = b 0000 = 0 (undefined)
Alarm code = b 00111100 = 60

The result shows that on EU00 there is an Er60 that started on 19/06 at 12.19 and which is still active.

To read EU01, the address is determined as follows

Address EU01 = Address EU00 - 7 = 51832 - 7 = 51825

To read EU02 continue by subtracting 7 fromaddress EU01 and so on…

NOTE: The minimum limit is address 51712 (hCA00) after which, if there are still alarms to be read, you must start again
from address 52404 (hCCB5) (the buffer is circular and after the 99th record it writes over the old ones).

Details for reading, modifying, setting the time

To write the hour, address the structure DataWrite at address h82F4

Write the seconds byte last!

Example: Set time h11:33 on 28/03/2007

Field Address Decimal Hex Dimension

0: seconds H82F4 0 0x0000 bytes
1: minutes H82F5 33 0x0021 bytes
2: hours H82F6 11 0x000B bytes
3: dayweek H82F7 - - bytes
4: daymonth H82F8 28 0x001C bytes
5: month H82F9 3 0x0003 bytes
6: year H82FA 7 0x0007 bytes

NOTE: Write the seconds byte last!

Write sequence:
Write 6 words of 46, 12, 0, 19, 6, 8 at the address H82AF5.

Write a word of 00 at the address H82AF4

Details for resetting the running time

To read and/or clear running time, address the counters in the device's EEPROM and RAM

STCPOreFunz[0] to the address h3AB Running time CP1 (in Ram)

STCPOreFunz[1] to the address h3AC Running time CP2 (in Ram)
STPMOreFunz[0] to the address h3B3 Running time P1 (in Ram)
STPMOreFunz[1] to the address h3B4 Running time P2 (in Ram)

EE_OreFunzCP0 to the address h4F20 Running time CP1 (in EEPROM)

EE_OreFunzCP1 to the address h4F22 Running time CP2 (in EEPROM)
EE_OreFunzP0 to the address h4F38 Running time P1 (in EEPROM)
EE_OreFunzP1 to the address h4F38 Running time P2 (in EEPROM)
Multiple reading of running time CP to the RAM address h3AB
The full command to be sent to the device will therefore be:

Address 0x03AB => data: 0x0065 = 101 hours running time CP1;
Address 0x03AC => data: 0x0000 = not used
Address 0x03AD => data: 0x0001 = 1 hours running time CP2;

Clear time CP1 (in RAM and EEPROM)

Write 0 for running time CP at RAM address h3AB

Write 0 for running time CP at EEPROM address h4F20

Variables:
See Parameters chapter (PAr), Client table

32.2 Configuration of device address

The Device Number in a ModBus message is defined by the parameter CF63 - see table at beginning of this section
The address 0 is used for broadcast messages that all slaves recognize. Slaves do not reply to broadcast messages.

32.2.1 Configuration of parameter addresses

The list of addresses is given in the Parameters chapter under the section headed "Parameters Table / visibility, ADDRESS
column (parameter addresses) and VIS PAR ADDRESS (parameter visibility addresses)

32.2.2 Configuration of variable / state addresses

The list of addresses is given in the Parameters chapter, under the section headed Client Table ADDRESS column
33 MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

33.1 Models

33.1.1 SB ● SD ● SC models
Analogue
Analogue Analogue Analogu
Digital inputs Digital outputs outputs
model output outputs inputs
(§) (*) PWM
(*) (**) (**)
(**)
(DO1…DO4)
(DI1…DI6) (TC1) (AO1-AO2) (AO3-AO5) (AI)
(+ DO6)

646 6 4 1 2 3 5

655 6 5 // 2 3 5

model (DI1…DI6) (DO1…DO3) (TC1, TC2) (AO1) (AO3-AO5) (AI)

636 6 3 2 1 3 5

33.1.2 Expansions

Analogue
Analogue An
Digital inputs Digital outputs Analogue output outputs
model outputs
(§) (*) (*) PWM
(**)
(**)

(DO1…DO4)
(DI1…DI6) (TC1) (AO1-AO2) (AO3-AO5)
(+ DO6)
SE632 6 3 // 2 //
SE646 6 4 1 2 3
SE655
6 5 // 2 3

-------
NOTE:
 632/636/646 power 12…24Va
 655 power 12…24Va / 24Va
TTL supplied as standard
(*) high voltage
(**) Safe voltage (SELV) SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE
(§) voltage-free
O.C. Open Collector
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
PPM Pulse Position Modulation
/S indicates the presence of on-board RS485
/C indicates the presence of the RTC - Real Time Clock
TC2 equals to AO2 (TC2=AO2) – see System configuration (folder PAr/CL-Cr-CF) chapter

Energy Fle
33.1.3 Terminals

Analogue Inputs
Model Mounting Dimensions Display
Safe voltage (SELV)

SKP10 panel 74x32x30mm LED / 4 digit -

1 onboard NTC
SKW22
wall 137x96.5x31.3mm LCD 1 V/I configurable
input

1 onboard NTC
LCD
SKW22L wall 137x96.5x31.3mm 1 configurable V/I
backlit
input

SKP22 panel (°) 160x96x10mm LCD

1 input NTC
1 input
NTC/DI/4...20mA
configurable
LCD
SKP22L panel (°) 160x96x10mm
backlit
<IMG INFO>

Power supply from base

(°) Contact the Eliwell Sales Office for wall-mounting accessories.
33.2 Accessories
Note: the photos are intended to show the accessories and are for indication purposes only. The dimensions shown in the
figures are not to scale.

Documentation /
Name Code Description
Notes
230V~/12V 6VA (protected) (*)
TF411205
transformer
Transformer
230V~/12V 11VA (protected)
TF411210
<IMG INFO>

transformer

Programming key to
Multi Function
MFK100T000000 upload/download parameters and
key
applications

230V 10A expansion module with

EXP11
MW320100 base
expansion
fitted to DIN rail

Cables (connector + 1m cables)

to connect inputs and outputs
COLV0000E0100
safe voltage inputs and outputs
(SELV).

COLV0000035100 RS-485 serial port wiring

Cables

Smart – AO3-4-5 CABLES

COLV000042100
(connector + 1m cables)

LC filter, network filter, recommended

EMC filter FT111201 for applications with fan speed
modulation.
NTC 103AT 1.5m probe, (plastic cap,
SN691150
2-wire cable);
NTC103AT 1,5mt
SN8DED11502C0
IP 68 5x20 -50+110°C
NTC103AT 3,0mt
Temperature (1) (2) SN8DED13002C0
probes IP 68 5x20 -50+110°C Cable Double
NTC103AT 1,5mt insulation
SN8DAE11502C0
IP 68 6x20 -50+110°C
NTC103AT 3,0mt
SN8DAE13002C0
IP 68 6x20 -50+110°C
EWPA 010 R 0/5V 0/10BAR
TD400010 ratiometric transducer
Female connector
EWPA 030 R 0/5V 0/30BAR
Ratiometric Include 2mt cable
TD400030 ratiometric transducer
transducers packard IP67
Female connector
EWPA 050 R 0/5V 0/50BAR
TD400050 ratiometric tranducer
Female connector
 Documentation /
Name Code Description
Notes

EWPA050
4…20mA/0..50bar
IP54° / IP67*
Male Female
EWPA007
TD220050° TD320050°
4…20mA/-0.5…7bar
<IMG INFO>

Pressure TD240050* TD340050*

(1) IP54° / IP67*
transducers TD220007° TD320007°
TD240007* TD340007*
Instruction sheet
9IS64173
EWPA
EN-IT-ES-DE-FR-RU

HR range (automatic reset) -

(1) minimum 100,000 ON/OFF cycles
available
Pressure
HL range (manual reset) -
switches (1)
minimum 6,000 ON/OFF cycles
HC range (automatic reset) -
(1)
minimum 250,000 ON/OFF cycles

Instruction sheet
For codes
CFS FAN MODULES Single-phase 8FI40014
See instruction
speed regulators for currents of 2A CFS - Fan Speed
sheet
to 9A Modules GB-I-E-D-F
IMG INFO

(1)

Instruction sheet
8FI40014
CF-REL FAN MODULE 6A 230V
MW991300 CFS - Fan Speed
relay
Fan modules Modules GB-I-E-D-F

Instruction sheet
CFS05 TANDEM FAN MODULE 8FI40016
MW991012 TRIAC 5+5A 230V CFS05 - Fan Speed
Module GB-I-E-D-F

THREE-PHASE FAN REGULATOR

Contact Eliwell Contact Eliwell Sales
Contact Eliwell Sales Department
Sales Department Department

Interface
DM1003002000 DM100-3 Manufacturer
modules
 Documentation /
Name Code Description
Notes
Bus Adapter 130 TTL RS485
TTL/RS-485 communication
interface
BA11250N3700
12 V aux. output for power Instruction sheet
supply to device. 9IS43084 BusAdapter
TTL cable, L = 1 m (2) 130-150-350 GB-I-E-D-F
Bus Adapter 150 TTL RS485
TTL/RS-485 communication
BA10000R3700
interface
TTL cable, L = 1 m (2)

Instruction sheet
8FI40023 RadioAdapter
GB-I-E-D-F
BARF0TS00NH00 RadioAdapter TTL/WIRELESS
(1) 802.15.4
Connectivity Manual 9MAX0010
RadioAdapter
GB-I-E-D-F
<IMG INFO>

Instruction sheet
9IS44065
WebAdapter GB-I-E-D-F-
RUS
WA0ET00X700 WebAdapter
manual
8MA00202 WebAdapter
X = 0 IT; 1 EN; 2 FR; 3
ES; 5 DE; A RU

WebAdapter
WA0WF00X700
Wi-Fi

Contact Eliwell Contact Eliwell Sales

Software Tools Sales Department Device Manager Department

Demo case
Demo Case VAL00031K

(1) Various items available. Contact the Sales Department.

(2) Various lengths can be requested.

GENERAL NOTES:
 COHV and COLV cabling are not required if they are made by the manufacturer.
 Connection of terminal via 3-way cables with no optional modules.
 Eliwell can also supply a variety of different NTC probes depending on the cable type (PVC or silicon) and
length.
Energy Fle
34 ANALITIC INDEX
A Client Table................................................................... 199
Access to folders - menu structure............................. 37 Compressor configuration............................................78
Accessories..................................................................... 220 Compressor on/off sequence .......................................84
ADAPTIVE (FOLDER PAR/AD).................................... 132 Compressor timing.........................................................79
Adaptive function ........................................................133 COMPRESSORS (FOLDER PAR/CP) .............................77
Adaptive function with hysteresis modification Configuration of analogue inputs ..............................53
..................................................................................... 134 Configuration of analogue outputs ...........................60
Adaptive function with setpoint and hysteresis Configuration of device address................................217
modification.............................................................. 134 Configuration of external circuit water pump
Adaptive function with setpoint modification ......................................................................................104
..................................................................................... 132 Configuration of integration heaters ................111
Alarm acknowledgment (folder tA)................... 207 Configuration of internal circuit water pump .88
Alarm Display (AL)......................................................... 43 Configuration of parameter addresses................... 217
Alarm events (Par/EU folder) ...................................... 50 Configuration of SE600 expansion analogue inputs
Alarm table key..........................................................158 ........................................................................................53
Alarms ............................................................................152 Configuration of variable / state addresses .......... 217
ALARMS AND DIAGNOSTICS (FOLDER PAR/AL) .. 152 Configuration with Modbus RTU..............................213
Alarms Table .................................................................158 Configuring SKW remote terminal analogue inputs
Analogue alarms..........................................................157 ........................................................................................53
Analogue Alarms .........................................................157 Continuous operation ........................... 89; 94; 97; 104
Analogue control ......................................................123 Control of the second pump .............................. 89; 104
Analogue inputs SB600 SD600 SC600....................... 53 Cross references................................................................. 7
Analogue inputs: configuration table....................... 53 D
Analogue inputs-Probes ............................................... 13 Data format (RTU) ...................................................... 213
Antifreeze operation with pump........................ 93; 108 Defrost.............................................................................126
ANTIFREEZE PARAMETERS WITH HEAT PUMP DEFROST (FOLDER PAR/DF).......................................125
(FOLDER PAR/AF) - ANTIFREEZE.......................... 136 Defrost alarm management ......................................128
Automatic changeover ................................................. 71 Defrosting cycle............................................................ 126
Automatic reset .........................................................152 Description of keys - combined action................33
Auxiliary heaters...........................................................117 Description of keys and associated functions ..........30
AUXILIARY OUTPUT (FOLDER PAR/HA).................. 117 Device ‘OFF’ --> ‘On’ ......................................................32
Availability of resources................................................ 84 Device ‘On’ --> ‘OFF’ ......................................................32
B Device Manager interface component ................... 212
Behaviour of the Compressors during recovery .... 150 Device Manager software component ................... 212
BLOCK HEAT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/HP)................... 138 DEVICE OPERATION..................................................212
Block heat pump 1 - setpoint....................................139 DEVICEMANAGER.........................................................212
Block heat pump based on external Differential temperature control in Cool / Heat
temperature ............................................................138 mode .............................................................................68
Block heat pump based on regulation Digital alarms............................................................... 153
temperature ............................................................138 Digital Alarms .............................................................. 153
Block heat pump from digital input........................139 Digital control.............................................................. 122
BOILER (FOLDER PAR/BR) .......................................... 118 Digital Input Configuration ......................................... 56
Boiler configuration..................................................... 118 Digital inputs...................................................................56
Boiler differential..........................................................119 Digital inputs: configuration table.......................56
Boiler regulation ..........................................................120 Digital output configuration .......................................58
C Digital Outputs ...............................................................58
Change On/OFF state (folder St) ........................ 208 Digital temperature control.........................................69
Changeover from Cool to Antifreeze and vice Disclaimer.........................................................................29
versa............................................................................. 74 Display ..............................................................................34
Changeover from Cool to Heat and vice versa ....... 73 Display and LEDS............................................................28
Circuit pressure release ................................................. 76 Display and reset compressor/pump hours..............47

Energy Fle
Display Inputs/Outputs (AiL, diL, tCL1/AOL, dOL).. 39 F
Download from reset...................................................210 Fan control in defrost ..................................................101
DYNAMIC SETPOINT (FOLDER PAR/DS)................. 129 Fan control with single condensation .....................102
E First switch on .................................................................36
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS........................................ 13 Fixed modification (decalibration) of the setpoint
End defrost and coil drainage...................................127 (dS00=2).................................................................... 131
Energy Flex - Alarm log .............................................. 164 Flow switch alarm ....................................................... 155
Entering a password (Par/PASS folder)..................... 49 Folder visibility table................................................... 196
ET(MT example...........................................................134 FREECOOLING (FOLDER PAR/FC) .............................121
ET<MT example..........................................................132 Free-Cooling control and Free-Cooling Valve
Example of AO1 / AO2 connection............................ 19 control .......................................................................121
Example of AO3 - AO4 connection ............................ 19 FUNCTIONS (FOLDER FNC)........................................205
Example of AO5 connection........................................ 20 Functions (Par/FnC folder)...........................................49
Example of automatic changeover based on G
external air temperature.......................................... 71 General Description ......................................................... 7
Example of automatic changeover based on water General specifications....................................................25
temperature ................................................................ 71 General warnings.........................................................13
Example of connection of high voltage outputs..... 21 H
Example of connection SB600 – SE600 ..................... 22 Heat – defrost changeover ...........................................75
Example of connection SC600 – SE600 – SKP10 – Heat – defrost mode changeover............................. 127
SK22/22L...................................................................... 24 Heaters in defrost mode..............................................114
I
Example of connection SC600 – SKP 10 ................... 22
I/O features ......................................................................26
Example of connection SD600/SC600 – SE600 ....... 22
Icons for emphasis............................................................ 7
Example of current/voltage input connection ........ 18
Improper Use.................................................................29
Example of DO5 connection.................................... 20
Integration heater differential.................................. 111
Example of how to set the setpoint (SP)................... 44
Integration heater regulation................................... 113
Example of low voltage input/output connection . 18
Internal antifreeze heater ......................................109
Example of low voltage inputs NTC/DI..................... 18
Internal circuit antifreeze heater control............... 110
Examples of network connections.............................. 22
INTERNAL CIRCUIT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/PI) ...........88
Exclusion of a circuit or compressor .......................... 87
Internal circuit pump analogue control in Cool /
EXP...................................................................................171
Heat........................................................................89; 90
Expansions .....................................................................218
Internal circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/PE)........ 103
.................................................................................89; 90
External circuit pump analogue control in Cool /
INTERNAL EXCHANGER ELECTRIC HEATERS (FOLDER
Heat ............................................................................104
PAR/HI).......................................................................109
External circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat
Internal Free-Cooling Fan control.......................122
.....................................................................................104
INTRODUCTION................................................................ 7
EXTERNAL EXCHANGER ELECTRIC HEATERS (FOLDER
K
PAR/HE) ..................................................................... 115 Keys....................................................................................30
EXTERNAL EXCHANGER FAN (FOLDER PAR/FE) ..... 96 L
External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool101 LED utilities table ..................................................... 168
External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool / LEDs and Display ............................................................34
Heat .............................................................................. 98 LEDs: decimal point........................................................34
External exchanger fan analogue control in Heat LEDs: States and Operating Modes ............................35
.....................................................................................101 LEDs: utilities....................................................................36
External exchanger fan digital control in Cool / Heat LEDs: Values and Units of Measure ............................35
................................................................................ 97; 99 Local On/OFF...................................................................32
External exchanger pump analogue control in Cool M
and Heat ....................................................................106 Main Display Menu........................................................37
External exchanger pump digital control in Cool Main functions: ................................................................. 8
and Heat ....................................................................106 Managing resources ......................................................84
External FreeCooling fan control........................ 123 Manual alarm acknowledgment and reset..............33
Manual defrost..............................................................128
Manual defrost activation (dEF folder)................... 207 N
Manual reset ...............................................................152 No. interventions time................................................ 152
MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY.............................................9 Non-power stage compressors (CP00 = 0) ...............77
Mechanical dimensions ......................................... 12; 28 O
Mechanical specifications............................................ 28 Operating Mode Menu..................................................38
Minimum compressor on time.................................... 79 Operating modes.................................................. 70; 140
Minimum compressor on time for power stage OPERATING MODES – TEMPERATURE CONTROL
increase ........................................................................ 80 (FOLDER PAR/TR).......................................................63
Minimum compressor switch on time for decrease in Operating states .............................................................70
power stages ............................................................... 80 OPERATING STATES (FOLDER PAR/ST) .....................70
Minimum time ..............................................................132 Operating states table...................................................72
Minimum time between switching off/on for a given Operation in response to request................ 99; 106
compressor .................................................................. 79 Operation on call ....................................................90; 94
Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost Operation on call: periodic pump activation. 91; 106
mode............................................................................. 81 Other timings ..................................................................81
P
Minimum time between switching on/on for a given
Parameters (folder PAr)............................................48
compressor .................................................................. 79
PARAMETERS (PAR) .....................................................165
Minimum time between the switching off of more
Parameters / visibility table ...................................... 171
than one compressor ................................................ 80
Parameters / visibility table, folder visibility table
Minimum time between the switching on of more
and client table ........................................................170
than one compressor ................................................ 79
Permitted use...................................................................29
Modbus commands available and data areas .....214
Post-ventilation...............................................................95
Models ............................................................................ 218
Power failure during defrost ......................................128
MODELS AND ACCESSORIES ..................................... 218
Power limit with Free-Cooling active...................... 124
Models and Features ........................................................8
Power limitation - by external temperature (Cool
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a
and Heat)...................................................................141
function of the dynamic setpoint input.............. 129
Power limitation - by high pressure probe (Cool
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as
and Heat) .................................................................143
a function of the dynamic setpoint input with
Power limitation - by low pressure probe (Cool
negative offset. ......................................................130
and Heat) .................................................................144
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a
Power limitation - by temperature (Cool and Heat)
function of the dynamic setpoint input with
......................................................................................142
positive offset............................................................129
POWER LIMITATION (FOLDER PAR/PL)...................140
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based
Power limitation to 50%..............................................145
on the external temperature................................. 130
Power stage compressors (CP00 = 1,2) .....................78
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based
Power supply - High voltage inputs (relay) ..............13
on the external temperature (dS00=1)...............130
Pressure probes ...............................................................13
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint
Programming menu.......................................................48
based on the external temperature
Proportional power step temperature control in
(dS00=1):Modification based on the external
Cool / Heat mode.......................................................66
temperature with negative offset...................130
Proportional temperature control..............................66
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint
Protection.......................................................................135
based on the external temperature
Pump anti-lock (anti-sticking) mode.......................107
(dS00=1):Modification based on the external
Pump antilock mode .....................................................92
temperature with positive offset ....................130
Pump-down on start-up and during shutdown ......86
Modification based on the dynamic setpoint input
R
with negative offset.................................................130 Real setpoint and hysteresis.........................................63
Modification based on the dynamic setpoint input Real time ET .................................................................. 132
with positive offset...................................................129 RECIRCULATION FAN (FOLDER PAR/FI)....................94
Modification of setpoint in heating...................133 Recirculation fan in Heating / Cooling .....................95
MT....................................................................................132 RECOVERY (FOLDER PAR/RC) ....................................148
Multi Function key....................................................... 208 Recovery Regulation ....................................................149
Multi Function Key Component................................212
Recovery switch-off............................................ 149; 151 States Menu.....................................................................39
Recovery switch-on ............................................ 149; 150 SUPERVISION.................................................................213
References ...........................................................................7 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (FOLDER PAR/CF) ...53
Reset alarm log (folder EUr)...................................... 211 T
Resource selection criterion ......................................... 85 Tandem/trio compressor cycling ................................82
Reversal valve management........................................ 73 TECHNICAL DATA...........................................................25
S Technical data: ............................................................... 8
SB ● SD ● SC models...................................................218 Temperature control differential ................................68
SE600 analogue inputs ................................................. 53 Temperature control probes ........................................65
Selecting the circuit/evaporator................................. 85 Temperature controller.................................................65
Selecting the compressor or power stage................. 86 Temperature controller setpoint and hysteresis......63
Serial ................................................................................ 28 Temperature probes.......................................................13
Serial connections TTL connection ............................ 13 Terminals....................................................................... 219
Setpoint and hysteresis differentials: Adaptive TIME BANDS (FOLDER PAR/TE) ................................146
function........................................................................ 64 Time proportional temperature control in Cool /
Setpoint and hysteresis differentials: Remote Heat mode ...................................................................67
differentials (from serial) ......................................... 64 Transformer .....................................................................28
Setpoint and hysteresis from parameter value ....... 63 TRIAC.................................................................................13
Setpoint differential: dynamic differential ............... 64 TTL (COM 1) ....................................................................13
Setpoint differential: Economy differential....... 64 Types of compressor.......................................................77
Setpoint modification in cooling ........................133 Typical applications:........................................................ 7
Setpoint regression ...................................................... 134 U
Setting the clock (CL).................................................... 40 USER INTERFACE (FOLDER PAR/UI) ...........................30
SKP22 - SKP22L remote LCD terminal....................... 24 User interface parameters (UI) – User Interface
SKW analogue inputs.................................................... 53 ..................................................................................... 168
SKW22 - SKW22L remote LCD terminal.................... 23 V
Star-delta ......................................................................... 82 Ventilation control in Free-Cooling .........................102
W
Star-delta/part-winding activation ........................... 82
Wiring diagrams ..........................................................13
Start defrost...................................................................126
Wiring Diagrams ............................................................14
Start defrost setpoint .................................................. 128
Start unloading............................................................ 84
Eliwell Controls S.r.l.
Via dell’ Industria, 15 Zona Industriale Paludi
32010 Pieve d’ Alpago (BL) Italy
Telephone +39 0437 986 111
Facsimile +39 0437 989 066

Sales:
+39 0437 986 100 (Italy)
+39 0437 986 200 (other countries)
[email protected]

Technical helpline:
+39 0437 986 300
E-mail [email protected]

www.eliwell.it

Energy Flex MSK 444

2012/01/MSK 444
Cod: 8MA10223
© Eliwell Controls s.r.l. 2008-2012 All rights
reserved.